Home

Kenwood TS-2000 User's Manual

Contents

1. 68 MEMORY SCAN 68 SCAN RESUME METHOD 68 ALL CHANNEL SCAN 68 GROUP SCAN 69 CALL SCAN 69 VISUAL SCAN 70 Using Visual Scan VFO 70 Changing the Number of Channels to Scan 70 Using Visual Scan Memory Channel 70 CHAPTER 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES ALT Auto Lock Tuning 72 ANTENNAS 72 HF 50 MHz BAND 72 VHF UHF 1 2 GHZ BAND 72 APO Auto Power OFF 72 AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER 72 Presetting 73 ATTENUATOR 73 AUTO MODE 73 BEEP FUNCTION 74 CALL CHANNEL 75 DISPLAY 75 BRIGHTNESS
2. R E W O P ii MODELS COVERED BY THIS MANUAL The models listed below are covered by this manual TS 2000 HF VHF UHF All mode Multi band Transceiver TS 2000X HF VHF UHF 1 2 GHz All mode Multi band Transceiver TS B2000 HF VHF UHF All mode Multi band Transceiver As for TS B2000 refer to the on line help for information on how to operate and control the transceiver Refer to pages 2 3 and 13 for the installation and information on the connectors MARKET CODES K type The Americas E type Europe E2 type Spain The market code is shown on the carton box Refer to the specifications page 105 for the information on available operating frequencies NOTICE TO THE USER One or more of the following statements may be applicable for this equipment FCC WARNING This equipment generates or uses radio frequency energy Changes or modifications to this equipment may cause harmful interference unless the modifications are expressly approved in the instruction manual The user could lose the authority to operate this equipment if an unauthorized change or modification is made INFORMATION TO THE DIGITAL DEVICE USER REQUIRED BY THE FCC This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
3. 75 CONTRAST 75 KEY ILLUMINATION 75 DTMF 75 MANUAL DTMF DIALING 75 DTMF MEMORY 75 Entering DTMF tones 75 Transmitting DTMF Memory Channel Data 76 DTMF Tone Time Length 76 DTMF Pause Period 76 HF RX ANTENNA 76 LINEAR AMPLIFIER CONTROL 76 LOCK FUNCTIONS 77 FREQUENCY LOCK FUNCTION 77 LOCK ALL FUNCTION 77 MICROPHONE PF KEYS 77 MONITOR 77 PF KEY 77 RISE TIME OF CW 77 RX DSP EQUALIZER 78 EQUALIZING RECEIVING AUDIO SSB FM AM 78 SEPARATE SPEAKER OUTPUT 78 S METER SQUELCH 78 SQUELCH HANG TIME
4. Input Output COM Pin No COM Pin Name Ref Computer Function Ref Transceiver I O NC RXD TXD NC GND NC RTS CTS NC RXD Transmit data is serial data transferred from the transceiver to the computer TXD Receive data is serial data transferred from the computer to the transceiver GND Signal ground pin RTS This signal is applied to the transceiver It is used to inhibit transmit data from the transceiver when the computer is not ready to receive data Transmit data is inhibited when the level is low CTS This signal is applied from the transceiver It is used to inhibit transmit data from the computer when the transceiver is not ready to receive data Transmit data is stopped when the level is low CONTROL OPERATION Most computers handle data in the form of bits and bytes A bit is the smallest piece of information that a computer can handle A byte is composed of eight bits This is the most convenient form for most computer data This data may be sent in the form of either serial or parallel data strings The parallel method is faster but more complicated while the serial method is slower and requires less complicated equipment The serial form is therefore a less expensive alternative Serial data transmission uses time division methods over a single line Using a single line also offers the advantage of reducing the number of errors due to
5. 33 AUTOMATIC REPEATER OFFSET 34 REVERSE FUNCTION 34 AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK ASC 34 TONE FREQ ID SCAN 34 FM CTCSS OPERATION 35 CTCSS FREQ ID SCAN 35 FM DCS OPERATION 36 DCS CODE ID SCAN 36 CHAPTER 9 COMMUNICATING AIDS RECEIVING 37 SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY 37 Direct Frequency Entry 37 Using 1 MHz Steps 37 Quick QSY 37 Fine Tuning 38 Equalizing VFO Frequencies A B 38 RIT RECEIVE INCREMENTAL TUNING 38 AGC AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL 38 TRANSMITTING 39 VOX VOICE OPERATED TRANSMIT 39 Microphone Input Level 39 Delay Time 39 SPEECH PROCESSOR 40 XIT TRANSMIT INCREMENTAL TUNING 40 CUSTOMIZING TRANSMIT SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS 41 TX Filter Ba
6. 1 Y E K 2 Y E K 1 Y E K 2 Y E K 1 Y E K 2 Y E K 1 Y E K 2 Y E K 1 Y E K dlo h d n a s s e r P 1 Y E K 1 Y E K 1 Y E K 1 Y E K 1 Y E K n w o d s s e r p n e h t 2 Y E K 2 Y E K 2 Y E K 2 Y E K 2 Y E K e r a e r e h t fI d n a s s e r p s y e k o w t n a h t e r o m lit n u n r u t ni y e k h c a e n w o d dlo h d e s s e r p n e e b s a h y e k la nif e h t s s e r P 1 Y E K 1 Y E K 1 Y E K 1 Y E K 1 Y E K 2 Y E K 2 Y E K 2 Y E K 2 Y E K 2 Y E K s s e r P 1 Y E K 1 Y E K 1 Y E K 1 Y E K 1 Y E K ylir a t n e m o m e s a ele r 1 Y E K 1 Y E K 1 Y E K 1 Y E K 1 Y E K s s e r p n e h t 2 Y E K 2 Y E K 2 Y E K 2 Y E K 2 Y E K s s e r P Y E K Y E K Y E K Y E K Y E K F F O r e w o p r e vie c s n a rt e h t h ti W dlo h d n a s s e r p Y E K Y E K Y E K Y E K Y E K h cti w s n e h t y b r e w o p r e vie c s n a rt e h t N O g nis s e r p
7. 6 CTCSS SEL key Press to activate the Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System CTCSS function for FM mode To select the CTCSS tone frequency press FUNC 5 CTCSS SEL then select your desired CTCSS tone frequency using the MULTI CH control page 35 7 NB LEVEL key Press to switch the Noise Blanker ON or OFF Press FUNC 7 NB LEVEL to adjust the Noise Blanker level page 57 8 AGC OFF key Press to adjust the response time of the Automatic Gain Control To switch the AGC OFF press FUNC 8 AGC OFF page 38 9 FINE STEP key Press to activate the Fine tuning function to allow more precise tuning page 38 DCS SEL key Press to activate the Digital Coded Squelch function for FM mode To select the DCS code press FUNC DCS SEL then select your desired code using the MULTI CH control page 36 0 SHIFT OFFSET key Press to switch the Shift function for FM mode ON or OFF when accessing the repeaters The Shift frequency can be manually adjusted by pressing FUNC 0 SHIFT OFFSET then adjusting the shift frequency value using the MULTI CH control page 32 ENT key Press to enter your desired frequency using the keypad page 37 5 FUNC key Press to access the secondary functions that are assigned to the keys While FUNC is active the FUNC LED lights orange 6 MIC CAR key Press to adjust the microphone gain page 20 While th
8. 104 CHAPTER 20 SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS 105 CHAPTER 21 APPENDIX TS B2000 FRONT PANEL 109 BUILT IN TNC COMMAND LIST 110 COM CONNECTOR 113 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 113 CONTROL OPERATION 113 COMPUTER CONTROL 114 Alphabetical Commands 114 Parameters 114 Terminator 114 Error Messages 114 PC CONTROL COMMAND TABLES 115 CHAPTER 22 INDEX INDEX 142 1 INSTALLATION ANTENNA CONNECTION An antenna system consists of an antenna feed line and ground The transceiver can give excellent results if the antenna system and its installation are given careful attention Use a properly adjusted 50 antenna of good quality a high quality 50 coaxial cable and first quality connectors All connections must be clean and tight After making the connections match the impedance of the coaxial cable and antenna so that the SWR is 1 5 1 or less High SWR will cause the transmit output to drop and may lead to radio frequency interference t
9. 78 TIME OUT TIMER 78 vii CONTENTS CHAPTER 17 INSTALLING OPTIONS REMOVING THE BOTTOM CASE 97 DRU 3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT 97 VS 3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER UNIT 97 MB 430 MOBILE BRACKET 98 RC 2000 REMOTE PANEL 98 CHAPTER 18 TROUBLESHOOTING GENERAL INFORMATION 99 SERVICE 99 SERVICE NOTE 99 CLEANING 99 LITHIUM BATTERY 99 DEMONSTRATION MODE 99 TROUBLESHOOTING 100 OPERATION NOTICES 103 DC POWER SUPPLY 103 TX SIGNAL HARMONICS 103 INTERNAL BEATS 103 VISUAL SCAN 103 SENSITIVITY K type ONLY 103 AGC 103 SUB RECEIVER 103 CHAPTER 19 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
10. IS1000 Not enough parameters specified No direction given for the IF shift IS 100 Not enough digits Only three frequency digits given IS 1000 Unnecessary characters between parameters IS 10000 Too many digits Five frequency digits given Note If a particular parameter is not applicable to this transceiver the parameter digits should be filled using any character except the ASCII control codes 00 to 1Fh and the terminator I Terminator To signal the end of a command it is necessary to use a semicolon The digit where this special character must appear differs depending on the command used I Error Messages In addition to the Answer command the transceiver can send the following error messages Error Message Reason for Error Command syntax was incorrect Command was not executed due to the current status of the transceiver even though the command syntax was correct A communication error occurred such as an overrun or framing error during a serial data transmission Receive data was sent but processing was not completed E O Note Occasionally this message may not appear due to microprocessor transients in the transceiver COMPUTER CONTROL COMMANDS A computer control command is composed of an alphabetical command various parameters and the terminator that signals the end of the control command EXAMPLE Command to set VFO A to 7 MHz Alph
11. r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 T I 1 P 2 P 3 P N T y c n e u q e rf e n o t b u s e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P 9 3 1 0 s r e b m u n e n o t e h t r o f 5 3 e g a p o t r e f e R t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 T N 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 T N r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 T N 1 P 1 P O T F F O N O n oitc n u f E N O T e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O E N O T 0 N O E N O T 1 yln o t e S N O E N O T g nih cti w s s e t alu m E 2 yln o t e S F F O E N O T g nih cti w s s e t alu m E 3 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 T O 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 T O r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 T O 1 P S T s u t a ts n oitc n u f T E S F T e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O T E S F T 0 N O T E S F T 1 e d o m x elp m is ni g nit a r e p o si r e vie c s n a rt e h t n e h W 1 P N O E S R E V E R 0 F F O E S R E V E R 1 s elg g o t n oitc n u f E
12. To program the 7 6 MHz 430 MHz or 6 0 MHz 1 2 GHz offset on all E types repeatedly press 0 SHIFT OFFSET until appears If the offset transmit frequency falls outside the allowable range transmitting is inhibited Use one of the following methods to bring the transmit frequency within the band limits Move the receive frequency further inside the band Change the offset direction Note N You can only change the offset direction while in FM mode N While using an odd split memory channel for transmitting you cannot change the offset direction I Selecting an Offset Frequency To access a repeater which requires an odd split frequency pair change the offset frequency from the default which is used by most repeaters The default offset frequencies are as follows d n a B e p yt K s e p yt E ll A z H M 4 4 1 z H k 0 0 6 z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 z H M 0 5 z H M 6 1 z H M 6 7 z H G 2 1 z H M 0 2 1 z H M 0 5 3 z H M 0 6 As for the 29 and 50 MHz bands the default offset is set to 0 MHz Simplex Program the desired offset frequency for these bands 1 Press FUNC 0 SHIFT OFFSET 2 Turn the MULTI CH control to select the appropriate offset frequency The selectable range is from 0 00 MHz to 59 95 MHz in steps of 50 kHz 3 Press FUNC 0 SHIFT OFFSET
13. F 1 0 0 0 2 B S T 0 0 0 2 S T N O n oitc n u f K C O L A 2 2 P 0 0 0 2 C R F F O n oitc n u f K C O L 0 0 0 0 2 C R N O n oitc n u f K C O L 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 L K 1 P 2 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 L K r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 L K 1 P 2 P M L g nid r o c e r r e y e k cirtc ele r o tin u A 3 U R D e h t s d a e r d n a st e S s u t a ts s r e t e m a r a P 1 P yln o d n a m m o c t e S g nid r o c e r p o t S 0 e vitc a ni si n oitc n u f g nid r o c e R 0 1 H C o t g nid r o c e r tr a t S 1 2 H C o t g nid r o c e r tr a t S 2 3 H C o t g nid r o c e r tr a t S 3 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 L M 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 L M r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 L M 1 P T L s u t a ts n oitc n u f T L A e h t s d a e r d n a st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O n oitc n u f T L A 0 N O n oitc n u f T L A 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 L T 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 L T r e
14. Select 1200 bps or 9600 bps 7 Access Menu No 46 and select SUB 8 Select a 144 MHz band frequency in FM mode on the main transceiver and 440 MHz band frequency in FM mode for the sub receiver for Sky Command II operation TS 2000 Commander Setup 1 Access Menu No 62A and 62B to enter the same callsign that you entered for the TS 2000 Transporter 2 Access Menu No 62C to select the same CTCSS tone frequency that you selected for the TS 2000 Transporter 3 Access Menu No 62D and select the same communication speed that you selected for the TS 2000 Transporter 4 Access Menu No 46 and select SUB 5 Set the same frequencies that you selected for the Transporter for the main transceiver and sub receiver Starting Sky Command ll operation 1 On the Transporter access Menu No 62E 2 Select T PORTER Transporter 3 On the Commander access Menu No 62E 4 Select COMMANDER Commander 5 Press MAIN on the Commander to start the operation lo rtn o C n oitc n u F N I A M N I A M N I A M N I A M N I A M lo rt n o c g nit a r e p o e h tlo rt n o c o t n r u T y c n e u q e rf H C I T L U M H C I T L U M H C I T L U M H C I T L U M H C I T L U M lo rt n o c g nit a r e p o e h tlo rt n o c o t n r u T yldip a r y c n e u q e rf N I A M
15. m o t u a s o rt e m r a p s ol a t o N n o s o n s o u git n a I A s o d n a m o c 3 I A y 1 I A s o d n a m o c s o L 0 0 0 2 B S T 0 0 0 2 S T le r o p s o d a tr o p o s elb ats E r e c 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A I 1 P r e e L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A I n o p s e R r e d 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A I 1 P B59 2409 10 F I s u t a ts r e vie c s n a rt e h t s e v eirt e R s r e t e m a r a P 2 1 P tilp S 1 x elp m i S 0 d e g n a h c s i e c n e t n e s s i h T I O n oit a m r o f n I d n a B e tis p p O d e g n a h c s i e c n e t n e s s i h T s r e t e m a r a P 2 1 P tilp S 1 x elp m i S 0 d e g n a h c s i e c n e t n e s s i h T Comandos IF y Comandos OI F I r o t p e c s n a rtle d o d a ts e le a r e p u c e R s o rt e m r a P 2 1 P a didivi D 1 x elp m S 0 a i b m a c e s n i c a r o a t s E I O a d n a b al e d a t a e u p o n ic a m r o f n I a i b m a c e s n i
16. 0 5 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 9 0 1 0 0 8 9 0 0 0 7 8 0 0 0 6 7 0 z H M A 0 0 5 3 0 0 0 2 2 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 N O si A 0 5 o N u n e M r e tli F t e k c a P e h t n e h W R A N 1 0 E D I W 0 0 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S L 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S L r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S L 1 P 1 P M S s u t a ts r e t e m S e h t s d a e R s r e t e m a r a P 1 P r e vie c s n a rt nia M 0 r e vie c e r b u S 1 le v el r e t e m S r e vie c s n a rt nia M 2 le v el r e t e m S r e vie c e r b u S 3 2 P s g nid a e r r e t e M r e vie c s n a rt nia M 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 r e vie c e r b u S 5 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S M 1 P r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S M 1 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P Q S le v el h cle u q s e h t s d a e r d n a st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P r e vie c s n a rt nia M 0 r e vie c e r b u S 1 2 P le v
17. 2lla c 9lla c e h t f o n gis lla c e h t si 1lla C ts e u q e r tc e n n o c a s d n e S f o s n gis lla c e r a 9lla c o t 2lla C o t d e tc e n n o c e b o t n oit a ts h g u o r h t d e t a e pigid e b o t s n oit a ts E S R E V N O C K r o V N O C s s e r P e d o m e s r e v n o C r e t n e o t C N T e h t s e s u a C C lrt C e d o m d n a m m o C e h t e r o ts e r o t E M I T C A P C P C F F O F F O N O t a t e k c a p a s d n e s e d o m e s r e v n o C ni d n a N O n e h W E M I T C A P y b d e ni m r e t e d d oir e p e h t f o sla v r e t ni R C R C N O F F O N O o t st e k c a p lla o t R C n r u t e r e g airr a c a s d n e p p a N O n e h W t n e s e b E N N O C S I D D ts e u q e r tc e n n o c sid a s d n e S Y A L P S I D P S I D e h tlla f o s u t a ts t n e rr u c e h t y alp sid o t C N T e h t s e s u a C H C A r eifit n e di s s alc a yfic e p s o sla n a c u o Y s d n a m m o c d e ris e d e h t yln o f o s u t a t
18. Install lightning protection to protect the antenna system your personal safety and your property page 1 Install and connect a DC power supply page 2 Headphones External Speaker RTTY Equipment Linear Amplifier Remote Panel GROUND CONNECTION At the minimum a good DC ground is required to prevent such dangers as electric shock For superior communications results a good RF ground is required against which the antenna system can operate Both of these conditions can be met by providing a good earth ground for your station Bury one or more ground rods or a large copper plate under the ground then connect this to the transceiver GND terminal Use heavy gauge wire or a copper strap cut as short as possible for this connection Do not use a gas pipe an electrical conduit or a plastic water pipe as a ground LIGHTNING PROTECTION Even in areas where lightning storms are less common there are usually a limited number of storms each year Consider carefully how to protect your equipment and home from lightning The installation of a lightning arrestor is a start but there is more that you can do For example terminate your antenna system transmission lines at an entry panel that you install outside your home Ground this entry panel to a good outside ground then connect the appropriate feed lines between the entry panel and your transceiver When a lightning storm occurs disconnecting the feed li
19. O T O R P N U U Q C A I V 1lla C 3lla c 2lla c 9lla c e d o m lo c o t o r p n U ni t e k c a p a d n e s o t s n gis lla c s eific e p S e r a 9lla c o t 2lla C n oit a nits e d e h t f o n gis lla c e h t si 1lla C h g u o r h t d e t a e pigid e b o t s n oit a ts f o s n gis lla c W O L F X X N O F F O N O N O n e h w lo rt n o c w olf e r a w tf o s m r o fr e p o t C N T e h t s e s u a C F F O n e h w lo rt n o c w olf e r a w d r a h r o 113 21 APPENDIX COM CONNECTOR All descriptions in the PC CONTROL COMMAND TABLE are for the users convenience only KENWOOD will not support or warrantee this documentation in any way HARDWARE DESCRIPTION This transceiver uses a full duplex asynchronous serial interface for communicating through the male 9 PIN RS 232C COM connector Each data is constructed with 1 start bit 8 data bits and 1 stop bit 4800 bps must be configured as 2 stop bits No parity is used The pinout and the pin functions of the COM connector are shown below COM 1 2 3 4 5 9 8 7 6 Rear panel view 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Transmit data Receive data Signal ground Receive enable Transmit enable Output Input
20. e si w k c olc yllu f silo rt n o c N O si n oitc n u f r o t a u n e tt A e h T D N E S e h t d n a d e s s e r p s a w e d o m ti m s n a rt ni w o n si r e vie c s n a rt ci M r O T T P d e s s e r p si s a w h t di w d n a b e vie c e r e h T t e s yltc e rr o c ni r o tc e n n o c a n n e t n a g n o r w e h T d e tc ele s s a w 2 T N A r o 1 T N A F F O si r eifilp m a e r p e vie c e r e h T 1 2 3 4 5 6 e h t n r u T L Q S lo rt n o c e si w k c olc r e t n u o c s s e r P K C O L F T T A e h t h cti w s o t F F O n oitc n u f s s e r P D N E S e vie c e r o t n r u t e r o t ci M e s a ele r r O e d o m T T P d n a S R E T L I F P S D w eiv e R R E T L I F E V I E C E R E H T G N I G N A H C slo rt n o c e h t t e s d n a H T D I W D N A B ylg nid r o c c a s s e r P C N U F 2 1 T N A T A tc ele s o t r o tc e n n o c a n n e t n a r e h t o e h t s s e r P A K C O L E R P e h t h cti w s o t N O n oitc n
21. r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 I C le n n a h c L L A C e h t o t y c n e u q e rf t n e rr u c e h t st e S s r e t e m a r a P e n o N e h t st e s ti e d o m lla c e r y r o m e M r o e d o m O F V ni elih W le n n a h c L L A C e h t o t y c n e u q e rf t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 C I d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M C N O n oitc n u f E N U T R E T S U L C T E K C A P e h t s d a e r r o st e S F F O s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O n oitc n u f e n u T r e ts ul C t e k c a P 0 N O n oitc n u f e n u T r e ts ul C t e k c a P 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 C M 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 C M r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 C M 1 P N C n oitc n u f S S C T C e h t s d a e r d n a st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P 8 3 1 0 s r e b m u n e n o t S S C T C e h t r o f 5 3 e g a p o t r e f e R t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 C N 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 C N r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 C
22. 4 x ni 6 0 1 1 m m 1 7 3 x 7 0 1 x 1 8 2 X 0 0 0 2 S T 0 0 0 2 S T ni 6 5 3 1 x ni 1 2 4 x ni 6 0 1 1 m m 5 4 4 3 x 7 0 1 x 1 8 2 0 0 0 2 B S T t h gie W bl 2 7 1 g k 8 7 x o r p p A 0 0 0 2 S T bl 6 6 1 g k 5 7 x o r p p A 0 0 0 2 B S T bl 1 8 1 g k 2 8 x o r p p A r etti m s n a r T 0 0 0 2 S T 0 0 0 2 B S T X 0 0 0 2 S T e g n a r y c n e u q e r F d n a b m 0 6 1 e p yt K z H M 0 2 8 1 e p yt E z H M 0 2 1 8 1 e p yt 2 E z H M 5 8 1 3 8 1 e p yt K z H M 0 2 8 1 e p yt E z H M 0 2 1 8 1 d n a b m 0 8 e p yt K z H M 0 4 5 3 s e p yt E ll A z H M 8 3 5 3 e p yt K z H M 0 4 5 3 s e p yt E z H M 8 3 5 3 d n a b m 0 4 e p yt K z H M 3 7 0 7 s e p yt E ll A z H M 1 7 0 7 e p yt K z H M 3 7 0 7 s e p yt E z H M 1 7 0 7 d n a b m 0 3 z H M 5 1 0 1 1 0 1 d n a b m 0 2 z H M 5
23. 40 60dB PW R 10 25 50 100 W AL C e Press and hold AT ANT1 2 to activate the built in antenna tuner AT starts blinking and the MAIN band LED above the MIC CAR key turns red FILTE R S 1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60dB PW R 10 25 50 100 W AL C Tuning should be completed in under 20 seconds then AT stops blinking If tuning is not completed within 20 seconds error beeps sound Press AT ANT1 2 to stop the error beeps and quit tuning Check your antenna system before continuing If you do not press AT ANT1 2 tuning will continue for approximately 60 seconds Note You will hear a lot of clicking sounds coming from the transceiver while the antenna tuner is trying to tune the antenna This is simply the relay switches turning ON and OFF r With LSB USB or AM selected press MIC CAR to activate the Microphone Gain Adjust MIC GAIN 50 appears With FM selected skip this step t Press SEND The MAIN band LED turns red y Begin speaking into the microphone in your normal tone of voice u LSB USB While speaking into the microphone adjust the MULTI CH control so that the ALC meter reflects according to your voice level PW R 10 25 50 100W FILTE R S 1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60dB AL C AM While speaking into the microphone adjust the MULTI CH con
24. 430 440 MHz and 1 2 GHz bands TS 2000 TS B2000 Optional For further information including repeater frequencies consult your local repeater reference This transceiver provides the following three methods for programming two separate frequencies Using the Split Frequency function page 31 Programming an offset 29 50 144 430 440 MHz and 1 2 GHz bands Storing in a Split Frequency channel page 59 Note N When programming two separate frequencies using two VFOs be sure to select FM mode on both VFOs N When operating through a repeater over deviation caused by speaking too loudly into the microphone can cause your signal to talk off break up through the repeater PROGRAMMING AN OFFSET When using the 29 50 144 430 440 MHz or 1 2 GHz band TS 2000 TS B2000 Optional selecting a single frequency and an offset is another method for programming two separate frequencies Unlike the Split Frequency function this method requires only a single VFO Note If you store offset settings in a memory channel you need not reprogram each time Refer to MEMORY FEATURES page 58 I Selecting an Offset Direction 1 Select a receive frequency 2 Press 0 SHIFT OFFSET to switch the offset direction Select whether the transmit frequency will be higher or lower than the receive frequency or appears to indicate which offset direction is selected
25. After you configure Memory Groups to the Memory Channels you can select one or more of the Groups to be recalled in Memory Recall mode To select Memory Groups 1 Press FUNC Ms s s s sVFO MG SEL to enter Memory Group Select mode 2 Numbers 0 9 appear in the main dot matrix display The selected Memory Group numbers are displayed in larger fonts To change the selection press a numeric key To select all the Memory Groups press DCS SEL At least one Memory Group must be selected 3 Press M IN to save the setting and exit 4 You can now recall only the selected Memory Groups in Memory Recall mode QUICK MEMORY Quick memory is designed to quickly and temporarily save data without specifying a particular memory channel Use Quick memory to store data you will not use in future operating sessions For example as you tune across the band looking for DX it is convenient to store stations that you want to contact You can quickly jump between several different memory channels as you monitor them This transceiver provides ten Quick memory channels 0_ to 9_ that can store the following data d n a y c n e u q e rf A O F V e d o m g nit a r e p o d n a y c n e u q e rf B O F V e d o m g nit a r e p o F F O N O r e vie c e r b u S y c n e u q e rf r e vie c e r b u S e d o m g nit a r e p o d n
26. B62 1221 50 K E 09 08 07 06 05 ALL MODE MULTI BAND TRANSCEIVER TS 2000 TS 2000X TS B2000 INSTRUCTION MANUAL NOTIFICATION This equipment complies with the essential requirements of Directive 1999 5 EC The use of the warning symbol means the equipment is subject to restrictions of use in certain countries This equipment requires a licence and is intended for use in the countries as below T A E B K D I F R F E D R G S I E I T I I L U L L N O N T P S E E S H C B G Y C Z C E E U H V L T L T M L P K S I S G B O R 6 6 1 3 O S I i THANK YOU THANK YOU Thank you for choosing this KENWOOD TS 2000 X TS B2000 transceiver It has been developed by a team of engineers determined to continue the tradition of excellence and innovation in KENWOOD transceivers This transceiver features dual Digital Signal Processing DSP units to process IF and AF signals By taking maximum advantage of DSP technology the TS 2000 X TS B2000 gives you enhanced interference reduction capabilities and improves the quality of audio that you transmit without installing additional analog filters You will notice the differences when you fight QRM and QRN As you learn how to use this transceiver you will also find that KENWOOD is pursuing user friendliness For example each time you change the Menu No in Menu mode you will see scrolling messages on the display that tell yo
27. KEY LSB USB CW FSK FM AM SUB DISP SEL 1MHz CTRL MR MG SEL M IN QUICK MEMO M S REV TRACE MAIN MANUAL RF AF SQL SUB CH MULTI BC MAIN GAIN VFO CH MENU TF SET MAIN SUB SG SEL SCAN M VFO M IN RIT CW TUNE 9 6k STA RIT SUB CON XIT ALT SET CLEAR P C T _ HF VHF UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS 2000 SATL A B VFO M SPLIT A B 6 2 1 8 5 3 1 7 1 4 Note This section explains only keys and controls required to briefly try the transceiver q Set the following as specified MAIN AF Fully counterclockwise MAIN RF GAIN Fully clockwise MAIN SQL Fully counterclockwise w Switch ON the DC power supply then press and hold POWER briefly on the transceiver Do not press the switch for more than approximately 2 seconds the transceiver will be switched OFF Upon power up HELLO appears followed by the selected frequency and other indicators FILTE R S 1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60dB PW R 10 25 50 100W AL C e Press MAIN then confirm that VFO A has been selected for communications tA should be visible on the display If it has not press A B to select VFO A r Turn the MAIN AF control slowly clockwise until you hear a suitable level of background noise t Press to move up to the VHF 144 MHz or UHF 430 440 MHz Amateu
28. MID or HIGH in Menu No 41 29 7 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS AM TRANSMISSION Each mode used on the HF Amateur bands has its own advantages Although long distance DX contacts may be less common while using AM the superior audio quality characteristic of AM operation is one reason why some hams prefer this mode When looking for others operating on AM check the following frequencies first 3885 kHz 7290 kHz 14286 kHz 21390 kHz and 29000 29200 kHz If necessary refer to OPERATING BASICS beginning on page 18 for details on how to receive 1 Select an operating frequency 2 Press FM AM NAR to select AM mode AM appears 3 Press MIC CAR to activate the Microphone Gain Adjust The current gain level appears 4 Press SEND or press and hold Mic PTT The MAIN band LED lights red Refer to VOX page 39 for information on automatic TX RX switching 5 Speak into the microphone and adjust the MULTI CH control so that the calibrated power meter slightly reflects your voice level Speak in your normal tone and level of voice Speaking too close to the microphone or too loudly may increase distortion and reduce intelligibility at the receiving end You may want to use the Speech Processor Refer to SPEECH PROCESSOR page 40 for details 6 Press SEND or release Mic PTT to return to receive mode The MAIN band LED lights green or tur
29. N I A M N I A M N I A M N I A M t n e rr u c e h t r o tin o m o t s s e r P y c n e u q e rf g nivie c e r B U S B U S B U S B U S B U S e h tlla e zin o r c n y s e r o t s s e r P r e tr o p s n a rt e h t n e e w t e b n oit a m r o f ni r e d n a m m o c d n a e h t n w o d r o p u e v o m o t s s e r P z H M 0 5 F H d n a b g nit a r e p o s d n a b oid a r r u e t a m a M O F V M O F V M O F V M O F V M O F V e d o m O F V n e e w t e b elg g o t o t s s e r P e d o m lla c e R y r o m e M d n a T N E T N E T N E T N E T N E y c n e u q e rf d e ris e d a r e t n e o t s s e r P a r o d a p y e k cir e m u n e h t g nis u y r o m e M ni r e b m u n le n n a h c y r o m e m e d o m lla c e R M M M M M s s s s s O F V O F V O F V O F V O F V y r o m e m e h t r e fs n a rt o t s s e r P O F V o t n oit a m r o
30. r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M D 1 P F M B r o A u n e M s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P A u n e M 0 B u n e M 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M F 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M F r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M F 1 P G M s u t a ts nia g e n o h p o r ci M e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P x a m 0 0 1 ni m 0 0 0 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M G 1 P 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M G r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M G 1 P 1 P 1 P L M le v el n oitc n u f R O T I N O M e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O R O T I N O M 0 0 0 x a m 9 0 0 ni m 1 0 0 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M L 1 P 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M L r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M L 1 P 1 P 1 P O M r e d n a m m o C y k S ni F F O N O n oitc n u f R O T I N O M e h t st e S e d o m s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O R O T I N O M 0 N O R O T I N O M 1 t e S 1 2
31. there are 2 external speaker jacks If an external speaker is connected to EXP SP1 the internal speaker will mute If the speaker is connected to EXT SP2 both the external speaker and the internal speaker will function Use only external speakers with an impedance of 4 to 8 8 nominal These jacks accept only 3 5 mm 1 8 diameter 2 conductor mono plugs Do not connect headphones to this jack The high audio output of this jack could damage your hearing I Keys for CW PADDLE and KEY For CW operation using the internal electronic keyer connect a keyer paddle to the PADDLE jack For CW operation without using the internal electronic keyer connect a straight key semi automatic key bug electronic keyer or the CW keyed output from a Multimode Communications Processor MCP to the KEY jack The PADDLE and KEY jacks mate with a 6 3 mm 1 4 3 conductor plug and a 3 5 mm 1 8 2 conductor plug respectively External electronic keyers or MCPs must use positive keying to be compatible with this transceiver Use a shielded cable between the key and the transceiver Note Due to the functionality of the internal electronic keyer you may find it unnecessary to connect both a paddle and another type of keyer unless you want to use a PC based keyer for CW Read the ELECTRONIC KEYER section page 42 to become familiar with the internal keyer i q u y t w e r TS 2000 TS 2000X TS B2000
32. to change the step size from 5 W to 1 W page 79 MICROPHONE GAIN The microphone gain must be adjusted when SSB or AM mode is used without speech processing pages 28 29 1 Press MIC CAR The current microphone gain level appears The default is 50 the range is from 0 to 100 CAR TX MONI DELAY MIC PWR KEY PF F LOCK A 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC 3 CH3 REC 4 TONE SEL 5 METER 6 CTCSS SEL 7 NB LEVEL 8 AGC OFF 9 FINE STEP DCS SEL 0 SHIFT OFFSET ENT SEND PHONES MIC AT ANT1 2 PROC LEVEL VOX ATT PRE LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL MANUAL LO WIDTH HI SHIFT N R A N B C FUNC CLR MAIN AUTO CAR TX MONI DELAY NAR REV MIC PWR KEY LSB USB CW FSK FM AM DISP SEL 1MHz CTRL MEN M HF VHE UHF ALL MO 2 Press SEND or press and hold Mic PTT The MAIN band LED lights red 3 SSB While speaking into the microphone adjust the MULTI CH control so that the ALC meter reflects your voice level but does not exceed the ALC limit AM While speaking into the microphone adjust the MULTI CH control so that the calibrated power meter slightly reflects your voice level CW FSK While transmitting adjust the MULTI CH control so that the ALC meter reflects the carrier level within the ALC zone CH MULTI CALL C IN UTO SB SB SUB SEL 1MHz
33. 0 KEY TO START COMMANDER appears Press 0 on the TH D7A to start Sky Command mode When in Sky Command mode the keys of the TH D7A Commander will function as described below Only LAMP MONI and the VOL control functions will not change Each time you press the desired key the Commander will automatically enter transmit mode and send the corresponding control command to the TS 2000 Transporter F H e h t h cti w s o T F F O r e vie c s n a rt s s e r P R E W O P R E W O P R E W O P R E W O P R E W O P a n o oid u a ti m s n a rt o T y c n e u q e rf F H e h t dlo h d n a s s e r P T T P T T P T T P T T P T T P o t ni k a e p s n e h t h cti w s e n o h p o r ci m e h t n a n o oid u a e vie c e r o T y c n e u q e rf F H s s e r P X R X R X R X R X R d n a b F H U e h t r o tin o m o T r e d n a m m o C e h t n o dlo h d n a s s e r P I N O M I N O M I N O M I N O M I N O M 86 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES y e K n oitc n u F g n i n u T g n i n u T g n i n u T g n i n u T g n i n u T lo rt n o c r e b m u n le n n a h c y r o m e m r o y c n
34. 1 d e tc ele s n U 0 4 p u o r G 7 P d e tc ele S 9 1 d e tc ele s n U 0 5 p u o r G 8 P d e tc ele S 9 1 d e tc ele s n U 0 6 p u o r G 9 P d e tc ele S 9 1 d e tc ele s n U 0 7 p u o r G 0 1 P d e tc ele S 9 1 d e tc ele s n U 0 8 p u o r G 1 1 P d e tc ele S 9 1 d e tc ele s n U 0 9 p u o r G t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S U 1 P 2 P 3 P 4 P 5 P 6 P 7 P 8 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 9 P 0 1 P 1 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S U 1 P r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S U 1 P 2 P 3 P 4 P 5 P 6 P 7 P 8 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 9 P 0 1 P 1 1 P V S n oitc n u f r e fs n a r T y r o m e M e h t e t u c e x E s r e t e m a r a P r e t e m a r a p o N t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S V d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 C T e d o m C N T la n r e t ni e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P d e s u si e c a p s _ 2 P e d o m n oit a cin u
35. 19 TRANSMITTING 20 SELECTING TRANSMIT POWER 20 MICROPHONE GAIN 20 CHAPTER 6 MENU SETUP WHAT IS A MENU 21 MENU A MENU B 21 MENU ACCESS 21 v CONTENTS RADIO TELETYPEWRITING RTTY 51 AMTOR PacTOR CLOVER G TOR PSK31 52 SLOW SCAN TV FACSIMILE 52 DX PACKET CLUSTER TUNE 53 SATELLITE OPERATION 53 BASIC OPERATION 53 STORING SATELLITE MEMORY CHANNELS 54 RECALLING A SATELLITE MEMORY CHANNEL 54 SATELLITE CHANNEL NAME 54 QUICK MEMORY IN SATELLITE MODE 54 CHECKING THE UPLINK FREQUENCY 54 USING XIT RIT IN SATELLITE MODE 54 CHANGING THE FREQUENCY BAND 54 CHAPTER 12 REJECTING INTERFERENCE DSP FILTERS 55 CHANGING THE RECEIVE FILTER BANDWIDTH 55 SSB FM AM Modes 55 CW FSK Modes 55
36. 2 1 P 1 P 1 P C F y c n e u q e rf O F V s r e vie c e r b u s e h t st e s d n a s d a e R s r e t e m a r a P 1 P tigid 1 1 z H ni y c n e u q e rf e h t yfic e p S k n alb e h T z H M 5 9 1 4 4 1 r o f 0 0 0 5 9 1 4 4 1 0 0 elp m a x e r o F ni d e s u si e zis p e ts y c n e u q e rf dila v ni e h t fI 0 e b ts u m stigid e h t st e s ylla cit a m o t u a r e vie c s n a rt e h t r e t e m a r a p 1 P e h t y c n e u q e rf ts e r a e n t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F C 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 1 P 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F C r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F C 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 1 P 1 P 1 P D F n r e tt a p t o d y alp sid r e tlif e h t s d a e R s r e t e m a r a P 1 P tib 2 3 D F F F F F F F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 st o d 0 3 s a h y alp sid h t di w r e tlif e h T e r a stib 2 ts al e h T tf el e h t n o t o d a st n e s e r p e r B S M d e
37. 3 4 1 0 4 1 d n a b m 7 1 z H M 8 6 1 8 1 8 6 0 8 1 d n a b m 5 1 z H M 5 4 1 2 0 1 2 d n a b m 2 1 z H M 9 9 4 2 9 8 4 2 d n a b m 0 1 z H M 7 9 2 0 8 2 d n a b m 6 e p yt K z H M 0 4 5 0 0 5 e p yt E z H M 0 2 5 0 0 5 e p yt 2 E z H M 2 0 5 0 0 5 e p yt K z H M 0 4 5 0 0 5 e p yt E z H M 0 2 5 0 0 5 d n a b m 2 e p yt K z H M 8 4 1 4 4 1 s e p yt E ll A z H M 6 4 1 4 4 1 e p yt K z H M 8 4 1 4 4 1 s e p yt E z H M 6 4 1 4 4 1 d n a b m c 0 7 e p yt K z H M 0 5 4 0 3 4 s e p yt E ll A z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 e p yt K z H M 0 5 4 0 3 4 s e p yt E z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 d n a b m c 3 2 z H M 0 0 3 1 0 4 2 1 0 2 T U w z H M 0 0 3 1 0 4 2 1 106 20 SPECIFICATIONS r etti m s n a r T 0 0 0 2 S T 0 0 0 2 B S T X 0 0 0 2 S T r e w o p t u p t u O M F K S F W C B S S x a M d n a b m c 0 7 W 0 5 d n a b m 2 m 0 6 1 W 0 0 1 d n
38. 4 1 0 1 4 1 0 5 8 1 0 5 4 1 5 1 1 2 0 5 8 1 0 5 1 2 5 1 1 2 0 5 5 2 0 5 1 2 0 0 9 2 0 5 5 2 0 0 0 3 0 0 9 2 0 0 1 5 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 5 0 0 1 5 0 0 3 5 0 0 2 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 3 5 ATTENUATOR The attenuator function is useful when extremely strong signals exist nearby your receiving frequency When these type of signals exist nearby your receiving frequency the AGC function may be erroneously controlled by the strong signals rather than by the target receiving signal If this happens the target receiving signal can be masked and buried by the strong signals In this case turn the Attenuator function ON 1 Press ATT F LOCK 2 ATT appears To return to the normal operation press ATT F LOCK again Note If the same band is selected for both the main transceiver and the sub receiver the Attenuator function is on for both receivers AUTO MODE You can configure a maximum of 29 points HF 50 MHz 9 points 144 MHz band 9 points 430 440 MHz band and 9 points 1 2 GHz band of the main transceiver VFO VFO A and B frequencies to change the operating mode automatically when you change the frequency As a default the following modes are programmed on each operating band HF 50 MHz band 0 03 9 5 MHz LSB 9 5 MHz 60 MHz US
39. 8 9 0 1 N T r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 N T 1 P F O n oit a m r o f ni y c n e u q e rf t e sff O e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P 0 0 0 0 5 f o s p e ts ni 0 0 0 0 5 9 9 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tigid 9 z H ni y c n e u q e rf t e sff O 0 e b ts u m stigid d e s u n U t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 O F 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 O F r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 O F 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 1 P I O a t a d le n n a h c y r o m e M e h t s d a e R s r e t e m a r a P 1 P stigid 1 1 z H ni y c n e u q e rf e h t yfic e p S 0 e b ts u m stigid k n alb e h T 2 P e zis p e ts y c n e u q e r F 3 P y c n e u q e rf T I X T I R z H ni 9 9 9 9 9 4 P N O T I R 1 F F O T I R 0 5 P N O T I X 1 F F O T I X 0 C M e e S r e b m u n k n a b le n n a h c e h t yfic e p S 7 P 6 P d n a m m o
40. 8 n oitc n u f o N 9 9 N A 0 9 e d o c t e k r a m e h t n o g nid n e p e d elb alia v a e b t o n y a m s r e b m u n u n e m ll A B 1 5 y e k 1 F P e n o h p o r ci M C 1 5 y e k 2 F P e n o h p o r ci M D 1 5 y e k 3 F P e n o h p o r ci M E 1 5 y e k 4 F P e n o h p o r ci M 2 5 r e ts a m ni r e fs n a rt y c n e u q e rf tilp S n oit a r e p o e v als F F O N O 3 5 tilp S d e rr e fs n a rt e h t e tir w o t ti m r e P s O F V t e g r a t e h t o t s eic n e u q e rf F F O N O 4 5 tibih ni X T F F O N O 5 5 e d o m n oit a cin u m m o c t e k c a P F F O N O 122 21 APPENDIX u n e M o N n oitc n u F 5 P r ete m a r a p d n a m m o c X E 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 r e v O 6 5 d e e p s n oit a cin u m m o c tr o p M O C 0 0 8 4 0 0 6 9 7 5 n oitc n u f ff O r e w o P o t u A O P A F F O 0 6 8 5 e d o m n oit a r e p o y s a e nit n o f 0 0 0 2 C R T N O F 1 T N O F 2 9 5 t o d X 0 0 0 2 S T le n a p 0 0 0 2 C R ts a rt n o c y alp sid xirt a m 1 2 0 6 0 0
41. Do not use the transceiver near water or sources of moisture For example avoid use near a bathtub sink swimming pool or in a damp basement or attic The presence of an unusual odor or smoke is often a sign of trouble Immediately turn the power OFF and remove the power cable Contact a KENWOOD service station or your dealer for advice Locate the transceiver away from heat sources such as a radiator stove amplifier or other devices that produce substantial amounts of heat Do not use volatile solvents such as alcohol paint thinner gasoline or benzene to clean the cabinet of the transceiver Use a clean cloth with warm water or a mild detergent Disconnect the input power cable from the power source when the transceiver is not used for long periods of time Remove the transceiver s enclosure only to do accessory installations described in this manual or accessory manuals Follow provided instructions carefully to avoid electrical shocks If unfamiliar with this type of work seek assistance from an experienced individual or have a professional technician do the task Enlist the services of qualified personnel in the following cases a The power supply or plug is damaged b Objects have fallen or liquid has spilled into the transceiver c The transceiver has been exposed to rain d The transceiver is operating abnormally or performance has seriously degraded e The transceiver has been dropped
42. F O 4 o t 1 F F O 3 5 7 1 0 n oit a ni m ulli y e K F F O N O N O 5 7 g nin u T lo rt n o C 2 0 n oit ulo v e r r e p e g n a h c lo rt n o c g nin u T 0 0 0 1 0 0 5 0 0 0 1 8 3 3 0 h ti w g nin u T H C I T L U M lo rt n o c F F O N O N O 7 3 4 0 g nis u y b d e g n a h c s eic n e u q e rf O F V ff o s d n u o R e h t H C I T L U M lo rt n o c F F O N O N O 7 3 5 0 e h t r o f e zis p e ts y c n e u q e rf z H k 9 H C I T L U M d n a b ts a c d a o r b M A e h t n o e d o m M A nilo rt n o c F F O N O e e S e c n e r e f e R e g a P 7 3 y r o m e M le n n a h C 6 0 le n n a h C y r o m e M s s e c c a o t B U S s s e r P u n e m b u s e h t A 6 0 n oit a r e p o tilp s O F V y r o m e M F F O N O F F O 0 6 B 6 0 le n n a h c y r o m e m F F O d e xif r o N O elb a n u T s eic n e u q e rf F F O N O F F O 0 6 n a c S n oit a r e p O 7 0 d e w ols yllaitr a p n a c s m a r g o r P F F O N O N O 7 6 8 0 m a r g o r P e h t r o f e g n a r y c n e u q e
43. F W C o t B S S F F O N O 8 3 tfih s K S F 0 7 1 0 0 2 5 2 4 0 5 8 9 3 ytir alo p g niy e k K S F R O N L A M E V N I S R 0 4 y c n e u q e rf e n o t K S F 5 7 2 1 5 2 1 2 1 4 M F r o f nia g ci M W O L D I M H G I H 2 4 M F r o f e d o m e n o t b u S T S R U B T N O C 3 4 t e sff o r e t a e p e r o t u A F F O N O 4 4 e n o t z H 0 5 7 1 dlo h X T F F O N O A 5 4 tc ele s y r o m e m r e b m u n F M T D st n e m m o c r e t e m a r a p e h t e e S B 5 4 r e b m u n F M T D d e r o ts r o f d e e p s X T W O L S T S A F C 5 4 F M T D d e r o ts r o f n oit a r u d e s u a P r e b m u n 0 0 1 0 5 2 D 5 4 lo rt n o c e t o m e r ci M elb a n E F F O N O 6 4 C N T la n r e t n I d n a b B U S N I A M N I A M B U S 7 4 C N T la n r e t n I d e e p s r e fs n a rt a t a D 0 0 2 1 0 0 6 9 8 4 d n a b g nis n e s D C D C N T D N A B N I A M B U S amp A 9 4 e d o m e n u T r e ts ul C t e k c a P O T U A N A M L A U B 9 4 e n o t n oit a m rif n o c X R r e ts ul C
44. FM or AM mode you can change the filter bandwidth by altering its low and or high cut off frequency For CW and FSK modes you can change the filter bandwidth by directly specifying a bandwidth Changing the filter bandwidth does not affect the current receive frequency Note N The receive filter bandwidth can be changed only on the main transceiver N The IF DSP filter is not available in FM mode I SSB FM AM Modes 1 Select SSB FM or AM mode 2 Press DISP The current filter selection appears 3 Turn the LO WIDTH control clockwise to raise the low cut off frequency or counterclockwise to lower the low cut off frequency LO WIDTH f f Turn the HI SHIFT control clockwise to raise the high cut off frequency or counterclockwise to lower the high cut off frequency HI SHIFT f f ts ujd A z H s n oitc ele S y c n e u q e r F H T D I W O L 0 0 4 0 0 3 0 0 2 0 0 1 0 5 0 0 0 9 0 0 8 0 0 7 0 0 6 0 0 5 0 0 0 1 T F I H S I H 0 0 0 2 0 0 8 1 0 0 6 1 0 0 4 1 0 0 8 2 0 0 6 2 0 0 4 2 0 0 2 2 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 4 0 0 4 3 0 0 0 3 Interfering signal Desired signal Interfering signal 56 12 REJECTING INTERFERENCE NOTCH FILTER SSB Auto Notch filter automatically locates and attenuates any single interfering to
45. M 1 nia M b u S 2 b u S 4 1 nia M nia M 4 1 b u S If you are using an external speaker on EXT SP2 you can configure the transceiver to make a separate output for each receiver 1 P S T X E 2 P S T X E T U P T U O la n r e t n I L P S L 1 P S R 2 P S A N A N s e t u M A N A N s e t u M 79 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES TNC This transceiver has a built in TNC that is usually used for the Packet Cluster Tune page 53 or SkyCommand II operations page 83 However you can also utilize the built in TNC as a high 9600 bps or normal 1200 bps speed TNC The TNC can be controlled by an external PC that is connected to COM port on the rear panel page 49 Available TNC command set is listed in the Appendix If you desire you can connect an external TNC or proprietary TNC MCP to ACC2 connector To interface an external TNC MCP with the TS 2000 X refer to the ACC2 connector information page 95 and accessing Menu Nos 50B 50F then configure and adjust the Menu parameters to work with the external TNC MCP Note You do not have to disable the built in TNC to interface with an external TNC Both the main transceiver and sub receiver can work independently unless the transceiver is transmitting on the same band TRANSVERTER If you have
46. Mates with a 13 pin male DIN connector for connecting various accessory equipment such as an external TNC MCP or a RTTY terminal page 94 4 REMOTE connector Mates with a 7 pin male DIN connector for connecting an HF linear amplifier page 76 Do not connect 50 MHz 144 MHz 430 440 MHz or 1 2 GHz linear amplifier controls to this connector use the EXT CONT connector instead 5 HF RX ANT connector Connect a separate receive only antenna for HF low bands to this jack RCA connector page 76 14 4 GETTING ACQUAINTED DISPLAY FILTE R S 1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60dB PW R 10 25 50 100 W AL C 6 1 2 4 10 9 3 5 11 13 15 7 8 12 14 16 q METER While receiving serves as an S meter to measure and display the received signal strength It also displays the filter width While transmitting serves as a power meter plus an ALC meter an SWR meter or a Speech Processor compression meter The Peak Hold function holds each reading for approximately half a second Note SWR meter works only for the HF and 50 MHz bands w Appears while the internal antenna tuner page 72 or an external antenna tuner is in line for the HF 50 MHz band reception e AT Appears while the internal antenna tuner page 72 or an external antenna tuner is in line for the HF 50 MHz band transmission r Appears while HF RX ANT page 76 connector is enabled to receive HF band
47. P e h t r o f e g n a r y c n e u q e rf n w o d w ol S n a c s 8 0 d o h t e m e m u s e r n a c S 0 1 e g n a r n a c s la u si V 1 1 II D N A M M O C Y K S II d n a m m o C y k S r o f n gislla c r e d n a m m o C A 2 6 d e e p s n oit a cin u m m o c II d n a m m o C y k S D 2 6 e d o m II d n a m m o C y k S E 2 6 y c n e u q e rf e n o t II d n a m m o C y k S C 2 6 II d n a m m o C y k S r o f n gislla c r e tr o p s n a r T B 2 6 R E K A E P S r o 2 P S T X E r o f n oit a r u gif n o c t u p t u o oid u A e n o h p d a e h 6 1 e h t 2 P S T X E d n a 1 P S T X E e h t s e s r e v e R st u p t u o oid u a sle n n a h c R L k c aj e n o h p d a e h 7 1 28 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS SSB TRANSMISSION SSB is the most commonly used mode on the HF Amateur bands Compared with other voice modes SSB requires only a narrow bandwidth for communications SSB also allows long distance communications with minimum transmit power If necessary refer to OPERATING BASICS beginning on page 18 for details on how to receive 1 Select an operating frequency 2 Press LSB USB AUTO to select eithe
48. S e h t r e w ol o t m e ts y s a n n e t n a e h t ts ujd A R W S 1 si r e n u tla n r e t ni e h T d e s s a p y b r e tf a yle t aid e m m i d e tr a ts si g nin u t o o t si m e ts y s a n n e t n a e h t f o R W S e h T h gih e h t r e w ol o t m e ts y s a n n e t n a e h t ts ujd A R W S 1 ti m s n a rt t o n n a c u o Y u o y h g u o h t n e v e ci M s s e r p T T P r o tlu s e r s n ois si m s n a rt stc a t n o c o n ni 1 2 3 4 5 t o n s a w g ulp e n o h p o r ci m e h T C I M e h t o t ni yle t elp m o c d e tr e s ni r o tc e n n o c N O si n oitc n u f tibih n I ti m s n a r T e h T f o d a e ts ni d e tc ele s s a w K S F r o W C e d o m e cio v a s a w h t di w d n a b r e tlif X T P S D e h T d e tc ele s ylr e p o r p ni r o tc e n n o c a n n e t n a g n o r w e h T d e tc ele s s a w 2 T N A r o 1 T N A 1 2 3 4 5 C I M e h t e r u s n e r e w o p e h t F F O n r u T ti ni stc ejb o n gie r o f o n s a h r o tc e n n o c yl m rif r o tc e n n o c e h
49. S R E V E R e h t 1 S T d n e s u o y e m it y r e v E t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 T S 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 T S r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 T S 1 P 140 21 APPENDIX X T e d o m X T ni r e vie c s n a rt e h t st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P d n a b y c n e u q e rf s r e vie c s n a rt nia m e h t n o sti m s n a r T 0 d n a b y c n e u q e rf s r e vie c e r b u s e h t n o sti m s n a r T 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 T X 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 T X 1 P Y T e p yt e r a w m if r o s s e c o r p o r ci m e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P d e v r e s e R 2 P e p yt s a e s r e v O 0 e p yt W 0 0 1 e s e n a p a J 1 e p yt W 0 2 e s e n a p a J 2 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 T Y r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 T Y 1 P 1 P 2 P L U s u t a ts k c oln u L L P e h t stc e t e D s r e t e m a r a P 1 P k c o L 0 k c oln U 1 t e S 1 2
50. S e c n e r e f e r e g a p 3 3 3 4 t e sff o r e t a e p e r o t u A N O F F O N O 4 3 4 4 e n o t z H 0 5 7 1 dlo h X T N O F F O F F O 3 3 F M T D 5 4 s n oitc n u f F M T D s s e c c a o t B U S s s e r P u n e m b u s e h t A 5 4 tc ele s y r o m e m r e b m u n F M T D s s e c c a o t B U S s s e r P u n e m b u s e h t B 5 4 r e b m u n F M T D d e r o ts r o f d e e p s X T T S A F W O L S T S A F 6 7 C 5 4 r e b m u n F M T D d e r o ts r o f n oit a r u d e s u a P 0 5 7 0 0 5 0 5 2 0 0 1 s m 0 0 0 2 0 0 5 1 0 0 0 1 s m 0 0 5 6 7 D 5 4 lo rt n o c e t o m e r ci M elb a n E N O F F O F F O 1 8 C N T 6 4 C N T la n r e t n I d n a b B U S N I A M B U S N I A M B U S 0 5 7 4 C N T la n r e t n I d e e p s r e fs n a rt a t a D s p b 0 0 6 9 0 0 2 1 s p b 0 0 2 1 0 5 8 4 d n a b g nis n e s D C D D N A B C N T B U S amp N I A M C N T d n a b 0 5 9 4 e d o m e n u T r e ts ul C t e k c a P T C P s s e c c a o
51. a e p e R N O F F O F F O 8 8 C 1 6 e d o c D Ilo rt n o c e t o m e R 9 9 9 o t 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 8 D 1 6 e t o m e r la n r e tx e nila n gis t n e m e g d el w o n k c A e d o m lo rt n o c N O F F O F F O 2 8 E 1 6 lo rt n o c e t o m e r la n r e tx E N O F F O F F O 2 8 26 6 MENU SETUP n oitc n u F u n e M o N R E T L I F P S D r e zila u q e X R P S D 0 2 r e zila u q e X T P S D 1 2 M A r o B S S r o f h t di w d n a b r e tlif X T P S D 2 2 F M T D tc ele s y r o m e m r e b m u n F M T D A 5 4 r e b m u n F M T D d e r o ts r o f n oit a r u d e s u a P C 5 4 r e b m u n F M T D d e r o ts r o f d e e p s X T B 5 4 M F t e sff o r e t a e p e r o t u A 3 4 e d o m M F r o f h cle u q s r e t e m S elb a n E A 9 1 h cle u q s r e t e m S r o f e m it g n a H B 9 1 M F r o f nia g ci M 1 4 M F r o f e d o m e n o t b u S 2 4 e n o t z H 0 5 7 1 dlo h X T 4 4 K S F ytir alo p g niy e k K S F 9 3 tfih s K S F 8 3 y c n e u q e rf e n o t K S F 0 4 D C L s s e n t h gir b
52. b m u n le n n a h c y r o m e M k ciu Q 9 0 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 Q R 1 P 2 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 Q R r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 Q R 1 P 2 P A R s u t a ts n oitc n u f r o t a u n e tt A e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O T T A 0 0 N O T T A 9 9 1 0 r e vie c s n a rt nia m e h t r o f d e tc ele s si d n a b y c n e u q e rf e m a s fI F F O r o N O d e n r u t e r a s r o t a u n e tt a h t o b r e vie c e r b u s e h t d n a e m it e m a s e h t t a t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R A 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R A r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R A 1 P 1 P 2 P 2 P 134 21 APPENDIX C R y c n e u q e rf t e sff o T I R e h t s r a el C s r e t e m a r a P e n o N t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R C d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 D R n w o d y c n e u q e rf t e sff o T I R e h t e v o M e d o m n a c S ni d e e p s n a c s e h t n w o d w ol S s r e t
53. c 8 P X T 1 X R 0 9 P slia t e d r o f s d n a m m o c D M e e S e d o m g nit a r e p O 0 1 P s d n a m m o c T F d n a R F e e S 1 1 P d n a m m o c C S e e S s u t a ts n a c S 2 1 P d n a m m o c P S e e S s u t a ts n oit a r e p o tilp S 3 1 P S C D 3 S S C T C 2 E N O T 1 F F O 0 4 1 P d n a m m o c N T e e S y c n e u q e rf e n o T 5 1 P d n a m m o c S O e e S s u t a ts tfih S 5 1 P d n a 2 P e h t II d n a m m o C y k S g nit a r e p o elih W h t g n el r e t e m a r a p 2 P e h T k n alb e m o c e b s r e t e m a r a p 5 s e m o c e b h t g n el r e t e m a r a p 3 P e h t d n a s e ty b 5 o t s e g n a h c s e ty b t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 O I r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 O I 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 1 P 1 P 1 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 0 3 3 P 3 P 3 P 4 P 5 P 6 P 7 P 7 P 8 P 9 P 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3
54. c a r o a t s E s o rt e m r a P 2 1 P a didivi D 1 x elp m S 0 a i b m a c e s n i c a r o a t s E SUPPL MENT Ce suppl ment contient des informations qui n taient pas disponibles au moment de l impression du mode d emploi et ou corrige des informations erron es contenues dans ce mode d emploi Les fonctions des tonalit s sub audibles Tonalit CTCSS DCS en mode satellite Les fonctions de tonalit sub audibles FM Tonalit CTCSS DCS peuvent tre activ es en mode satellite et l tat Tonalit activ d sactiv peut tre sauvegard dans chaque canal de m moire satellite Bien que l tat de la tonalit activ d sactiv soit sauvegard dans chaque canal de m moire satellite la tonalit de fr quence code sub audible ne peut tre enregistr e du fait de la capacit m moire limit e La tonalit de fr quence configuration de code du VFO normal VFO A ou VFO B est plut t utilis e La fonction de recherche de tonalit de fr quence code ne peut tre effectu e en mode satellite Le codage et le d codage sont effectu s selon les donn es de la bande de fr quence de la liaison montante Caract ristiques du mod le TS 2000XE Pour la plage de fr quences de l metteur page 105 et du r cepteur page 106 reportez vous Type E dans la colonne TS 2000 TS B2000 Les autres caract ristiques resten
55. c n e u q e rf m a r g o r P n a c S y c n e u q e rf cific e p s e h t s n a c S y r o m e M ni d e r o ts s e g n a r 9 9 2 0 9 2 sle n n a h c n a c S z H M nih ti w s eic n e u q e rf e h t s n a c S e g n a r z H M 1 a y r o m e M n a c S le n n a h C ll A n a c S sle n n a h c y r o m e M lla s n a c S 9 9 2 o t 0 0 m o rf n a c S p u o r G y r o m e M cific e p s e h t s n a c S s p u o r g le n n a h c lla C n a c S O F V d n a le n n a h c lla C e h t s n a c S y c n e u q e rf O F V t n e rr u c e h t y r o m e M le n n a h C d n a le n n a h c lla C e h t s n a c S le n n a h c y r o m e M d e tc ele s e h t la u si V n a c S O F V g nit a r e p o t n e rr u c e h t s n a c S a s a lle w s a y c n e u q e rf f o r e b m u n d eific e p s w ole b d n a e v o b a s eic n e u q e rf la n gis e h T y c n e u q e rf t a h t sile n n a h c h c a e f o h t g n e rts h p a r g r a b a ni d e y alp sid y r o m e M le n n a h C sle n n a h c y r o m e M e h t s n a c S la n gis e h t s
56. configuration 8 SUB dot matrix display In the normal operating mode it displays the operating mode for the sub receiver It is also used to display various control information such as menu information and the DSP filter frequency configuration MICROPHONE PTT DWN UP q w q UP DWN keys Use these keys to step the VFO frequency memory channels or Menu selections up and down Press and hold these keys to continuously change the settings w PTT Push to Talk switch The transceiver is placed in transmit mode when this non locking switch is held down Releasing the switch returns the transceiver to receive mode 18 OPERATING BASICS SWITCHING POWER ON OFF 1 Switch the DC power supply ON 2 Press and hold POWER briefly to switch the transceiver ON Do not press the switch for more than approximately 2 seconds the transceiver will be switched OFF Upon power up HELLO appears followed by the selected frequency and other indicators PF F LOCK A SEND AT ANT1 2 PROC LEVEL VOX ATT PRE LEVEL PF F LOCK A 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC 3 CH3 REC 4 TONE SEL 5 METER 6 CTCSS SEL 7 NB LEVEL 8 AGC OFF 9 FINE STEP DCS SEL 0 SHIFT OFFSET ENT SEND PHONES MIC AT ANT1 2 PROC LEVEL VOX ATT PRE LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL MANUAL LO WIDTH HI SHIFT N R A N B C FUNC CL
57. e d o m S C D S S C T C e n o T F F O N O s e Y s e Y e m a n y r o m e M s e Y s e Y t u o k c o L le n n a h C y r o m e M F F O N O s e Y 1 s e Y 1 1 Changing the data after recalling a memory channel overwrites the contents of the channel STORING DATA IN MEMORY There are 2 methods used for storing transmit receive frequencies and associated data in memory channels 00 to 289 Use either method depending on the relationship of the receive and transmit frequencies you store Simplex channels RX frequency TX frequency Split frequency channels RX frequency TX frequency Memory channels 290 to 299 can also be used as simplex channels Note When RIT or XIT is ON the frequency that includes the RIT or XIT offset will be stored I Simplex Channels 1 Press A B to select VFO A or VFO B tA or tB appears to show which VFO is selected 2 Select the frequency mode etc to be stored 3 Press M IN to enter Memory Scroll mode To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the storage process press CLR 4 Turn the MULTI CH control or press Mic UP DWN to select a memory channel You can also select a channel by entering a 3 digit number such as 012 using the numeric keys 5 Press M IN again to store the data The previous data stored in the channel is overwritten 59 13
58. e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P U R H T T A X R 0 N I T A X R 1 2 P U R H T T A X T 0 N I T A X T 1 3 P r e w s n A d e p p o ts si g nin u T t e S g nin u t p o t S 0 r e w s n A e vitc a si g nin u T t e S g nin u T tr a t S 1 d e t elp m o c e b t o n n a c g nin u T 2 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A C 1 P 2 P 3 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A C r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A C 1 P 2 P 3 P G A nia g F A e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P r e vie c s n a rt nia M 0 r e vie c e r b u S 1 2 P x a m 5 5 2 ni m 0 0 0 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A G 1 P 2 P 2 P 2 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A G 1 P r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A G 1 P 2 P 2 P 2 P I A F F O N O n oitc n u f I A n oit a m r o f n I o t u A e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O I A 0 N O si t a m r o f I A dlo yln O 1 N O si t a m r o f I A d e d n e tx e yln O 2 N O e r a st a
59. e m a r a P 1 P z H ni y c n e u q e rf t e sff o e h t 9 9 9 9 9 0 0 0 0 0 2 P d e e p s n a c S 9 1 F F O si n a c S n e h W p e ts 1 n w o d s e o g y c n e u q e rf e h t d eific e p s si r e t e m a r a p o n fI N O si n a c S n e h W d e e p s n a c s t n e rr u c e h t d a e r o t D R d e e p s n a c s e h t w ols o t r e b m u n y n A n n n n n n n n n n D R p e ts 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R D 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R D r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R D 2 P G R s u t a ts nia g F R e h t d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P x a m 5 5 2 ni m 0 0 0 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R G 1 P 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R G r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R G 1 P 1 P 1 P L R le v el n oitc u d e R e sio N e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P 9 0 1 0 O T U A 0 0 N O si 1 R N e h t n e h W f o s p e ts ni s m 0 2 9 0 s m 2 0 0 N O si 2 R N e h
60. e s s r e t e m a r a p n oit a cin u m m o C h ct a m t o n o d m a r g o r p la ni m r e t s r e t e m a r a p r e vie c s n a rt 1 2 elb a c d n a elb a c e h t k c e h C s n oitc e n n o c e h t ni s r e t e m a r a p e m a s e h t e s U r e vie c s n a rt e h t d n a m a r g o r p la ni m r e t 6 5 o N u n e M e h t k c e h C 3 9 1 8 103 18 TROUBLESHOOTING OPERATION NOTICES The TS 2000 X TS B2000 has been designed and engineered to avoid possible hardware glitches However you may notice the following symptoms when you operate the transceiver These symptoms are not malfunctions DC POWER SUPPLY As stated in the SPECIFICATIONS page 105 this transceiver requires a supplied DC voltage source of 13 8 V 15 If you find that the transceiver cannot be switched ON or that is shut OFF automatically the DC voltage may be outside the specified range In such a case remove the DC cable from the transceiver immediately and confirm that the supplied voltage is within the specified range TX SIGNAL HARMONICS The TS 2000 X TS B2000 has 2 independent receivers Thus it can receive signals while you are transmitting Because of this the harmonics or the mixed heterodyne signal images of your transmission signal can be monitored through the receiver Even i
61. f nile n n a h c B A B A B A B A B A B r o A O F V tc ele s o t s s e r P T I L P S T I L P S T I L P S T I L P S T I L P S N O n oit a r e p o T I L P S elg g o t o t s s e r P F F O d n a B S U B S L B S U B S L B S U B S L B S U B S L B S U B S L B S U r o B S L tc ele s o t s s e r P K S F W C K S F W C K S F W C K S F W C K S F W C e b t o n n a c K S F W C tc ele s o t s s e r P d e tc ele s M A M F M A M F M A M F M A M F M A M F M A r o M F tc ele s o t s s e r P T I R T I R T I R T I R T I R T I X T I X T I X T I X T I X T I X r o d n a T I R e h t e t a vitc a o t s s e r P n oitc n u f R A E L C R A E L C R A E L C R A E L C R A E L C y c n e u q e rf t e sff o e h t r a elc o t s s e r P T I X r o d n a T I R r o f C O R P C O R P C O R P C O R
62. h t g nit a r e p o elih w elb alia v a n u lo rt n o c g nin u T 1 2 3 4 S N O I T N E V N O C G N I T I R W w eiv e R D E W O L L O F s s e r P C N U F C N U F C N U F C N U F C N U F K C O L F T T A K C O L F T T A K C O L F T T A K C O L F T T A K C O L F T T A o t F F O n oitc n u f e h t h cti w s R O S S E C O R P O R C I M w eiv e R t a h w g nid n a ts r e d n u r e tf A T E S E R fI t e s e R laitr a P a o d ts ol e b lli w a t a d t e s e R llu F a o d s nia m e r m elb o r p e h t n e h t lo rt n o c g nin u T e h t g nit a r e p o p o t S s y e k e t air p o r p p a e h t s s e r p i 7 7 2 9 t o n n a c y c n e u q e rf e h T d e g n a h c e b r o n oitc n u f k c o L y c n e u q e r F e h T N O si n oitc n u f ll A k c o L s s e r P C N U F C N U F C N U F C N U F C N U F K C O L F T T A K C O L F T T A K C O L F T T A K C O L F T T A K C O L F T T
63. l 5 J K L 6 m n o 6 M N O 7 p r s 7 P R S 8 t u v 8 T U V 9 w x y 9 W X Y 0 e c a p s 0 amp lt gt n oitc n u f o N A t h gir r o s r u c e h t e v o M B tf el r o s r u c e h t e v o M C r e tc a r a h c d e tc ele s e h t e t ele D D s a e m a S N I M N I M N I M N I M N I M y e k 64 13 MEMORY FEATURES MEMORY GROUP To manage 300 memory channels you can divide them up into a maximum of 10 groups Groups 0 to 9 After you configure a Memory Group you can select one or more of the Memory Groups you want to recall in Memory Recall mode As a default all memory channels are stored in Group 0 To change the Memory Channel Group 1 Press M IN to enter Memory Scroll mode 2 Select the desired memory channel for which you want to change the Memory Group by turning the MULTI CH control 3 Press DISP The Memory Name input prompt appears 4 Press DISP again to skip the input or enter a Memory Name using and MAIN or SUB page 63 The current Memory Group appears in a larger font 5 Press a numeric key to change the selected Group number The newly selected Group number appears in a larger font 6 Press M IN to store the settings I Memory Group Select
64. may enter KD6NUH KJ6HC ABC CA or KD6NUH KJ6HC ABC CA USA or up to KD6NUH KJ6HC ABC CA USA NA as necessary The complete address of a recipient living in the U S A for example should include an appropriate region code preceded by a state country and continent abbreviations as above For further information consult reference books which should be available at any store that handles Amateur Radio equipment Web pages relating to Packet will also be helpful On Internet search engines use Packet Radio as key words to find those Web pages PBBS Note N Unlike a TNC a Multimode Communications Processor MCP serves as a communications interface in several digital modes such as Packet RTTY and AMTOR You can cause it to switch among the modes by sending a single command from your computer N If there is an amateur radio club in your area consider becoming a member You can often learn more in an hour from experienced hobbyists than in a month of independent research Ask on the local repeaters or contact your national amateur radio organization the ARRL in the U S A for information on local amateur radio clubs You ll be glad you did BUILT IN TNC This transceiver has a built in TNC which conforms to the AX 25 protocol Since the built in TNC has been designed to work with the Packet Cluster Tune page 53 and Sky Commander II page 83 functions some of the enhanced TNC commands
65. may not be available For the commands supported by the built in TNC consult BUILT IN TNC COMMAND LIST starting on page 110 The AX 25 protocol is used for communication between TNCs The TNC accepts data from your personal computer and assembles it into packets It then converts those packets to audio tones which the transceiver can transmit The TNC also takes audio tones from the transceiver converts them to data for the computer and checks for errors in the data In order to activate the built in TNC access Menu No 55 and select ON The default is OFF PKT will appear to show that the built in TNC is ON The TNC mainly functions in Command or Converse mode First you should learn the difference between these two modes Command mode When you select Packet mode the TNC enters Command mode A cmd prompt appears on the computer screen You can type commands from the computer keyboard to change the settings of the TNC When in Converse mode press Ctrl C on the keyboard to return to Command mode Converse mode The TNC enters this mode when a link with the target station is established On the computer keyboard type an appropriate command and a message if necessary then press Enter or Return What you type is converted into packets and transmitted over the air When in Command mode type CONVERSE CONV or K to enter Converse mode Note The built in TNC automatically reinitiates when
66. n a m m o c S O e e S s u t a ts T F I H S 3 1 P d n a m m o c S O e e S y c n e u q e rf t e sff O 4 1 P d n a m m o c T S e e S e zis p e t S 5 1 P 9 0 r e b m u n p u o r G y r o m e M 6 1 P s r e tc a r a h c 8 f o m u m ix a m A e m a n y r o m e M 9 9 2 0 9 2 le n n a h c y r o m e M y c n e u q e rf d n e 1 1 P y c n e u q e rf tr a ts 0 1 P t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M W 1 P 2 P 3 P 3 P 4 P 4 P 4 P 4 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 4 P 4 P 4 P 4 P 4 P 4 P 4 P 5 P 6 P 7 P 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 0 3 8 P 8 P 9 P 9 P 0 1 P 0 1 P 0 1 P 1 1 P 2 1 P 3 1 P 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 0 4 3 1 P 3 1 P 3 1 P 3 1 P 3 1 P 3 1 P 3 1 P 3 1 P 4 1 P 4 1 P 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 0 5 5 1 P 6 1 P 6 1 P 6 1 P 6 1 P 6 1 P 6 1 P 6 1 P 6 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 B N s u t a ts n oitc n u f r e k n al B e sio N B N e h t s d a e r r o t e S s r e t e m a r a P
67. o c r eifilp m a r a e niL d n a b z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 F F O 1 2 E 8 2 r o f y ale d lo rt n o c r eifilp m a r a e niL d n a b z H G 2 1 F F O 1 2 A 9 2 k c a b y alp e h t t a e p e R F F O N O B 9 2 e h t g nit a e p e r r o f e m itla v r e t n I k c a b y alp 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 6 1 f o s p e ts ni 0 3 k c a b y alp r e v o ytir oir p g niy e K F F O N O 121 21 APPENDIX u n e M o N n oitc n u F 5 P r ete m a r a p d n a m m o c X E 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 r e v O 1 3 y c n e u q e rf e n o t e dis X T h ctip X R W C 0 0 4 0 5 4 0 0 5 0 5 5 0 0 6 0 5 6 0 0 7 0 5 7 0 0 8 0 5 8 0 0 0 1 0 5 f o s p e ts ni 2 3 e m it e sir W C 1 2 4 6 3 3 oit a r t h gie w h s a d t o d g niy e k W C O T U A 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 0 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 0 4 1 0 f o s p e ts ni 4 3 oit a r t h gie w o t u a g niy e k W C e s r e v e R F F O N O 5 3 e d o m y e k g u B F F O N O 6 3 e d o m B S S ni X T W C o t u A F F O N O 7 3 g nig n a h c r o f n oitc e rr o c y c n e u q e r
68. or Mic PTT the transceiver transmits on the SUB band frequency Or if you would like to transmit and receive on the MAIN band while adjusting the sub receiver functions simply press CTRL Only the icon moves from the main transceiver display to the sub display The icon remains on the main transceiver display With this setup you can continue receiving and transmitting on the main transceiver VFO frequencies while you are making adjustments to the sub receiver functions If you need to adjust only the frequency of the sub receiver you can simply turn the RIT SUB control However this works only when you are operating the main transceiver without the RIT XIT functions When operating the main transceiver with the RIT XIT function first switch OFF the RIT XIT function by pressing RIT CW TUNE and or XIT ALT or press CTRL to move the controls to the SUB band Then turn the Tuning control the MULTI CH control or the RIT SUB control to adjust the SUB band frequency SELECTING A BAND Press SUB or CTRL to assign the function controls to the sub receiver Press to select the 144 MHz or the 430 440 MHz band 46 10 SUB RECEIVER The and icons are both on the sub receiver display You can do all the above plus transmit on the SUB band frequency This transceiver provides many other methods for selecting a frequency quickly For further details refer
69. p s n a c S 9 1 F F O si n a c S n e h W p u p e ts 1 s e o g y c n e u q e rf e h t d eific e p s si r e t e m a r a p o n fI N O si n a c S n e h W d e e p s n a c s t n e rr u c e h t d a e r o t U R d e e p s n a c s e h t d e e p s o t r e b m u n y n A n n n n n n n n n n U R p u p e ts 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R U 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R U r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R U 2 P X R s u t a ts n oitc n u f r e vie c e r e h t st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P r e vie c s n a rt nia M 0 r e vie c e r b u S 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R X d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R X 1 P A S s u t a ts e d o m e tille t a S e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O e d o m e tille t a S 0 N O e d o m e tille t a S 1 2 P r e b m u n le n n a h C y r o m e M e tille t a S 9 0 3 P k niln w o d r e vie c e r b u S k nilp u r e vie c s n a rt nia M 0 k ni
70. page 66 for details on how to operate the scan function NOISE REDUCTION Since the sub receiver can receive only in FM or AM mode DSP noise reduction 1 Line Enhanced is available to reduce the noise from the receiving signals Refer to NOISE REDUCTION page 56 for details on how to control and adjust the function TRANSMITTING First confirm that the icon is on the SUB band display Press SEND or press and hold Mic PTT then speak into the microphone in your normal tone of voice When you finish speaking press SEND again or release Mic PTT SELECTING A TRANSMIT POWER You can also adjust the output power for FM mode on the 144 MHz and 430 440 MHz bands when you are operating the sub receiver 1 Press PWR The current transmit power appears 2 Turn the MULTI CH control counterclockwise to reduce the power or clockwise to increase the power Note N The selectable range varies depending on the band and mode page 79 N Output power configuration is also reflected in the main transceiver MICROPHONE GAIN Access Menu No 41 and select LOW MID or HIGH for the microphone gain Note When using the optional MC 90 microphone in FM mode select HIGH microphone gain Microphone sensitivity is low in FM mode this may cause insufficient modulation For other microphones select MID or LOW FM REPEATER OPERATION You can also configure an in
71. r o m e M 9 9 2 0 9 2 le n n a h c y r o m e M y c n e u q e rf d n e 1 1 P y c n e u q e rf tr a ts 0 1 P t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M R 1 P 2 P 3 P 3 P r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M R 1 P 2 P 3 P 3 P 4 P 4 P 4 P 4 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 4 P 4 P 4 P 4 P 4 P 4 P 4 P 5 P 6 P 7 P 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 0 3 8 P 8 P 9 P 9 P 0 1 P 0 1 P 0 1 P 1 1 P 2 1 P 3 1 P 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 0 4 3 1 P 3 1 P 3 1 P 3 1 P 3 1 P 3 1 P 3 1 P 3 1 P 4 1 P 4 1 P 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 0 5 5 1 P 6 1 P 6 1 P 6 1 P 6 1 P 6 1 P 6 1 P 6 1 P 6 1 P U M a t a d p u o r G y r o m e M e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P 0 p u o r G y r o m e M 2 P 1 p u o r G y r o m e M 3 P 2 p u o r G y r o m e M 4 P 3 p u o r G y r o m e M 5 P 4 p u o r G y r o m e M 6 P 5 p u o r G y r o m e M 7 P 6 p u o r G y r o m e M 8 P 7 p u o r G y r o m e M 9 P 8 p u o r G y r o m e M
72. rt F H m o rf T N E T N E T N E T N E T N E N O y rt n e y c n e u q e rf e d o m O F V n I r e b m u n le n n a h c e d o m lla c e R y r o m e M n I N O y rt n e V M V M V M V M V M h cti w s e d o m lla c e R y r o m e M O F V 1 After pressing ENT you can use these keys as numeric keys to enter a frequency or memory channel number When 0 SYNC is pressed the Commander shows the current settings of the HF transceiver q e y r u w t q HF frequency w A VFO A B VFO B 00 99 memory channel number e RIT XIT r OFF 9 99 9 99 t FS appears when FAST is ON y LSB USB CW FM or AM u SPLIT A VFO A is used for transmitting SPLIT B VFO B is used for transmitting SPLIT M A memory channel is used for transmitting Note N On the Transporter only LAMP MONI and MENU will function Pressing any other key will simply cause the Transporter to generate an error beep N After pressing MENU you can access only Menu 4 4 N The Transporter will transmit its call sign in Morse code every 10 minutes using the 144 MHz band N The APO timer will not operate on the transceiver while the Transporter is ON 87 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES USING ANOTHER TS 2000 AS A COMMANDER To use another TS 2000 X transceiver as a Commander an external remote c
73. s a y e k F P s s e c c a o t B U S s s e r P u n e m b u s e h t A 1 5 y e k F P le n a p t n o r F R N C B N A F F O z H M 1 2 1 T N A B N R L C L L A C L R T C 2 H C 3 H C E N I F E N U T W C 1 H C O F V M N I M M O F V B A N A C S T I L P S T E S F T B A P S D R M Q N I M Q I N O M X R I N O M 1 E C I O V 2 E C I O V 2 6 0 0 U N E M 1 E C I O V 7 7 B 1 5 y e k L L A C 1 F P e n o h p o r ci M A 1 5 s a e m a S B A 7 7 C 1 5 y e k O F V 2 F P e n o h p o r ci M A 1 5 s a e m a S T I L P S 7 7 D 1 5 y e k R M 3 F P e n o h p o r ci M A 1 5 s a e m a S M O F V 7 7 E 1 5 y e k F P 4 F P e n o h p o r ci M A 1 5 s a e m a S X R I N O M 7 7 e v al S r e ts a M n oit a r e p o 2 5 e v als r e ts a m ni r e fs n a rt y c n e u q e rf tilp S n oit a r e p o N O F F O F F O 0 8 3 5 s eic n e u q e rf tilp S d e rr e fs n a rt e h t e tir w o t ti m r e P s O F V t e g r a t e h t o
74. s d n a s d a e R s r e t e m a r a P 1 P tigid 1 1 z H ni y c n e u q e rf e h t yfic e p S stigid k n alb e h T z H M 5 9 1 4 1 r o f 0 0 0 5 9 1 4 1 0 0 0 elp m a x e r o F 0 e b ts u m t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F A 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 1 P 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F A r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F A 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 1 P 1 P 1 P B F y c n e u q e rf B O F V e h t st e s d n a s d a e R s r e t e m a r a P 1 P tigid 1 1 z H ni y c n e u q e rf e h t yfic e p S stigid k n alb e h T z H M 5 9 1 4 1 r o f 0 0 0 5 9 1 4 1 0 0 0 elp m a x e r o F 0 e b ts u m t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F B 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 1 P 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F B r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F B 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0
75. t n e h W s m 2 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R L 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R L r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R L 1 P 1 P M R n oitc n u f r e t e M e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P ela c s r e t e m e h t stc ele S d e tc ele s n U 0 R W S 1 P M O C 2 C L A 3 2 P 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 st o d ni e ula v r e t e M t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R M 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R M r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R M 1 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 135 21 APPENDIX T R s u t a ts n oitc n u f T I R e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O n oitc n u f T I R 0 N O n oitc n u f T I R 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R T 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R T r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R T 1 P U R p u y c n e u q e rf t e sff o T I R e h t s e v o M e d o m n a c S ni d e e p s n a c s e h t p u d e e p S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P z H ni y c n e u q e rf t e sff o e h t 9 9 9 9 9 0 0 0 0 0 2 P d e e
76. t u p ni n a elb a n E r o tc e n n o c F F O N O A 9 1 h cle u q s r e t e m S F F O N O B 9 1 h cle u q s r e t e m S r o f e m it g n a H F F O 5 2 1 0 5 2 0 0 5 0 2 r e zila u q e X R P S D F F O H T S O O B S S A P F B T S O O B V N O C N E R E S U 1 2 r e zila u q e X T P S D F F O H T S O O B S S A P F B T S O O B V N O C N E R E S U 2 2 r o B S S r o f h t di w d n a b r e tlif X T P S D M A 0 2 2 2 4 2 6 2 8 2 0 3 3 2 g nin u t r e w o p ti m s n a rt e ni F F F O N O 4 2 r e m i T t u o e m i T F F O 3 5 0 1 0 2 0 3 5 2 y alp sid y c n e u q e rf r e tr e v s n a r T F F O N O 6 2 e h t s e t elp m o c T A n e h w dlo h X T g nin u t F F O N O 7 2 g nivie c e r elih w T A e nil n I F F O N 1 O A 8 2 F H r o f y ale d lo rt n o c r eifilp m a r a e niL d n a b F F O 1 2 B 8 2 r o f y ale d lo rt n o c r eifilp m a r a e niL d n a b z H M 0 5 F F O 1 2 C 8 2 r o f y ale d lo rt n o c r eifilp m a r a e niL d n a b z H M 4 4 1 F F O 1 2 D 8 2 r o f y ale d lo rt n
77. u s g nivie c e r N O n e h W a t a d e vie c e r o t y d a e r a s e vie c e r tilit n u n ois si m s n a rt d n e p s u s o t C N T e h t s e s u a c e cit o n y d a e r 111 21 APPENDIX d n a m m o C e m a N tr o h S tlu afe D r ete m a r a P n oitpirc s e D W O L F F N O F F O N O p o ts o t r e t u p m o c e h t s e s u a c y rt n e y e k g nitr a ts N O n e h W st e k c a p d e vie c e r g niy alp sid K C A R F R F 3 0 5 2 0 f o y rt e r lit n u n ois si m s n a rt e n o m o rfla v r e t ni e h t s eific e p S d n o c e s 1 si r e t e m a r a p e h t f o tin u e h T n ois si m s n a rt D U A B H B H 0 0 2 1 0 0 6 9 0 0 2 1 n e e w t e b e t a r r e fs n a rt e h t s a s p b 0 0 6 9 r o 0 0 2 1 stc ele S s n oit a ts t e k c a p S S I K S S I K F F O F F O N O F F O r e vie c s n a rt e h t h cti w s n e h t N O r e t e m a r a p e h t t e S n e h W e d o m S S I K r e t n e o t nia g a N O r e vie c s n a rt e h t n r u T N O C d n a A T S e h t e d o m
78. 0 1 P 9 p u o r G y r o m e M d e tc ele S 1 d e tc ele s n U 0 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M U 1 P 2 P 3 P 4 P 5 P 6 P 7 P 8 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 9 P 0 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M U r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M U 1 P 2 P 3 P 4 P 5 P 6 P 7 P 8 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 9 P 0 1 P 129 21 APPENDIX W M le n n a h c y r o m e M e h t o t a t a d e h t e r o t S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P y c n e u q e rf X T 1 y c n e u q e rf X R 0 3 P 2 P d n a m m o c C M e e S r e b m u n le n n a h c d n a k n a B 4 P tigid 1 1 z H ni y c n e u q e r F 5 P d n a m m o c D M e e S e d o M 6 P N O t u o k c o L 1 F F O t u o k c o L 0 s u t a ts t u o k c o L 7 P S C D 3 S S C T C 2 E N O T 1 F F O 0 8 P 5 3 e g a p e e S r e b m u N e n o T 9 P d n a m m o c N C e e S r e b m u n e n o t S S C T C 0 1 P d n a m m o c C Q e e S e d o c S C D 1 1 P s u t a ts E S R E V E R 2 1 P d
79. 0 kHz htdi w d n a B y c n e u q e rf d n a b s s a P z H k 0 2 z H 0 0 5 2 0 0 5 z H k 2 2 z H 0 0 6 2 0 0 4 z H k 4 2 z H 0 0 7 2 0 0 3 z H k 6 2 z H 0 0 8 2 0 0 2 z H k 8 2 z H 0 0 9 2 0 0 1 1 z H k 0 3 z H 0 0 0 3 0 1 1 1 If the Speech Processor is ON the low cut filter is set to 200 Hz for 2 8 kHz and 3 0 kHz I TX Equalizer SSB FM AM Use Menu No 21 to change the transmit frequency characteristics of your signal You can select from one of six different transmit profiles including the default flat response Selecting any of the following items from the Menu causes to appear on the display Off OFF The default frequency response for SSB FM and AM High boost H BOOST Emphasizes higher audio frequencies effective for a bassy voice Formant pass F PASS Improves clarity by suppressing audio frequencies outside the normal voice frequency range Bass boost B BOOST Emphasizes lower audio frequencies effective for a voice with more high frequency components Conventional CONVEN Emphasizes by 3 dB frequencies at 600 Hz and higher User USER Reserved for the optional ARCP software Off is programmed at the factory as a default Frequency Response Curves TRANSMIT INHIBIT Transmit Inhibit preven
80. 1 P F F O B N 0 N O B N 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 N B 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 N B r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 N B 1 P L N le v el r e k n al B e sio N B N e h t s d a e r r o t e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P x a m 0 1 0 ni m 1 0 0 1 0 0 s a d e t a e rt si 0 0 0 0 1 0 s a d e t a e rt e r a 9 9 9 0 1 0 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 N L 1 P 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 N L r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 N L 1 P 1 P 1 P R N s u t a ts n oitc n u f n oitc u d e R e sio N R N e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O R N 0 N O 1 R N 1 N O 2 R N 2 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 N R 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 N R r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 N R 1 P 130 21 APPENDIX T N s u t a ts n oitc n u f h ct o N o t u A e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O h ct o N o t u A 0 N O h ct o N o t u A 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 N T 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
81. 138 21 APPENDIX T S s p e ts y c n e u q e rflo rt n o c H C I T L U M e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P 3 0 0 0 e d o m K S F W C B S S z H k 0 1 3 0 z H k 5 2 0 z H k 5 2 1 0 z H k 1 0 0 9 0 0 0 e d o m M F M A z H k 5 2 1 3 0 z H k 0 1 2 0 z H k 5 2 6 1 0 z H k 5 0 0 z H k 0 3 7 0 z H k 5 2 6 0 z H k 0 2 5 0 z H k 5 1 4 0 z H k 0 0 1 9 0 z H k 0 5 8 0 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S T 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S T r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S T 1 P 1 P U S y c n e u q e rf e s u a p n a c S m a r g o r P e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P p u o r g n a c S m a r g o r P 0 p u o r g n a c S y r o m e M 1 2 P d e tc ele S 9 1 d e tc ele s n U 0 0 p u o r G 3 P d e tc ele S 9 1 d e tc ele s n U 0 1 p u o r G 4 P d e tc ele S 9 1 d e tc ele s n U 0 2 p u o r G 5 P d e tc ele S 9 1 d e tc ele s n U 0 3 p u o r G 6 P d e tc ele S 9
82. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M O 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M O 1 P 128 21 APPENDIX R M a t a d le n n a h c y r o m e M e h t s d a e R s r e t e m a r a P 1 P y c n e u q e rf X T 1 y c n e u q e rf X R 0 3 P 2 P d n a m m o c C M e e S r e b m u n le n n a h c d n a k n a B 4 P tigid 1 1 z H ni y c n e u q e r F 5 P d n a m m o c D M e e S e d o M 6 P N O t u o k c o L 1 F F O t u o k c o L 0 s u t a ts t u o k c o L 7 P S C D 3 S S C T C 2 E N O T 1 F F O 0 8 P 5 3 e g a p e e S r e b m u N e n o T 9 P d n a m m o c N C e e S r e b m u n e n o t S S C T C 0 1 P d n a m m o c C Q e e S e d o c S C D 1 1 P s u t a ts E S R E V E R 2 1 P d n a m m o c S O e e S s u t a ts T F I H S 3 1 P d n a m m o c S O e e S y c n e u q e rf t e sff O 4 1 P d n a m m o c T S e e S e zis p e t S 5 1 P 9 0 r e b m u n p u o r G y r o m e M 6 1 P s r e tc a r a h c 8 f o m u m ix a m A e m a n y
83. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 U L 1 P P U y e k P U e n o h p o r ci m e h t s e t alu m E s r e t e m a r a P 1 P 9 9 0 0 d e t e r p r e t ni si d n a m m o c e h t d eific e p s si r e t e m a r a p 1 P o n fI p u p e ts 1 s a s d n a m m o c e d o m y r o m e M k ciu Q d n a e d o m y r o m e M n I p u le n n a h c y r o m e M s a d e t a e rt e r a s r e t e m a r a p t u o h ti w y c n e u q e rf s a d e t a e rt e r a y e h t s r e t e m a r a p h ti W s d n a m m o c s d n a m m o c p u t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 U P 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 D V e m it y ale d X O V e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P 0 5 1 f o s p e ts ni s m 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 V D 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 V D r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 V D 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 141 21 APPENDIX G V N I A G X O V e h t s d a
84. 3 5 5 4 6 4 5 3 0 7 3 5 0 5 2 1 2 7 1 1 5 2 5 1 3 1 1 4 2 6 4 5 6 5 2 1 7 4 5 0 1 3 1 4 7 1 2 5 2 5 2 3 2 1 4 4 6 4 6 0 6 3 2 7 9 Press FUNC DCS SEL again to complete the setting You will hear calls only when the selected code is received To answer the call press SEND or press and hold Mic PTT then speak into the microphone Skip steps 7 to 9 if you have already programmed the appropriate DCS code Note You cannot use DCS with the Tone or CTCSS functions DCS CODE ID SCAN This function scans through all DCS codes to identify the incoming DCS code on a received signal You may find this useful when you cannot recall the DCS code that the other persons in your group are using 1 Press FUNC DCS SEL The current DCS code appears 2 Press SCAN SG SEL to activate the DCS Code ID scan DCS blinks and every DCS code is scanned When the DCS code is identified the transceiver stops scanning and the identified DCS ID is displayed Press SCAN SG SEL to resume scanning Press SCAN SG SEL to stop scanning while the DCS code ID scan is active Note Received signals are audible while scanning is in progress 37 COMMUNICATING AIDS RECEIVING SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY In addition to turning the Tuning control or pressing Mic UP DWN there are several other ways to select your frequency This sectio
85. 5 9 5 0 6 L P le v el t u p t u o t u p ni r o s s e c o r P h c e e p S e h t s d a e r d n a st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P le v el t u p n I x a m 0 0 1 ni m 0 0 0 2 P le v el t u p t u O x a m 0 0 1 ni m 0 0 0 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P L 1 P 1 P 1 P 2 P 2 P 2 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P L r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P L 1 P 1 P 1 P 2 P 2 P 2 P M P y r o m e M elb a m m a r g o r P M P e h t slla c e R s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O M P 0 r e b m u n le n n a h c M P 5 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P M 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P M r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P M 1 P R P F F O N O n oitc n u f r o s s e c o r P h c e e p S e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O r o s s e c o r P h c e e p S 0 N O r o s s e c o r P h c e e p S 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P R 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P R r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P R 1 P 133 21 APPENDIX
86. 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 0 4 0 1 P 1 1 P 2 1 P 3 1 P 4 1 P 4 1 P 5 1 P 131 21 APPENDIX S O s u t a ts n oitc n u f t e sff o e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P x elp m i S 0 1 2 s e p yt E ll A 3 F F O e b ts u m n oitc n u f T I L P S e d o m M F ni yln o dila V t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 O S 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 O S r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 O S 1 P A P s u t a ts n oitc n u f r eifilp m a e r p e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P r e vie c s n a rt nia m F F O r eifilp m a e r P 0 r e vie c s n a rt nia m N O r eifilp m a e r P 1 yln o r e w s n A 2 P r e vie c e r b u s N O r eifilp m a e r P 0 r e vie c e r b u s F F O r eifilp m a e r P 1 r e vie c s n a rt nia m e h t r o f d e tc ele s si d n a b y c n e u q e rf e m a s fI r o N O d e n r u t e r a s r eifilp m a e r p h t o b r e vie c e r b u s e h t d n a e m it e m a s e h t t a F F O t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P A 1
87. 6 7 8 9 0 1 B Y r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 B Y 1 P 2 P A C s u t a ts n oitc n u f E N U T O T U A W C e h t s d a e r d n a st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P e vitc a t o N n oitc n u f G N I N U T O T U A W C sle c n a C 0 e vitc A n oitc n u f G N I N U T O T U A W C s e t a vitc A 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 C A 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 C A r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 C A 1 P G C s u t a ts N I A G R E I R R A C e h t s d a e r d n a st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P x a m 0 0 1 ni m 0 0 0 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 C G 1 P 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 C G r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 C G 1 P 1 P 1 P 118 21 APPENDIX H C le n n a h c L L A C e h t o t y c n e u q e rf t n e rr u c e h t st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P p u p e ts 1 lo rt n o c H C I T L U M e h t e v o M 0 n w o d p e ts 1 lo rt n o c H C I T L U M e h t e v o M 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 C H 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
88. 610 Memory 9 New data New data New data Note To use the Quick memory channels you must operate both the main transceiver and the sub receiver in VFO mode If you are using the Quick memory channels while the sub receiver is turned off its last operating mode must be VFO mode Turning the sub receiver off while it is recalling a memory channel will not allow you to use the Quick memory function 65 13 MEMORY FEATURES You can store data in the Quick Memory only when you operate both the main transceiver and the sub receiver in VFO mode 1 Select the frequency mode etc on the main transceiver or sub receiver VFO 2 Press QUICK MEMO M IN Each time QUICK MEMO M IN is pressed the current VFO data is written to the Quick Memory Note When RIT or XIT is ON this ON status and the offset will also be stored RECALLING QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS You can recall a Quick Memory channel only when you operate both the main transceiver and the sub receiver in VFO mode 1 Press QUICK MEMO MR The current memory channel number appears If there is no data stored in any Quick memory channel the data cannot be recalled to the current VFO an error beep sounds 2 Turn the MULTI CH control to select a Quick memory channel 0 to 9 You cannot change memory channels while transmitting 3 To exit press QUICK MEMO MR again Note Memory channels cannot be changed while using the TF SET
89. 8 0 7 0 E 1 1 g ulp N I D nip 3 1 X X 1 5 3 1 7 0 E 1 1 25 A e s u F X X 1 3 5 2 5 0 F 1 1 4 A e s u F X X 7 2 0 4 6 0 F 1 1 t e S w e r c S X X 4 2 0 2 9 9 N 1 1 0 3 4 B M r o f r e c a p S X X 8 9 6 2 1 1 G 4 4 r e tlif e niL 1 X X 8 0 4 1 9 7 L 1 1 d n a B g ninia t e R 1 X X 7 0 3 0 1 6 J 1 1 M O R D C X X 3 2 1 0 3 9 T 1 la u n a M n oitc u rts n I X X 1 2 2 1 2 6 B 1 1 k c ol B cit a m e h c S s m a r g ai D X X 4 1 6 0 2 5 B X X 6 1 6 0 2 5 B X X 8 1 6 0 2 5 B X X 7 1 6 0 2 5 B 1 1 d r a c yt n a rr a W X X 9 6 4 0 6 4 B e p yt K X X 0 1 3 0 6 4 B s e p yt E ll A 1 1 Accessory Part Number Quantity TS 2000 TS 2000X TS B2000 or 1 E and E2 type only WRITING CONVENTIONS FOLLOWED The writing conventions described below have been followed to simplify instructions and avoid unnecessary repetition n oitc u rts nI o D ot ta h W s s e r P Y E K Y E K Y E K Y E K Y E K e s a ele r d n a s s e r P Y E K Y E K Y E K Y E K Y E K s s e r P 2 Y E K
90. A h cti w s o t F F O n oitc n u f e h t s s e r p r O C N U F C N U F C N U F C N U F C N U F A K C O L E R P A K C O L E R P A K C O L E R P A K C O L E R P A K C O L E R P o t F F O n oitc n u f e h t h cti w s 7 7 7 7 si ytila u q oid u a B S S r o h gih e h t r o o p y r e v s eic n e u q e rf oid u a w ol t n e s b a e r a 1 2 3 4 si e d o m n oit a r e p o g n o r w e h T r e vie c e r e h t r o f d e tc ele s e h T H T D I W O L H T D I W O L H T D I W O L H T D I W O L H T D I W O L r o lo rt n o c T F I H S I H T F I H S I H T F I H S I H T F I H S I H T F I H S I H yltc e rr o c ni silo rt n o c t e s N O si 2 r o 1 n oitc u d e R e sio N N O sile c n a C t a e B 1 2 3 4 e d o m e h t r o f B S L r o B S U tc ele S e h t n r u T H T D I W O L H T D I W O L H T D I W O L H T D I W O L H T D I W O L lo rt n o c e h t d n a e si w k c olc r e t n u o c T F I H S I H T F I H S I H T F I H
91. B 25 19 27 28 33 20 29 21 22 23 24 26 30 32 31 9 LSB USB AUTO key Press to select lower sideband LSB or upper sideband USB mode for voice or digital operation Press FUNC LSB USB AUTO to toggle the auto mode selection page 73 0 CW FSK REV key Press to select CW or FSK Frequency Shift Keying mode pages 30 51 Press FUNC CW FSK REV to reverse the sideband pitch 1 FM AM NAR key Press to select FM or AM mode pages 28 29 Press FUNC FM AM NAR to select narrow bandwidth transmission mode page 29 2 CLR key Press to exit from abort or reset various functions Also used to erase memory channels page 62 or locking out memory channels from the scan list page 62 3 DISP key Press to toggle the normal operating mode and DSP filter setting display mode page 55 Press and hold to start the Visual Scan function page 70 4 1MHz SEL key Press to switch the MHz Up Down function ON or OFF using the MULTI CH control Press FUNC 1MHz SEL to change the increment decrement step value page 37 Press and hold to start the MHz Scan function page 68 5 Tuning control Turn to select the desired frequency page 37 Use the convenient finger tip cavity for continuous tuning The lever behind this control adjusts the control torque level turn fully clockwise for light torque or fully counterclockwise for heavy torque 6 CTRL ke
92. CTRL MR M VFO MG SEL M IN M IN QUICK MEMO SATL A B M S REV TRACE MAIN MANUAL RF AF SQL SUB CH MULTI BC MAIN GAIN VFO CH VFO M A B SPLIT MENU TF SET MAIN SUB SG SEL SCAN RIT CW TUNE 9 6k STA RIT SUB CON XIT ALT SET CLEAR P C T _ HF VHE UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS 2000 4 Press SEND or release Mic PTT The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off depending on the MAIN SQL control setting 5 Press MIC CAR For FM mode access Menu No 41 page 28 and select LOW MID or HIGH for the microphone gain Note When using the optional MC 90 microphone in FM mode select HIGH for the microphone gain The microphone sensitivity is low in FM mode This may cause insufficient modulation For other microphones select either LOW or MID 21 MENU SETUP WHAT IS A MENU Many functions on this transceiver are selected or configured via a software controlled Menu rather than through the physical controls of the transceiver Once familiar with the Menu system you will appreciate the versatility it offers You can customize the various timings settings and programming functions on this transceiver to meet your needs without using many controls and switches MENU A MENU B This transceiver has two menus Menu A and Menu B These menus contain identical functions and can be configured indepen
93. DTMF Mic 5 After selecting all the necessary characters for the memory channel name press M IN to store the name or press DISP to select a Memory Group You can select only one of 10 groups 0 to 9 Enter the desired group number by pressing a numeric key The selected group is shown in a larger font After selecting a group press M IN to store the name and group number in the memory channel 6 When you recall a memory channel with a name the name is displayed on the dot matrix display along with the memory channel number and group number page 64 Alpha numeric characters A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z _ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z P S amp 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 lt gt y S Y s Additional characters for all E types Available characters Available characters using a DTMF Mic F M T D y e k sr etc a r a h c elb alia v A 1 q z 1 Q Z 2 a b c 2 A B C 3 d e f 3 D E F 4 g h i 4 G H I 5 j k
94. ID T blinks and every Tone frequency is scanned When the Tone frequency is identified the transceiver stops scanning and the identified frequency is displayed Press SCAN SG SEL again to resume scanning Press SCAN SG SEL to stop scanning while the Tone frequency ID scan is active S S S S 144 0 145 5 146 4 147 0 147 6 145 1 146 0 146 6 147 4 148 0 MHz S Simplex S S S Simplex 144 0 146 0 MHz 145 8 145 6 35 8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS FM CTCSS OPERATION You may sometimes want to hear calls only from specific persons When using FM mode the Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System CTCSS allows you to ignore not hear unwanted calls from other persons who are using the same frequency A CTCSS tone is sub audible and is selectable from among the 38 standard tone frequencies Select the same CTCSS tone as the other stations in your group You will not hear calls from stations other than those using the same CTCSS tone Note CTCSS does not cause your conversation to be private It only relieves you from listening to unwanted conversations 1 Press A B to select VFO A or VFO B tA or tB appears to show which VFO is selected 2 Select a band 3 Select an operating frequency 4 Press FM AM NAR to select FM mode FM appears 5 Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch 6 Press 6 CTCSS SEL to switch the
95. MANUAL RF AF SQL SUB CH MULTI BC MAIN GAIN VFO CH VFO M A B SPLIT MENU TF SET MAIN SUB SG SEL SCAN RIT CW TUNE 9 6k STA RIT SUB CON XIT ALT SET CLEAR P C T _ HF VHE UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS 2000 You may prefer directly entering a frequency using the numeric keypad if the desired frequency is far from the current frequency Press ENT then press the numeric keys as necessary For details see Direct Frequency Entry page 37 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC 3 CH3 REC 4 TONE SEL 5 METER 6 CTCSS SEL 7 NB LEVEL 8 AGC OFF 9 FINE STEP DCS SEL 0 SHIFT OFFSET ENT PF F LOCK A 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC 3 CH3 REC 4 TONE SEL 5 METER 6 CTCSS SEL 7 NB LEVEL 8 AGC OFF 9 FINE STEP DCS SEL 0 SHIFT OFFSET ENT SEND PHONES MIC AT ANT1 2 PROC LEVEL VOX ATT PRE LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL MANUAL LO WIDTH HI SHIFT N R A N B C FUNC CLR MAIN AUTO CAR TX MONI DELAY NAR REV MIC PWR KEY LSB USB CW FSK FM AM DISP SEL 1MHz CTRL MEN M HF VHE UHF ALL MO This transceiver provides many other methods for quickly selecting a frequency For further information see SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY page 37 FRONT PANEL METER The multi function meter measures the parameters in th
96. MEMORY FEATURES I Split Frequency Channels 1 Press A B to select VFO A or VFO B tA or tB appears to show which VFO is selected 2 Select the frequency mode etc to be stored This frequency and mode will be used for transmitting 3 Press A B to select the other VFO 4 Select the receive frequency and mode 5 Press SPLIT SPLIT appears 6 Press M IN to enter Memory Scroll mode To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the storage process press CLR 7 Turn the MULTI CH control or press Mic UP DWN to select a memory channel You can also select a channel by entering a 3 digit number such as 012 using the numeric keys 8 Press M IN again to store the data The previous data stored in the channel is overwritten Note When subtone frequencies differ between TX and RX while performing memory VFO split operation the subtone frequency for TX will be stored in the memory channel MEMORY RECALL AND SCROLL There are two modes which allow you to retrieve frequencies and associated data that you stored in a memory channel Memory Recall and Memory Scroll Memory Recall In this mode the transceiver receives and transmits using a frequency that you retrieve You can temporarily change the frequency and associated data without overwriting the contents of the memory channel when Menu No 06B is set to ON Memory Scroll Use this mode to check the
97. MHz 430 440 MHz and 1 2 GHz TS 2000 TS B2000 optional As shown in the table above you can also store different output power settings for AM and other modes for each operating band N For AM mode in the 430 440 MHz band and the 1 2 GHz TS 2000 TS B2000 optional band the final step is 0 5 W rather than 1 W 80 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES QUICK DATA TRANSFER This transceiver has the capability to quickly and conveniently transfer the receive frequency and mode to another compatible transceiver Compatible transceivers include TS 2000 X TS 570S 570D TS 850S TS 870S TS 690S TS 950SDX TS 450S Data Transfer could be useful while contesting A spotting station that is searching for new contest multipliers can quickly transfer a frequency over to the running main station SETTING UP I Equipment Needed In addition to a compatible transceiver the following equipment is required Transfer to TS 2000 X TS 570 or TS 870S One cross wired cable This cable must have a 9 pin RS 232C female connector at both ends Transfer to a transceiver other than TS 2000 X TS 570 and TS 870S KENWOOD IF 232C interface unit One cross wired cable This cable must have a 9 pin RS 232C female connector at one end and a 25 pin RS 232C female connector at the other end One straight cable This cable must have a 6 pin DIN male connector at both ends I Connections
98. No 50D instead The frequencies measured in kHz commonly used for Packet are listed below a d a n a C A S U a cirf A e p o r u E 1 n oig e R U R A 0 3 8 1 0 0 8 1 5 3 6 3 0 2 6 3 0 0 6 3 0 9 5 3 0 0 1 7 0 8 0 7 0 5 1 0 1 0 4 1 0 1 5 9 9 0 4 1 5 9 0 4 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 0 1 4 1 9 9 0 4 1 9 8 0 4 1 0 1 1 8 1 5 0 1 8 1 0 0 1 1 2 0 9 0 1 2 0 2 1 1 2 0 0 1 1 2 9 8 1 8 2 0 2 1 8 2 0 0 3 9 2 0 0 2 9 2 0 5 1 8 2 0 2 1 8 2 0 8 7 0 5 0 0 6 0 5 0 9 0 5 4 1 0 1 9 4 4 1 5 7 0 1 4 4 5 7 9 0 4 4 5 2 0 1 3 4 0 5 0 0 3 4 DCD SENSE You can also select the method for inhibiting the built in TNC from transmitting Access Menu No 48 and select one of the two methods The default is TNC BAND TNC BAND The TNC does not transmit when signals are present on the TNC data band MAIN amp SUB The TNC does not transmit when signals are present on the main transceiver or sub receiver 51 11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS RADIO TELETYPEWRITING RTTY RTTY is the data communications mode with the longest history It was originally designed for use with mechanical teletypewriters which were often used before personal computers
99. P 1 P A O F V 0 B O F V 1 H C M 2 L L A C 3 d n a b X T t n e rr u c e h t o t d eilp p a si d n a m m o c e h T t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F T 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F T r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F T 1 P W F h t di w r e tlif e vie c e r P S D e h t s d a e r r o stc ele S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P z H ni 9 9 9 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 6 0 0 5 0 0 4 0 0 3 0 0 2 0 5 1 0 0 1 0 8 0 5 W C 0 0 5 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 5 0 5 2 K S F e di W 1 0 0 0 w o rr a N 0 0 0 0 M A M F L S e h t e s U d n a m m o c W F e h t e s u t o n n a c u o y e d o m B S S n I d a e ts ni d n a m m o c H S r o t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F W 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F W r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F W 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P T G s u t a ts t n a ts n o c C G A e h t s d a e r r o stc ele S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O 0 0 0 x a m 0 2 0 ni m 1 0 0 r e vie c s n a rt e h T e d
100. P A 9 4 n oit a r e p o t e k c a p r o fle v elt u p t u o F A d n a b b u S D 0 5 L O R T N O C N O I S S I M S N A R T r e m i T t u o e m i T 4 2 tibih ni X T 4 5 R E T R E V S N A R T y alp sid y c n e u q e rf r e tr e v s n a r T 5 2 L O R T N O C G N I N U T o t B S S g nig n a h c r o f n oitc e rr o c y c n e u q e r F W C 7 3 e h t r o f e zis p e ts y c n e u q e rf z H k 9 H C I T L U M ts a c d a o r b M A e h t n o e d o m M A nilo rt n o c d n a b 5 0 y b d e g n a h c s eic n e u q e rf O F V ff o s d n u o R e h t g nis u H C I T L U M lo rt n o c 4 0 n oit ulo v e r r e p e g n a h c lo rt n o c g nin u T 2 0 h ti w g nin u T H C I T L U M lo rt n o c 3 0 L O R T N O C E M U L O V le v elt u p t u o p e e B 2 1 e m ulo v k c a b y alp A 3 U R D 4 1 e m ulo v e n o t e dis X T 3 1 e m ulo v k c a b y alp 3 S V 5 1 n oitc n u F u n e M o N K C A B Y A L P E G A S S E M k c a b y alp e h t g nit a e p e r r o f e m itla v r e t n I B 9 2 k c a b y alp e h t t a e p e
101. R A 9 2 S Y E K F P y e k F P le n a p t n o r F A 1 5 y e k L L A C 1 F P e n o h p o r ci M B 1 5 y e k O F V 2 F P e n o h p o r ci M C 1 5 y e k R M 3 F P e n o h p o r ci M D 1 5 y e k F P 4 F P e n o h p o r ci M E 1 5 L O R T N O C R E W O P g nin u t r e w o p ti m s n a rt e ni F 3 2 F F O N O R E W O P n oitc n u f ff O r e w o P o t u A O P A 7 5 L O R T N O C E T O M E R lo rt n o c e t o m e r ci M elb a n E D 5 4 0 0 0 2 C R r o f e d o m y alp si D 0 6 e d o m n oit a r e p o y s a e nit n o f 0 0 0 2 C R 8 5 xirt a m t o d X 0 0 0 2 S T le n a p 0 0 0 2 C R ts a rt n o c y alp sid 9 5 R E T A E P E R e t o m e r la n r e tx e nila n gis t n e m e g d el w o n k c A e d o m lo rt n o c D 1 6 lo rt n o c e t o m e r la n r e tx E E 1 6 e d o c D Ilo rt n o c e t o m e R C 1 6 tc ele s e d o m r e t a e p e R A 1 6 dlo h X T r e t a e p e R B 1 6 N A C S dlo h n a c s m a r g o r P 9 0 d e w ols yllaitr a p n a c s m a r g o r P 7 0 m a r g o r
102. S I H T F I H S I H T F I H S I H e si w k c olc lo rt n o c s s e r P L E V E L R N L E V E L R N L E V E L R N L E V E L R N L E V E L R N e h t h cti w s o t F F O n oitc n u f s s e r P L A U N A M C B L A U N A M C B L A U N A M C B L A U N A M C B L A U N A M C B e h t h cti w s o t F F O n oitc n u f 8 2 5 5 6 5 6 5 TROUBLESHOOTING The problems described in this table are commonly encountered operational malfunctions These types of difficulties are usually caused by improper hook up accidental incorrect control settings or operator error due to incomplete programming These problems are usually not caused by circuit failure Please review this table and the appropriate section s of this instruction manual before assuming your transceiver is defective Note Placing a powered portable transceiver near this transceiver may cause noise in the transceiver 101 18 TROUBLESHOOTING m elb o r P e s u a C elb a b o r P n oitc A e vitc e rr o C e g a P fe R e r a sla n gis o N e vie c e r r o d e vie c e r s m e e s ytivitis n e s r o o p 1 2 3 4 5 6 e h T L Q S
103. S P s u t a ts F F O N O r e w o P e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P N O r e w o P 0 F F O r e w o P 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P S 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P S r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P S 1 P C Q e d o c S C D e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P yllait n e u q e s d e r e b m u n e r a s e d o c S C D 3 0 1 elb alia v a ll A 3 0 1 o t 0 0 0 m o rf e d o c S C D 4 5 7 3 0 1 e d o c S C D 3 2 0 0 0 0 x e t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 Q C 1 P 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 Q C r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 Q C 1 P 1 P 1 P I Q y r o m e M k ciu Q e h t ni s g nitt e s e h t e r o t S s r e t e m a r a P e n o N t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 Q I d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 R Q a t a d le n n a h c y r o m e M k ciu Q e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O y r o m e M k ciu Q 0 N O y r o m e M k ciu Q 1 2 P r e
104. S tlu afe D fe R e g a P W C 0 3 k c a b y alp r e v o ytir oir p g niy e K N O F F O F F O 4 4 1 3 y c n e u q e rf e n o t e dis X T h ctip X R W C z H 0 0 0 1 o t 0 0 4 z H 0 5 f o s p e ts ni z H 0 0 8 0 3 2 3 e m it e sir W C s m 6 4 2 1 s m 6 7 7 3 3 oit a r t h gie w h s a d t o d g niy e k W C 0 4 o t 5 2 O T U A 1 0 f o s p e ts ni O T U A 2 4 4 3 oit a r t h gie w o t u a g niy e k W C e s r e v e R N O F F O F F O 2 4 5 3 e d o m y e k g u B N O F F O F F O 3 4 6 3 e d o m B S S ni X T W C o t u A N O F F O F F O 4 4 7 3 W C o t B S S g nig n a h c r o f n oitc e rr o c y c n e u q e r F N O F F O F F O 4 4 K S F 8 3 tfih s K S F z H 0 5 8 5 2 4 0 0 2 0 7 1 z H 0 7 1 1 5 9 3 ytir alo p g niy e k K S F S R E V N I L A M R O N L A M R O N 1 5 0 4 y c n e u q e rf e n o t K S F z H 5 2 1 2 5 7 2 1 z H 5 2 1 2 1 5 M F 1 4 M F r o f nia g ci M H G I H D I M W O L W O L 0 2 2 4 M F r o f e d o m e n o t b u S T N O C T S R U B e e
105. T I R T I X D e s a e r c e d y c n e u q e rf t e sff o T I R T I X 1 e d o m W C r o B S U B S L n I h cti w s z H k 1 z H 0 1 h cti w s z H k 0 1 z H k 1 e d o m M A r o M F n I 2 N O y rt n e y c n e u q e rf e d o m O F V n I r e b m u n le n n a h c e d o m lla c e R y r o m e M n I N O y rt n e 1 FS appears when you select 1 kHz step LSB USB CW or 10 kHz step FM AM 2 After pressing Mic press Mic 0 to 9 to enter a frequency or memory channel number When Mic 0 is pressed the Commander shows the current settings of the HF transceiver q e y r u w t q HF frequency w VFO A VFO B MR 00 99 memory channel number e RIT XIT r OFF 9 99 9 99 t LSB USB CW FM or AM y SPLIT A VFO A is used for transmitting SPLIT B VFO B is used for transmitting SPLIT M A memory channel is used for transmitting u FS appears when Mic is pressed Note N After pressing MENU you can access only Menu 4 4 N The Transporter will transmit its call sign in Morse code every 10 minutes using the 144 MHz band N The APO timer will not operate on the transceiver while the Transporter is ON N You must set VHF frequency on the main transceiver and UHF frequency on the sub receiver Otherwise the Sky C
106. a b m c 3 2 W 0 1 ni M d n a b m c 0 7 W 5 d n a b m 2 m 0 6 1 W 5 d n a b m c 3 2 W 1 M A x a M d n a b m c 0 7 W 5 2 1 d n a b m 2 m 0 6 1 W 5 2 d n a b m c 3 2 W 5 2 ni M d n a b m c 0 7 W 5 d n a b m 2 m 0 6 1 W 5 d n a b m c 3 2 W 1 n oit alu d o M B S S d e c n ala B M F e c n a tc a e R M A le v el w o L s n ois si m e s u oir u p S d n a b m 0 1 m 0 6 1 s s el r o B d 0 5 d n a b m c 0 7 m 6 s s el r o B d 0 6 d n a b m c 3 2 s s el r o B d 0 5 B S S n ois s e r p p u s r eirr a C e r o m r o B d 0 5 n ois s e r p p u s d n a b e dis d e t n a w n U z H k 0 1 y c n e u q e rf n oit alu d o m e r o m r o B d 0 5 y c n e u q e rf m u m ix a M M F n oit aiv e d e di W s s el r o z H k 5 w o rr a N s s el r o z H k 5 2 e g n a r y c n e u q e rf tfih s T I X z H k 0 0 2 e c n a d e p m i e n o h p o r ci M 0 0 6 r e vie c e R 0 0 0 2 S T 0 0 0 2 B S T X 0 0 0 2 S T e
107. a malfunction is detected this does not designate that the transceiver is defective 50 11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS PREPARATION 1 Connect the transceiver to your personal computer via an external TNC or MCP if desired See COMPUTER page 93 and MCP AND TNC page 95 2 Install an appropriate terminal program onto the personal computer A variety of freeware and shareware programs can be obtained in various ways Consult your reference material or other packeteers 3 Initiate the terminal program and set the following parameters on the personal computer Transfer rate TNC MCP lt gt Computer 9600 bps default setting Data length 8 bit Stop bit 1 bit Parity Non parity Flow control Hardware 4 Press A B to select VFO A or VFO B 5 Access Menu No 46 and select the main band or the sub band default as the data band TNC appears on the data band If you are using an external TNC or MCP access Menu No 50E to make this selection The default is main band 6 Access Menu No 47 and select 1200 bps default or 9600 bps as the transfer rate between TNCs You must select the same transfer rate as the target station If you are using an external TNC or MCP access Menu No 50F to make this selection The default is 1200 bps 7 Select an operating frequency 8 Press LSB USB AUTO or FM AM NAR to select LSB USB
108. a transverter that converts the TS 2000 operating frequencies to other frequencies you can use this TS 2000 transceiver as a transverter exciter Consult the instruction manual that came with the transverter for interfacing to the TS 2000 1 Connect the transverter to the ANT 1 ANT 2 ANT 144 ANT 430 or ANT 1 2G TS 2000 optional connector on the rear of the transceiver 2 Select the exciter operating frequency on the main transceiver of the TS 2000 X The transverter will use this frequency as the reference for converting frequencies 3 Access Menu No 25 and select ON by pressing The output power is automatically set to the lowest power for that frequency See TX POWER below 4 Press MENU to store the setting and exit the Menu mode 5 Press ENT then set the target converting frequency using the numeric keys 6 Press ENT to complete the entry 7 The transceiver displays the target transverter frequency instead of the actual operating frequency Note When using a transverter not all the functions of this transceiver are available TX MONITOR TX monitor allows you to monitor the on going transmission sound This is convenient when you want to check the modulation sound quality of the transmission In FSK mode you can monitor the FSK signal that the TS 2000 X is transmitting 1 Press FUNC PWR TX MONI 2 The current TX monitor setting appears 3 Turn the MULTI CH co
109. bit and non parity N To use the above commands you must operate the transceiver in Packet communication mode The default operation mode is PC Control Command mode page 113 To switch to Packet communication mode either set Menu No 55 to ON pages 25 49 or key in TC 0 page 138 d n a m m o C e m a N tr o h S tlu afe D r ete m a r a P n oitpirc s e D E M I T T O L S L S 3 0 5 2 0 sla v r e t ni n oit a r e n e g r e b m u n m o d n a r f o d oir e p e h t s eific e p S e h t f o tin u e h T d o h t e m E M I T T O L S T S I S R E P e h t r o f s d n o c e silli m 0 1 si r e t e m a r a p E C A R T C A R T F F O F F O N O st e k c a p d e vie c e r lla y alp sid o t C N T e h t s e s u a c N O n e h W yt e rit n e rie h t ni S E I R T I R T 0 5 1 0 ni d e m m a r g o r p s eirt e r n ois si m s n a rt f o r e b m u n e h t s eific e p S r e t n u o c y rt e r e h t Y A L E D X T X T 0 5 0 2 1 0 f o tr a ts e h t d n a N O T T P n e e w t e b y ale d e m it e h t s eific e p S s d n o c e silli m 0 1 si r e t e m a r a p e h t f o tin u e h T n ois si m s n a rt
110. c d a o r b M A e h t F F O N O A 6 0 n oit a r e p o tilp s O F V y r o m e M F F O N O B 6 0 y r o m e m F F O d e xif r o N O elb a n u T s eic n e u q e rfle n n a h c F F O N O 7 0 d e w ols yllaitr a p n a c s m a r g o r P F F O N O 8 0 e h t r o f e g n a r y c n e u q e rf n w o d w ol S n a c s m a r g o r P 0 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 5 9 0 dlo h n a c s m a r g o r P F F O N O 0 1 d o h t e m e m u s e r n a c S O T O C 1 1 e g n a r n a c s la u si V 1 3 1 6 1 9 1 8 1 2 1 le v elt u p t u o p e e B F F O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 1 e m ulo v e n o t e dis X T F F O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 1 e m ulo v k c a b y alp A 3 U R D F F O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5 1 e m ulo v k c a b y alp 3 S V F F O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 6 1 r o f n oit a r u gif n o c t u p t u o oid u A e n o h p d a e h r o 2 P S T X E 0 1 2 7 1 2 P S T X E d n a 1 P S T X E e h t s e s r e v e R sle n n a h c R L k c aj e n o h p d a e h e h t st u p t u o oid u a F F O N O 8 1 T N A X R F H e h t m o rf
111. c e h t d eific e p s si r e t m a r a p 1 P o n fI n w o d p e ts 1 d n a m m o c e h t e d o m y r o m e M k ciu Q d n a e d o m y r o m e M n I n w o d le n n a h c y r o m e M a s a d e t a e rt si r e t e m a r a p a t u o h ti w y c n e u q e rf e h t s a d e t a e rt si ti s r e t e m a r a p h ti W d n a m m o c d n a m m o c n w o d t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 D N 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 Q D s u t a ts n oitc n u f S C D e h t s d a e r d n a st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O n oitc n u f S C D 0 N O n oitc n u f S C D 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 D Q 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 D Q r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 D Q 1 P X E u n e M n ois n e tx E e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P ts 1 o N u n e M 9 9 9 0 0 0 2 P d n 2 o N u n e M 9 9 0 0 3 P d r 3 o N u n e M 9 0 4 P h t 4 o N u n e M 9 0 5 P s r e tc a r a h c f o g nirts A h t g
112. d e p m i h gi H d e s olc h cle u q S 8 D N G d n u o r G 9 S K P lo rt n o c e nil T T P r e vie c s n a r T ti m s n a rt o tla ni m r e t sih t d n u o r G n oit a r e p o la tigid r o f nip g nih cti w s e vie c e r ti m s n a rt P C M r o C N T e h t o t tc e n n o C sti m s n a rt r e vie c s n a rt e h t n e h w s e t u m t u p ni oid u a e n o h p o r ci M 0 1 C N n oitc e n n o c o N 1 1 D K P t u p ni oid u a e n o h p o r ci M n oit a r e p o la tigid r o f nip a t a d ti m s n a rt P C M r o C N T e h t o t tc e n n o C 2 1 D N G d n u o r G 3 1 S S lo rt n o c T T P ti m s n a rt o tla ni m r e t sih t d n u o r G k c aj C I M h ti w lella r a p ni r ello rt n o c la n r e tx e r e h t o r o h cti w st o o f a g nitc e n n o c r o F sti m s n a rt r e vie c s n a rt e h t n e h w e t u m T O N s e o d t u p ni oid u a e n o h p o r ci M ACC2 Front view Rear panel 96 16 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT q rw t e u GND i y EXT CONT Front view Rear panel B C E TXC Circuit o
113. data stored open is announced For the MHz decimal point point is announced For the kHz decimal point a short pause 200 ms is made A 200 ms pause is also made between the channel number and the frequency Menu numbers and their settings are announced with a short pause 200 ms between the menu number and the setting Note If operating a key or a control changes the contents of the display while an announcement is in progress the announcement is interrupted VOICE2 The S meter readings at the time you pressed the key are announced for example S5 or 20 dB The table below shows the available announcements when the PF VOICE2 is pressed N I A M B U S r ete M S le v e L e c n u o n n A tn e m r ete M S le v e L e c n u o n n A tn e m 3 1 1 S 1 1 S 4 2 S 2 2 S 6 5 3 S 3 3 S 7 4 S 4 4 S 9 8 5 S 5 5 S 0 1 6 S 6 6 S 2 1 1 1 7 S 7 7 S 3 1 8 S 8 8 S 5 1 4 1 9 S 9 9 S 8 1 6 1 B d 0 1 0 1 B d 0 1 0 2 9 1 B d 0 2 1 1 B d 0 2 2 2 1 2 B d 0 3 2 1 B d 0 3 5 2 3 2 B d 0 4 3 1 B d 0 4 8 2 6 2 B d 0 5 4 1 B d 0 5 0 3 9 2 B d 0 6 5 1 B d 0 6 1 Assign VOICE1 63 or VOICE2 64 to the front panel PF key by accessing Menu No 51A Or if you
114. e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S B r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S B 1 P C S s u t a ts n oitc n u f N A C S e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O n a c S 0 N O n a c S 1 N O n a c S z H M 2 N O n a c S la u si V 3 N O n a c S e n o T 4 N O n a c S S S C T C 5 N O n a c S S C D 6 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S C 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S C r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S C 1 P D S y ale d e m it ni k a e r b W C e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P s m 0 5 f o s p e ts ni s m 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 ni k a e r b llu F K B F si 0 0 0 0 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S D 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S D r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S D 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P H S s g nitt e s r e tlif P S D e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P 1 1 0 0 z H M F B S S 0 0 4 2 5 0 0 0 2 2 4 0 0 0 0 2 3 0 0 0 8 1 2 0 0 0 6 1 1 0 0 0 4 1 0 0 0 0 0 5 1 1 0
115. e m r o r e vie c s n a rt F H e h t ci M s s e r P P U N W D n a n o oid u a ti m s n a rt o T y c n e u q e rf F H ci M dlo h d n a s s e r P T T P e h t o t ni k a e p s n e h t e n o h p o r ci m n a n o oid u a e vie c e r o T y c n e u q e rf F H ci M s s e r P 2 d n a b F H U e h t r o tin o m o T r e d n a m m o C e h t n o ci M e h t s s e r P F P y e k r o tin o M e h t o t d e n gis s a n oitc n u f y e K ci M n oitc n u F 1 F F O r e w o P 2 F F O N O e vie c e r y c n e u q e rf F H 3 h cti w s e d o m n oit alu d o M 4 F F O N O T I R 5 F F O N O T I X 6 r a elc t e sff o T I X r o t e sff o T I R 7 F F O N O y c n e u q e rf tilp S 8 O F V o t y r o m e M m o rf r e fs n a r T 9 h cti w s B O F V A O F V e d o m O F V n I e g n a h c o n e d o m lla c e R y r o m e M n I 0 F H m o rf e v eirt e r s g nitt e s t n e rr u C r e vie c s n a rt B h cti w s e d o m lla c e R y r o m e M O F V C e s a e r c ni y c n e u q e rf t e sff o
116. e u q e r F e g n a h c P UP UP UP UP U N W D N W D N W D N W D N W D e g n a h c t e sff o T I X r o t e sff o T I R B A B A B A B A B A h cti w s B O F V A O F V e d o m O F V n I e g n a h c o n e d o m lla c e R y r o m e M n I R E W O P R E W O P R E W O P R E W O P R E W O P 1 F F O N O r e w o P X RX RX RX RX R 1 F F O N O e vie c e r y c n e u q e rf F H E D O M E D O M E D O M E D O M E D O M 1 h cti w s e d o m n oit alu d o M T I R T I R T I R T I R T I R 1 F F O N O T I R T I X T I X T I X T I X T I X 1 F F O N O T I X R L C R L C R L C R L C R L C 1 r a elc t e sff o T I X r o t e sff o T I R T I L P S T I L P S T I L P S T I L P S T I L P S 1 F F O N O y c n e u q e rf tilp S M M M M M VVVVV 1 O F V o t y r o m e M m o rf r e fs n a r T T S A F e d o m W C r o B S U B S L n I h cti w s z H k 1 z H 0 1 h cti w s z H k 0 1 z H k 1 e d o m M A r o M F n I C N Y S C N Y S C N Y S C N Y S C N Y S 1 e v eirt e r s g nitt e s t n e rr u C r e vie c s n a
117. el h cle u q S 5 5 2 0 0 0 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S Q 1 P 2 P 2 P 2 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S Q 1 P r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S Q 1 P 2 P 2 P 2 P R S r e vie c s n a rt e h t st e s e R s r e t e m a r a P 1 P t e s e r O F V 1 t e s e r r e ts a M 2 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S R 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S S y c n e u q e rf e s u a p n a c S m a r g o r P e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P d e v r e s e R 0 t e S 1 r a elc ll A 2 r o N D e h t e s u 9 9 2 0 9 2 le n n a h c y r o m e m g nitc ele s n e h W d n a m m o c sih t e s u n e h T y c n e u q e rf e h t t e s o t d n a m m o c P U y c n e u q e rf e s u a p n a c S m a r g o r P e h t t e s o t y c n e u q e rf t n e rr u c e h t d a e r n a c u o y d n a m m o c F I e h t g nis U t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S S 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S S r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S S 1 P
118. elb a m a r g o r P e h t ni s e r o t S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P r e b m u n le n n a h c M P 5 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P I 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 132 21 APPENDIX K P a t a d r e ts ul C t e k c a P e h t s d a e R s r e t e m a r a P d n a m m o c I A e h t h ti w nitc n ujn o c ni d e s u si d n a m m o c sih T 1 P tigid 1 1 z H ni y c n e u q e r F 2 P tigid 2 1 n gislla C 3 P tigid 0 2 st n e m m o C 4 P tigid 5 e m i T t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P K 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 1 P 1 P 1 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 0 3 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 0 4 3 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 0 5 3 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 4 P 4 P 4 P 4 P 4 P 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8
119. his her antenna or receive when he she needs repeated test transmissions For information on how to install the DRU 3A unit refer to INSTALLING OPTIONS page 97 RECORDING MESSAGES This section explains how to record a single message 1 Select SSB FM or AM Use the same mode for transmitting and receiving 2 If VOX is ON press VOX LEVEL to switch the function OFF 3 Press FUNC 1 CH1 REC to record the message for channel 1 REC WAIT and AP1 appear To exit the Record Standby mode and quit recording your message press CLR 4 Press and hold 1 CH1 REC then begin speaking into your microphone Three channels are available for recording messages Press channel key 2 CH2 REC or 3 CH3 REC in place of 1 CH1 REC in step 3 to record the message on a different channel 5 Release the key pressed in step 4 when you have finished recording your message Also when the maximum recording time passes recording stops The content of the channel is overwritten with the new message 6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 to record a message on another channel Note Pressing POWER cancels recording in progress and clears the memory channel MESSAGE PLAYBACK You can play back the message in channel 1 2 or 3 to check or to send It is also possible to make a longer message by consecutively playing back the messages of more than one channel linking
120. key Press to use split frequency operation which allows you to use different transmit and receive frequencies page 31 In Satellite mode press to toggle the Trace Reverse function ON and OFF page 54 VFO M VFO CH key Press to select either Memory or VFO mode page 59 In Satellite mode press to toggle the VFO and memory channel operations page 54 A B TRACE key Press to copy the data in the currently selected VFO to the other VFO page 31 In Satellite mode press to toggle the TRACE function ON and OFF page 54 7 Ms s s s sVFO MG SEL key Press to transfer data from a memory channel to a VFO page 61 Press FUNC Ms s s s sVFO MG SEL to enter Memory Group Select mode page 64 8 M IN key Writes data into a memory channel page 58 or selects Memory Scroll mode page 60 9 RIT CW TUNE key Press to switch the Receive Incremental Tuning function ON or OFF page 38 Press FUNC RIT CW TUNE to activate the automatic zero beat function for CW mode page 30 0 XIT ALT key Press to switch the Transmit Incremental Tuning function ON or OFF page 40 Press FUNC XIT ALT to switch the Auto Lock Tuning mode for the 1 2 GHz band FM ON or OFF page 72 1 CLEAR key Press to reset the RIT XIT frequency offset to zero pages 38 40 2 SET P C T key Press to set received DX Packet Cluster frequency data to the main transceiver when the Packet Cluster Tun
121. line noise Only 3 lines are required theoretically for control of the transceiver via the computer Transmit data Receive data Ground From a practical standpoint it is also necessary to incorporate some means of controlling when this data transfer will occur The computer and transceiver cannot be allowed to send data at the same time The required control is achieved by using the RTS and CTS lines For example the transceiver is placed into the transmit mode whenever the character string TX is sent from the computer The character string TX is called a computer control command It tells the transceiver what to do There are numerous commands available for control of the transceiver These commands may be incorporated into a computer program written in any high level language Programming methods vary from computer to computer therefore refer to the instruction manuals provided with the terminal program and computer 114 21 APPENDIX I Parameters Parameters are used to specify information necessary to implement the desired command The parameters to be used for each command are predetermined The number of digits assigned to each parameter is also predetermined Refer to the Computer Control Commands and the PC Control Command Tables page 115 to configure the appropriate parameters When configuring parameters be careful not to make the following mistakes correct parameter IS 1000
122. m it u p t u o oid u A 8 109 APPENDIX TS B2000 FRONT PANEL PHONES MIC RESET HF VHF UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDE R TS B2000 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR 2 5 3 4 1 q POWER switch Press and hold briefly to switch the transceiver power ON Press again to switch the power OFF w Power indicator While the transceiver is turned ON it lights red e MIC connector Connect a compatible microphone to this connector then securely screw down the connector locking ring page 3 r PHONES jack Connect a set of headphones to this jack Inserting a plug into the jack automatically mutes the audio from the speaker page 3 t RESET button Push this switch to reset the microprocessor in the transceiver This sets all the contents of the memory function to the factory default values 110 21 APPENDIX BUILT IN TNC COMMAND LIST All descriptions in this section are for the users convenience only KENWOOD will not support or warrantee this documentation in any way The built in TNC does not support the digipeater functions due to the RAM capacity d n a m m o C e m a N tr o h S tlu afe D r ete m a r a P n oitpirc s e D F L O T U A U A N O F F O N O r e tf a r e t u p m o c e h t o t F L d e e f e nil a s d n e s N O n e h W R C n r u t e r e g airr a c h c a e N E L W
123. m r o f h t o B 3 r e vie c s n a rt e h t d e tc ele s si t a m r o f I A d e d n e tx e e h t n e h W s r e t e m a r a p e h t s d n e s ylla cit a m o t u a t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A I 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A I r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A I 1 P L A le v e I h ct o N o t u A e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P 4 0 0 0 0 0 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A L 1 P 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A L r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A L 1 P 1 P 1 P M A F F O N O e d o M o t u A e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O si n oitc n u f e d o M o t u A 0 N O si n oitc n u f e d o M o t u A 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A M 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A M r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A M 1 P PC CONTROL COMMAND TABLES 116 21 APPENDIX N A 2 T N A 1 T N A r o tc e n n o c a n n e t n a e h t stc ele S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P n oitc ele s a n n e t n a t n e rr u c e h t s d a e
124. n el elb air a V 0 0 t e s elb alia v a t o n e r a s u n e m d r 3 d n a d n 2 e h t fI yln o tigid 1 yfic e p S s s e n t h gir b y alp si D F F O r e m m i D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X E 2 le v el r e m m i D 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X E tigid 2 e v a h C 2 6 d n a 9 5 E A 1 5 3 3 1 3 B 9 2 u n e M s r e t e m a r a p tigid 3 9 9 9 0 0 0 5 P C 1 6 u n e M s r e tc a r a h c 8 f o m u m ix a m A 5 P B A 2 6 u n e M r e b m u n le n n a h c y r o m e M F M T D r o f 9 0 3 P A 5 4 u n e M e d o C 1 F M T D 0 4 P A 5 4 u n e M r e tc a r a h c ts rif e h t fI stigid 6 1 f o m u m ix a m A 5 P A 5 4 u n e M B 2 6 d n a A 2 6 d e r a elc e b lli w e m a n e h t r e tc a r a h c e c a p s a si L L A C O N e m o c e b X E e h t g nis u N O 5 5 o N u n e M n r u t n a c u o y h g u o h tl A F F O ti n r u t o t d n a m m o c 1 C T e h t e s u ts u m u o y d n a m m o c t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 E X 1 P 1 P 1 P 2 P 2 P
125. n n a h C y r o m e M F F O N O t u o k c o L a le n n a h C y r o m e M F F O t u o k c o L When copying a memory channel 290 299 a channel 290 299 Memory Channel Lockout status changes to OFF regardless of the original channel settings The tables above illustrate how data is transferred between memory channels 62 13 MEMORY FEATURES STORING FREQUENCY RANGES Memory channels 290 to 299 allow you to store frequency ranges for VFO tuning and Program Scan Program Scan is described in the next chapter To tune or scan frequencies within a specified range store the start and end frequencies for that range in advance 1 Press A B to select VFO A or VFO B 2 Select the desired start frequency 3 Press M IN to enter Memory Scroll mode To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the storage process press CLR 4 Turn the MULTI CH control or press Mic UP DWN to select a memory channel in the range of 290 to 299 You can also select a channel by entering a 3 digit number such as 290 using the numeric keys 5 Press M IN to store the start frequency in the memory channel CLOSE INPUT appears on the sub dot matrix display 6 Turn the Tuning control or the MULTI CH control to select the end frequency 7 Press M IN to store the end frequency in the memory channel The previous data stored in the channel is overwritten I Con
126. o t tc e n n o C g nitt e s lo rt n o c F A N I A M e h t m o rf t n e d n e p e d ni sile v elt u p t u o F A e ula v C 0 5 o N u n e M e h t g nits ujd a y b d e g n a h c e b n a c le v elt u p t u o F A k 0 1 x o r p p A e c n a d e p m it u p t u O 4 D N G d n u o r G 5 Q S M lo rt n o c h cle u q s r e vie c s n a rt nia M n oit a r e p o la tigid r o f nip lo rt n o c h cle u q s P C M r o C N T e h t o t tc e n n o C n e p o si h cle u q s r e vie c s n a rt e h t elih w g nitti m s n a rt m o rf C N T e h t st n e v e r P e c n a d e p m i w o L n e p o h cle u q S e c n a d e p m i h gi H d e s olc h cle u q S 6 C N n oitc e n n o c o N 7 Q S S lo rt n o c h cle u q s r e vie c e r b u S n oit a r e p o la tigid r o f nip lo rt n o c h cle u q s P C M r o C N T e h t o t tc e n n o C n e p o si h cle u q s r e vie c s n a rt e h t elih w g nitti m s n a rt m o rf C N T e h t st n e v e r P e c n a d e p m i w o L n e p o h cle u q S e c n a
127. of the amplifier and connect pin 4 of the connector to the control terminal of the amplifier 2 4 1 6 7 3 5 TS 2000 X TS B2000 AC LINE RF OUTPUT Linear amplifier Control relay R T GND REMOTE Connector Rear panel view REMOTE connector Pin No Function Speaker output Common terminal Standby when grounded the transceiver enters TX mode When connected with the common terminal the amplifier enters TX mode When connected with the common terminal the amplifier enters RX mode ALC input from amplifier Approx 12 V DC is output when in TX mode 10 mA max 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ANTENNA TUNER Use the ANT 1 and AT connectors to connect an external antenna tuner If you connect the external tuner to the ANT 2 connector the external tuner will not function Note While using an external antenna tuner with the TS 2000 X TS B2000 you cannot use the 6 m band to transmit Connect your 6 m band antenna to the ANT 2 connector TS 2000 X TS B2000 External antenna tuner The AT 300 external antenna tuner is a discontinued model It may no longer be available in your area 95 16 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT MCP AND TNC Use the ACC 2 connector to connect the input output lines from a Terminal Node Controller TNC for Packet operation a Multimode Communications Processor MCP for operation on Packet PacTOR AMTOR G TORTM PSK31 or FAX or from a Clover interface
128. or the enclosure damaged iv CONTENTS QUICK MENU 21 PROGRAMMING THE QUICK MENU 21 USING THE QUICK MENU 21 MENU CONFIGURATION 22 ALPHABETICAL FUNCTION LIST 26 CHAPTER 7 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS SSB TRANSMISSION 28 FM TRANSMISSION 28 AM TRANSMISSION 29 NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR FM 29 NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR AM 29 CW TRANSMISSION 30 AUTO ZERO BEAT 30 TX SIDETONE RX PITCH FREQUENCY 30 CHAPTER 8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS SPLIT FREQUENCY OPERATION 31 TF SET TRANSMIT FREQUENCY SET 31 FM REPEATER OPERATION 32 PROGRAMMING AN OFFSET 32 Selecting an Offset Direction 32 Selecting an Offset Frequency 32 TRANSMITTING A TONE 33 Activating the Tone Function 33 Selecting a Tone Frequency 33 Selecting Continuous or Burst 33 Transmitting a 1750 Hz Tone
129. p e h T yle r u c e s n e p o si e s u f elb a c r e w o P 1 2 3 4 ylp p u s r e w o p C D e h t N O h cti w S m rif n o C elb a c r e w o p e h t tc e p s n I tc e rr o c e r a s eitir alo p e vit a g e n k c al B e vitis o p d e R C D e h t o t s n oitc e n n o c e h t m rif n o C e r u c e s e r a ylp p u s r e w o p e s u f n w olb e h t f o e s u a c e h t r o f k o o L y n a g nitc e rr o c d n a g nitc e p s ni r e tf A e h t f o e s u f w e n a lla ts ni s m elb o r p g nit a r d eific e p s 2 2 2 2 e h t N O g nih cti w s r e tf A r e vie c s n a rt e h t r e w o p n oitc n u f t o n s e o d elp m a x e r o F ylla m r o n tc e rr o c ni r o stigid o n e h t n o r a e p p a stigid y alp sid 1 2 e dist u o si e g a tlo v t u p ni e h T V 8 3 1 C D 5 1 C D V 8 5 1 o t 7 1 1 s a h r o s s e c o r p o r ci m e h T d e n oitc n u fla m 1 2 o t 2 1 a e s u r o e g a tlo v t u p ni e h t tc e rr o C y r e tt a b V 6 1 R O S S E C O R P O R C I M w
130. p s n a r T O N L L A C 3 8 C 2 6 y c n e u q e rf e n o t II d n a m m o C y k S s e n o t S S C T C 8 3 z H 5 8 8 3 8 D 2 6 d e e p s n oit a cin u m m o c II d n a m m o C y k S s p b 0 0 6 9 0 0 2 1 0 0 2 1 s p b 3 8 E 2 6 e d o m II d n a m m o C y k S T N E I L C F F O D N A M M O C R E T R O P T F F O 3 8 ALPHABETICAL FUNCTION LIST 27 6 MENU SETUP n oitc n u F u n e M o N C N T t e k c a P r o fle v elt u p ni F A B 0 5 d e e p s n oit a cin u m m o c tr o p M O C 6 5 C N T la n r e tx E d e e p s r e fs n a rt a t a D F 0 5 C N T la n r e t n I d e e p s r e fs n a rt a t a D 7 4 d n a b g nis n e s D C D 8 4 t e k c a p r o fle v elt u p t u o F A d n a b nia M n oit a r e p o C 0 5 C N T la n r e tx E d n a b B U S N I A M E 0 5 C N T la n r e t n I d n a b B U S N I A M 6 4 e d o m n oit a cin u m m o c t e k c a P 5 5 h t di w d n a b r e tlif t e k c a P A 0 5 e n o t n oit a m rif n o c X R r e ts ul C t e k c a P B 9 4 e d o m e n u T r e ts ul C t e k c a
131. page 45 3 Tune to the frequency of the target DX Packet Cluster node on the sub receiver 4 Access Menu No 46 to confirm that SUB is selected 5 Press FUNC SET P C T to enter the Packet Cluster Tune P C T mode Each time new DX Packet Cluster data is received the DX station s callsign in Morse code sounds and the information is displayed on the sub receiver as shown below 6 If you are not using the Auto Tune function press SET P C T The main transceiver is tuned to the frequency of the reported DX station on the sub receiver Transmitting on the tuned frequency the transceiver exits the P C T mode Press FUNC SET P C T again to reactivate it if necessary 7 Press FUNC SET P C T to exit the P C T mode To access desired DX information in the P C T memory press QUICK MEMO MR then turn the MULTI CH control Press SET P C T to tune the main band to the selected station Press QUICK MEMO MR again to quit the DX information display The transceiver can be set to output a beep instead of a Morse code when new DX Packet Cluster data is received Access Menu No 49B and select OFF VOICE can also be set when you install the optional VS 3 page 91 Note N You cannot send DX information to a node using this function N The DX Packet Cluster data in memory is retained when the transceiver is turned OFF However the sub receiver s frequen
132. played back To play back the messages stored in the other channels in sequence press the corresponding channel keys during playback Up to three channels can be queued at the same time While playing back the messages you can also adjust the keyer speed by pressing KEY DELAY and turning the MULTI CH control To interrupt playback press CLR I Transmitting CW Messages Messages can be transmitted using Semi Break in Full Break in or manual TX RX switching 1 Press CW FSK REV to select CW mode CW appears 2 To use Semi Break in Full Break in press VOX LEVEL The VOX LED lights Otherwise press SEND 3 Press 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC or 3 CH3 REC to select the channel to be played back The message is played back and transmitted automatically To transmit the messages stored in the other channels in sequence press the corresponding channel keys during playback Up to three channels can be queued at the same time 44 9 COMMUNICATING AIDS While playing back the messages you can also adjust the keyer speed by pressing KEY DELAY and turning the MULTI CH control To interrupt transmission press CLR 4 If you pressed SEND in step 2 press SEND again to return to receive mode I Changing the Inter message Interval Time For the message playback repeat select Menu No 29A and set it ON You can also change the interval playback tim
133. r o c e r e b o t e g a s s e m e d o c e s r o M n i R A e g a s s e m t n e rr u c e h T ll u f si y r o m e m CALL CHANNEL A CALL channel is a frequency that is often used when looking for a station with which to make contact in FM mode Each frequency band HF 50 MHz 144 MHz 430 440 MHz and 1 2 GHz has one CALL channel The default CALL frequencies are shown below To recall the CALL channel 1 Press CALL C IN 2 Press CALL C IN again to return to the previous operating frequency To revise the default CALL channel frequency 1 Select a new CALL frequency and operating mode on the VFO 2 Press FUNC CALL C IN to copy the new frequency and mode to the CALL channel d n a B le n n a h C L L A C tlu afe D e d o M d n a y c n e u q e rf F H M F z H M 0 6 9 2 z H M 0 5 M F z H M 0 0 1 5 z H M 4 4 1 M F z H M 0 0 4 4 1 z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 z H M 0 0 0 3 4 1 z H M 0 0 0 4 4 2 M F z H G 2 1 M F z H M 0 0 0 4 2 1 1 All E types 2 K type DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS The brightness of the LCD display can be selected from OFF and 1 to 4 by accessing Menu No 00 1 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 00 2 Press to select OFF 1 2 3 or 4 3 Press MEN
134. receive 6 Press SPLIT 7 The VFO A frequency appears on the sub display If you want to use the VFO B frequency to transmit press SPLIT again 8 Press SEND or Mic PTT to transmit on the frequency shown on the sub display 9 Press SPLIT to exit the SPLIT operation If Split operation is still selected using VFO A or VFO B press SPLIT again to exit Split operation To use a memory channel for transmitting 1 Access Menu No 06A and select ON 2 Recall a memory channel by pressing VFO M 3 Turn the MULTI CH control to select a memory channel to transmit 4 Press VFO M to return to VFO mode 5 Press SPLIT The other VFO frequency appears on the sub display for transmission Normal SPLIT operation 6 Press SPLIT again The memory channel you selected in step 3 appears on the sub display for transmission 7 Press SEND or Mic PTT to transmit on the frequency in the memory channel 8 Press SPLIT to exit SPLIT operation 61 13 MEMORY FEATURES MEMORY TRANSFER I Memory VFO Transfer After retrieving frequencies and associated data from Memory Recall mode you can copy the data to the VFO This function is useful for example when the frequency you want to monitor is near the frequency stored in a memory channel 1 Recall the desired memory channel 2 Press Ms s s s sVFO MG SEL When a simplex channel is recalled the data is copied to VFO A or VFO
135. representing white and black portions of the image Because fax requires longer transmission time you should use it only when band conditions are stable with strong signals Popular fax frequencies include the following 7245 14245 21345 International Net and 28945 kHz Operating on SSTV or fax mainly involves learning the functionality of your computer application or accessory hardware that supports these modes Consult the instruction manual that comes with your software or accessory equipment Note When operating either SSTV or fax use a fast AGC setting and switch OFF your Speech Processor for best results 53 11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS DX PACKET CLUSTER TUNE DX Packet Cluster is a packet network which consist of nodes and stations who are interested in DXing and contesting If one station finds a DX station on the air he or she sends a notice to his or her node This node then passes the information to all its local stations as well as another node This transceiver can display received DX information and hold the latest information on up to 10 DX stations This transceiver is also capable of automatically tuning in a reported DX station In order to use the Auto Tune function access Menu No 49A and select AUTO the default is MANUAL 1 Press A B to select VFO A or VFO B 2 Press the SUB AF control to activate the sub receiver if it is switched OFF The orange SUB LED lights
136. rf n w o d w ol S n a c s 0 0 4 0 0 3 0 0 2 0 0 1 z H 0 0 5 z H 0 0 3 7 6 9 0 dlo h n a c s m a r g o r P F F O N O F F O 8 6 0 1 d o h t e m e m u s e r n a c S O T d e t a r e p O e m i T O C d e t a r e p O r eirr a C O T 8 6 1 1 e g n a r n a c s la u si V 1 8 1 1 9 1 6 1 3 sle n n a h c 1 6 sle n n a h c 0 7 r o tin o M d n u o S 2 1 le v el t u p t u o p e e B m u m ix a m 9 m u m ini m 1 F F O 9 o t 1 F F O 4 4 7 3 1 e m ulo v e n o t e dis X T m u m ix a m 9 m u m ini m 1 F F O 9 o t 1 F F O 5 4 4 4 1 e m ulo v k c a b y alp A 3 U R D m u m ix a m 9 m u m ini m 1 F F O 9 o t 1 F F O 4 9 8 5 1 e m ulo v k c a b y alp 3 S V m u m ix a m 9 m u m ini m 1 F F O 9 o t 1 F F O 4 1 9 r e k a e p S t u p t u O 6 1 r o 2 P S T X E r o f n oit a r u gif n o c t u p t u o oid u A e n o h p d a e h 2 1 0 0 8 7 0 xi M b u S nia M L 1 P S xi M b u S nia M R 2 P S 1 nia M L 1 P S b u S R 2
137. s u n u 0 o t t e s e r a stib e s e h T t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F D r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F D 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 124 21 APPENDIX R F M O C L L A C r o H C M O F V r e vie c e r e h t s d a e r r o stc ele S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P A O F V 0 B O F V 1 H C M 2 L L A C 3 d n a b lo rt n o C L R T C t n e rr u c e h t o t d eilp p a si d n a m m o c e h T t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F R 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F R r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F R 1 P S F s u t a ts n oitc n u f E N I F e h t s d a e r r o stc ele S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O n oitc n u f E N I F 0 N O n oitc n u f E N I F 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F S 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F S r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 F S 1 P T F M O C L L A C r o H C M O F V s r e tti m s n a rt e h t s d a e r r o stc ele S s r e t e m a r a
138. signals You cannot transmit the signals though this connector t Either or appears depending on whether the Antenna 1 connector or the Antenna 2 connector is selected for the HF 50 MHz band page 72 y MHz Appears when the MHz Up Down mode using the MULTI CH control is switched ON page 37 u ALT Appears when ALT Auto Lock Tuning is activated for the 1 2 GHz FM band page 72 i Appears while Memory Recall or Memory Scroll is being used page 59 o Shows the memory channel number for the main transceiver If you select a channel over 99 a leading digit 1 or 2 appears the memory number ranges from 00 to 299 It also shows the Quick Memory number location the Quick Memory number ranges from 0_ to 9_ 0 AUTO Appears when Auto mode selection is activated page 73 1 Appears when the main transceiver is selected for the transmission band 2 Appears when the main transceiver s functions can be controlled using the front panel keys 3 ATT Appears when the main transceiver s receiver attenuator approx 12 dB is ON pages 57 73 4 TNC Appears when the internal TNC is assigned to the main transceiver page 49 5 PRE Appears when the receiver pre amplifier of the main transceiver is ON page 57 6 or appears indicating which offset direction is selected for the main transceiver appears when the
139. t B U S s s e r P u n e m b u s e h t A 9 4 e d o m e n u T r e ts ul C t e k c a P O T U A L A U N A M L A U N A M 3 5 B 9 4 e n o t n oit a m rif n o c X R r e ts ul C t e k c a P E C I O V E S R O M F F O E S R O M 3 5 0 5 n oit a r u gif n o c t e k c a P s s e c c a o t B U S s s e r P u n e m b u s e h t A 0 5 h t di w d n a b r e tlif t e k c a P N O F F O F F O 0 5 B 0 5 t e k c a P r o fle v elt u p ni F A 1 f o s p e ts ni 9 o t 0 4 0 5 C 0 5 n oit a r e p o t e k c a p r o fle v elt u p t u o F A d n a b N I A M 1 f o s p e ts ni 9 o t 0 4 0 5 D 0 5 n oit a r e p o t e k c a p r o fle v elt u p t u o F A d n a b B U S 1 f o s p e ts ni 9 o t 0 4 0 5 E 0 5 C N T la n r e tx E d n a b B U S N I A M B U S N I A M N I A M 0 5 F 0 5 C N T la n r e tx E d e e p s r e fs n a rt a t a D s p b 0 0 6 9 0 0 2 1 s p b 0 0 2 1 0 5 25 6 MENU SETUP p u o r G u n e M o N n oitc n u F s n oitc ele S tlu afe D fe R e g a P s y e k F P 1 5 t n e m n gis
140. t e k c a P F F O R O M E S E C I O V A 0 5 h t di w d n a b r e tlif t e k c a P F F O N O B 0 5 t e k c a P r o fle v elt u p ni F A 0 1 C 0 5 r o fle v elt u p t u o F A d n a b N I A M n oit a r e p o t e k c a p 0 1 D 0 5 t e k c a p r o fle v elt u p t u o F A d n a b B U S n oit a r e p o 0 1 E 0 5 C N T la n r e tx E d n a b B U S N I A M N I A M B U S F 0 5 C N T la n r e tx E d e e p s r e fs n a rt a t a D 0 0 2 1 0 0 6 9 A 1 5 y e k F P le n a p t n o r F tigid 2 9 9 0 0 I N O M P S D 6 6 I N O M X R 5 6 2 E C I O V 4 6 1 E C I O V 3 6 o N u n e M 2 6 0 M O F V 2 7 B A 1 7 T E S F T 0 7 T I L P S 9 6 N I M O M E M K C I U Q 8 6 R M O M E M K C I U Q 7 6 3 H C 0 8 2 H C 9 7 1 H C 8 7 E N U T W C 7 7 N I M 6 7 O F V gt M 5 7 N A C S 4 7 B A 3 7 C B 9 8 R N 8 8 B N 7 8 2 1 T N A 6 8 z H M 1 5 8 L R T C 4 8 L L A C 3 8 R L C 2 8 E N I F 1
141. the RC 2000 However when turning the transceiver on the volume settings of the RC 2000 have priority RADIO FREQUENCY RF GAIN Set the MAIN RF GAIN control fully clockwise You may turn it counterclockwise slightly when you have trouble hearing the desired signal because of excessive atmospheric noise or interference from other stations First take note of the peak S meter reading of the desired signal Then turn the MAIN RF GAIN control counterclockwise until the S meter reads the peak value that you noted Signals that are weaker than this level will be attenuated and reception of the station will become easier MANUAL RF BC MAIN GAIN CALL C IN UTO SB SB SUB SEL 1MHz CTRL MR M VFO MG SEL M IN M IN QUICK MEMO SATL A B M S REV TRACE MAIN MANUAL RF AF SQL SUB CH MULTI BC MAIN GAIN VFO CH VFO M A B SPLIT MENU TF SET MAIN SUB SG SEL SCAN RIT CW TUNE 9 6k STA RIT SUB CON XIT ALT SET CLEAR P C T _ HF VHE UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS 2000 Depending on the type and gain of your antenna and the condition of the band you may also prefer leaving the MAIN RF GAIN control turned counterclockwise by the same amount rather than turning it fully clockwise When using FM mode always set the MAIN RF GAIN control fully clockwise SELECTING VFO A OR VFO B 2 VFOs are available for controlling the frequency on the main t
142. the S meter Squelch threshold level When you turn SQL control the indicators on the S meter move accordingly 4 Press MENU to store the settings and exit Menu mode Note The squelch threshold level of the S meter squelch is around the 9 o clock position for FM both MAIN and SUB SQL the 11 o clock position for other modes MAIN SQL and the 9 o clock position for AM SUB SQL regardless of the SQL controls position SQUELCH HANG TIME You can adjust the squelch hang time to continuously monitor unstable signals When the signal is temporarily weaker than the S meter Squelch threshold level the squelch does not mute the signal for a short period of time In this way you can continuously monitor the unstable signal 1 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 19B 2 Press to select OFF 125 ms 250 ms or 500 ms 3 Press MENU to store the settings and exit Menu mode TIME OUT TIMER The Time out Timer limits the time of each transmission It is also useful to prevent a long accidental transmission 1 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 24 2 Press to select OFF 3 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 20 minutes or 30 minutes 3 Press MENU to store the settings and exit Menu mode RX DSP EQUALIZER EQUALIZING RECEIVING AUDIO SSB FM AM Use Menu No 20 to change the receiver frequency responses of the target signal Y
143. the Tuning control If you want to revert to the original center frequency press FM AM NAR 5 To quit Visual Scan press CLR or SCAN SG SEL I Changing the Number of Channels to Scan 1 Press MENU to enter Menu mode 2 Turn the MULTI CH control to select Menu No 11 3 Press to select 31 61 default 91 or 181 channels for the number of channels to scan 4 Press MENU to exit Menu mode Note N The current frequency step of the MULTI CH control is used for the Visual Scan N While performing the Visual Scan the DUAL WATCH function page 47 is temporarily disabled unless you are using the 144 MHz or 430 440 MHz in FM or AM mode and the Control Band for the main transceiver N If you start the Visual Scan from the frequency on the sub receiver the frequency is transferred to the main display then the Visual Scan starts N If you start the Visual Scan in Memory Recall mode the memory channel frequencies will be scanned N Visual Scan stops when you transmit N Depending on the transceiver conditions Visual Scan and the S meter level may differ I Using Visual Scan Memory Channel 1 Press MENU to enter Menu mode 2 Turn the MULTI CH control to select Menu No 11 3 Press to select 31 61 default 91 or 181 channels for the number of channels to scan 4 Press VFO M to enter Memory Recall mode 5 Press and hold DISP for approximately 1
144. the squelch level at which background noise is just eliminated The SUB band LED turns off when the squelch is ON SELECTING A FREQUENCY When you operate both the main transceiver and the sub receiver at the same time you will be in one of the following conditions First check where the and icons are on the display then follow the instructions below The and icons are both on the MAIN band display Turn the RIT SUB control to adjust the sub receiver frequency is on the SUB band display and is on the MAIN band display Turn the RIT SUB control to adjust the sub receiver frequency is on the MAIN band display and is on the SUB band display Turn the RIT SUB control the MULTI CH control or the Tuning control to adjust the frequency Or directly enter the frequency using the numeric keypad page 37 However the input frequency must be within the sub receiver frequency range The frequency you selected may round up to the nearest workable frequency step size page 37 You cannot transmit on the sub band frequency 47 10 SUB RECEIVER ATTENUATOR The attenuator reduces the level of received signals It is useful when there is strong interference from an adjacent frequency Since the main transceiver and sub receiver share the same antenna for the 144 MHz and 430 440 MHz bands activating the attenuator function for the sub recei
145. them together You can even repeatedly send a longer linked message by using the Repeat function To switch this function ON access Menu No 29A and select ON Default is OFF Then select the repeat interval time in Menu No 29B Default is 10 seconds Note N Pressing POWER cancels playback in progress N The settings in Menu Nos 29A and No 29B are shared with CW Message Playback described in CW MESSAGE MEMORY page 43 I Checking Messages 1 Select SSB FM or AM Use the same mode for transmitting and receiving 2 If VOX is ON press VOX LEVEL to switch the function OFF 3 Press 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC or 3 CH3 REC depending on which channel you want to check For example s PLAY BACK and AP 1 appear while playing back the message in channel 1 To interrupt playback press CLR 4 To play back another message in sequence press the corresponding key 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC or 3 CH3 REC while the first message is being played Up to three channels can be queued 90 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES I Sending Messages 1 Select SSB FM or AM Use the same mode for transmitting and receiving 2 Press VOX LEVEL to switch VOX ON or OFF If you switched VOX ON skip step 3 3 Press SEND or press and hold Mic PTT 4 Press 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC or 3 CH3 REC depending on which channel you want to us
146. to SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY page 37 SUB RECEIVER PANEL METER The multifunction meter measures the parameters described in the table below The S meter appears when in receive mode and the PWR meter appears when in transmit mode Peak readings for the S meter and PWR functions are held momentarily ela c S y alp si D etat S n oitc n u F S h t g n e rts la n gis d e vie c e R e vie c e R R W P r e w o p t u p t u o ti m s n a r T ti m s n a r T Note Peak Hold readings cannot be deactivated SELECTING A MODE FOR THE SUB RECEIVER First confirm that the icon is on the SUB band display If it is not press SUB or CTRL to assign the function controls to the SUB band The SUB band can only be used to transmit in FM mode and receive in FM or AM mode Press FM AM NAR to toggle the operating mode for the sub receiver The narrow bandwidth operation for AM is not available for the SUB band frequency Refer to NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR FM page 29 for FM operation FM CTCSS OPERATION You can assign an independent CTCSS tone to the sub receiver Refer to FM CTCSS OPERATION page 35 for function and control details FM DCS OPERATION You can assign an independent DCS code to the sub receiver Refer to FM DCS OPERATION page 36 for function and control details TONE FREQ ID SCAN This function scans through all the tone freque
147. tono del VFO normal VFO A o VFO B La funci n de b squeda de c digo frecuencia de tono no se puede utilizar en el modo Sat lite La codificaci n y decodificaci n se realiza con arreglo a los datos de la banda de frecuencia ascendente Especificaciones de TS 2000XE Para conocer el rango de frecuencias del transmisor p gina 105 y del receptor p gina 106 consulte el Tipo E en la columna del TS 2000 TS B2000 Otras especificaciones permanecen invariables Especificaciones del TS 2000E E2 TS B2000E E2 y TS 2000XE El rango de frecuencias de la banda de 7 MHz del transmisor p gina 105 se ha ampliado hasta 7 0 MHz 7 2 MHz Comandos AI Los transceptores TS 2000 TS B2000 no soportan los siguientes comandos Al antiguos AI 1 y AI 3 Puede haber incompatibilidades entre el transceptor y el software de registro de su PC no se producir n cambios cuando se utilicen estos comandos I A n ic a m r o f n I e d n ic n u f al e d o d a ts e le e el o a vitc a s e d a vitc A I A a cit m o t u A s o rt e m r a P 1 P o d a vitc a s e d l A 0 o d a vitc a ts e o did n e tx e I A o t a m r o fle e t n e m alo S 2 a v n e r o t p e c s n a rtle o did n e tx e I A o t a m r o fle a n oic c ele s e s o d n a u C e t n e m a cit
148. u f 9 1 7 5 5 5 2 7 7 5 e r a sla n gis o N e vie c e r r o d e vie c e r s m e e s ytivitis n e s si r e t e m S r o o p ela c s llu f g nid a e r w ol o o t t e s s a w lo rt n o c F R e h T e h t n r u T N I A G F R N I A M yllu flo rt n o c e si w k c olc 8 1 sla n gis d e vie c e R ylla t o t e r a elbigille t nin u s a w e d o m n oit alu d o m g n o r w e h T d e tc ele s s s e r P O T U A B S U B S L V E R K S F W C r o R A N M A M F o t e d o m n oit alu d o m tc e rr o c e h t tc ele s 9 1 lli w n a c S y r o m e M g nin n a c s tr a ts t o n 1 2 3 4 e h T L Q S t e s t o n s a w lo rt n o c yltc e rr o c sle n n a h c y r o m e m o w t n a h t s s e L d e k c oln u e r e w sle n n a h c y r o m e m o w t n a h t s s e L d e m m a r g o r p e r e w e h T L Q S t e s t o n s a w lo rt n o c yltc e rr o c 1 2 3 4 e h t ts ujd A L Q S ts uj o t slo rt n o c e sio n d n u o r g k c a b e t a ni m ile sle n n a h c y r o m e m o w t t
149. using the MULTI CH control 5 Press SUB to enter the desired memory name Use to select the characters Press MAIN or SUB to move the cursor left or right while entering the DTMF memory name You can also use the Mic DTMF keys to enter the characters Refer to the table on page 63 for the available characters and numbers 6 Press M IN to store the name into memory 7 Select the desired DTMF tone using then press SUB to move the cursor to the right to enter the next DTMF tone 8 Repeat step 7 until you enter all the desired DTMF tones You can enter a maximum of 16 DTMF tones for each DTMF Memory Channel 9 Press M IN to store the data into memory I Transmitting DTMF Memory Channel Data To send the DTMF Memory Channel data while you are transmitting 1 Press QUICK MEMO MR while you are transmitting 2 The DTMF Memory Channel number and the memory name appear on the main dot matrix display 3 Turn the MULTI CH control to select the DTMF Memory Channel you want to transmit 4 Press QUICK MEMO MR to transmit the DTMF tones The DTMF tones are monitored through the speaker while they are transmitted I DTMF Tone Time Length When transmitting a series of DTMF tones each tone duration is set to the 50 ms tone 50 ms mute format as default Some repeaters or auto patch controllers may require longer DTMF tones and mutes 1 Press MENU then turn the MULTI C
150. w s n A 2 P s r e b m u n d n a s r e tc a r a h c r e t n E e r a s r e tc a r a h c elb alia v A e c a p s _ Z Y X W V U T S R Q P O N M L K JI H G F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 r e t e m a r a p 2 P e h t r o f d e s u si h t g n el e ty b 4 2 d e xif e h T s r e tc a r a h c d e s u n u e h t r o f d e s u e b ts u m r e tc a r a h c e c a p s _ d e tr e v n o c t o n e b t o n lli w s r e tc a r a h c e c a p s e s e h T t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 K Y 1 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 0 3 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 K Y r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 K Y 1 P K L s u t a ts n oitc n u f k c ol y e k e h t s d a e r d n a st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P 0 0 0 2 B S T 0 0 0 2 S T F F O n oitc n u f k c o L 0 0 0 0 2 B S T 0 0 0 2 S T N O n oitc n u f K C O L
151. w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 L T 1 P C M le n n a h c y r o m e M e h t s d a e r r o slla c e R s r e t e m a r a P 1 P r e b m u n k n a b o N e c a p s _ r e b m u n k n a b y r o m e M 2 0 2 P r e b m u n le n n a h C 9 9 0 0 s a d e t a e rt e r a 9 9 o t 0 0 m o rf s r e b m u n le n n a h c y r o m e M 9 9 1 o t 0 0 1 m o rf s r e b m u n le n n a h c y r o m e M 0 k n a b y r o m e M s r e b m u n le n n a h c y r o m e M 1 k n a b y r o m e M s a d e t a e rt e r a 2 k n a b y r o m e M s a d e t a e rt e r a 9 9 2 o t 0 0 2 m o rf t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M C 1 P 2 P 2 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M C r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M C 1 P 2 P 2 P 127 21 APPENDIX D M s u t a ts e d o m g nit a r e p o e h t s d a e r r o slla c e R s r e t e m a r a P 1 P B S L 1 B S U 2 W C 3 M F 4 M A 5 K S F 6 R R C 7 d e v r e s e R 8 R K S F 9 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M D 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 M D
152. was selected prior to step 1 Note N RIT works only on the main transceiver N When storing the frequency in a Memory channel with RIT function ON RIT offset frequency is added or subtracted to from the VFO frequency Then the calculated data is stored in the Memory channel AGC AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL When using a mode other than FM AGC selects the time constant for the automatic gain control circuit Selecting a slow time constant will cause the receiver gain and S meter readings to react slowly to large input changes A fast time constant causes the receiver gain and the S meter to react quickly to changes in the input signal A fast AGC setting is particularly useful in the following situations Tuning rapidly Receiving weak signals Receiving high speed CW Unlike other transceivers the TS 2000 s digital AGC circuit allows you to adjust the time constant from slow to fast in 20 steps where 1 is the slowest and 20 is the fastest Furthermore you can switch the AGC OFF if you desire For your convenience the following default AGC time constant has already been programmed SSB Level 7 CW Level 12 FSK Level 14 AM Level 5 To change the default time constant 1 Press 8 AGC OFF The AGC time constant scale appears on the sub dot matrix display 2 To select a slower time constant turn the MULTI CH control counterclockwise The bar indicator moves from F ast to S low To sel
153. y alp sid d n a a nile n n a h c h c a e f o h t g n e rts h p a r g r a b Visual Scan graphically shows how frequencies in a specific range are busy Note N While using CTCSS or DCS Scan stops only for the signals that contain the same CTCSS tone or DCS code that you selected N When using S meter Squelch Scan stops when the received signal strength matches or exceeds the S meter setting Scan resumes 2 seconds after the signal level drops below the S meter setting N Pressing and holding Mic PTT causes Scan to stop if it is functioning on a non TX band Pressing Mic PTT on the scanning band causes Scan to stop N Starting Scan switches OFF the Automatic Simplex Checker NORMAL SCAN When you are operating the transceiver in VFO mode 2 types of scanning are available VFO Scan The transceiver scans the entire band of the frequency you selected For example if you are operating and receiving on the main transceiver s VFO A at 14 195 00 MHz it scans all the frequencies in the range of 30 00 kHz to 60 00000 MHz Refer to VFO frequency range in the Specifications Program Scan By programming the start and end frequency in Memory channels 290 299 page 62 you can limit the scanning frequency range Since there are 10 memory channels 290 299 available for specifying the start and end frequency you can select one or more a maximum of 10 ranges to scan T
154. y c n e u q e rf S S C T C e d o c S C D a e d o c S C D S C D S S C T C e n o T F F O N O a S C D S S C T C e n o T F F O N O e m a N y r o m e M a e m a N y r o m e M le n n a h C y r o m e M F F O N O t u o k c o L a le n n a h C y r o m e M F F O t u o k c o L 9 9 2 0 9 2 le n n a h C a 9 8 2 0 0 le n n a h C y c n e u q e rf X R X T a y c n e u q e rf X R a y c n e u q e rf X T X R X T r o f e d o M a X R r o f e d o M a X T r o f e d o M y c n e u q e rf t e sff O a y c n e u q e rf t e sff O n oitc e rid tfih S a n oitc e rid tfih S F F O N O e s r e v e R a F F O N O e s r e v e R y c n e u q e rf X R X T x elp m is p e ts a p e ts y c n e u q e rf X R a p e ts y c n e u q e rf X T y c n e u q e rf e n o T a y c n e u q e rf e n o T y c n e u q e rf S S C T C a y c n e u q e rf S S C T C e d o c S C D a e d o c S C D S C D S S C T C e n o T F F O N O a S C D S S C T C e n o T F F O N O e m a N y r o m e M a e m a N y r o m e M le
155. you from accidentally activating a function or changing the current settings Press FUNC ATT F LOCK to toggle Frequency Lock ON or OFF appears when this function is ON The following keys and controls are disabled by Frequency Lock g n i n u T g n i n u T g n i n u T g n i n u T g n i n u T lo rt n o c H C I T L U M H C I T L U M H C I T L U M H C I T L U M H C I T L U M lo rt n o c B A B A L L A C R L C K S F W C P S I D T N E M A M F O T U A B S U B S L N I M Ms O F V O M E M K C I U Q N I M O M E M K C I U Q R M L T A S L E S G S N A C S T I L P S N W O D P U M O F V L E S z H M 1 C E R 1 H C 1 C E R 2 H C 2 C E R 3 H C 3 P E T S E N I F 9 Note N After activating Frequency Lock the MULTI CH control and are still available in Menu mode N After activating Frequency Lock you can still change the transmit frequency with the Tuning control while in TF SET mode N After activating Frequency Lock the MULTI CH control is still available for selections other than frequency and memory channel changes N After activating Frequency Lock CLR may be available in some situations LOCK ALL FUNCTION The L
156. 0 0 4 0 1 0 0 4 3 9 0 0 0 0 3 8 0 0 0 8 2 7 0 0 0 6 2 6 0 z H M A 0 0 0 5 3 0 0 0 0 4 2 0 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 0 5 2 0 0 N O si A 0 5 o N u n e M r e tli F t e k c a P e h t n e h W K S P 3 0 0 6 1 2 2 0 0 3 9 1 1 0 z H 0 7 1 0 0 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S H 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S H r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S H 1 P 1 P I S e m a n y r o m e m e tille t a S e h t s r e t n E s r e t e m a r a P 1 P r e b m u n le n n a h C 9 0 2 P e m a n le n n a h c y r o m e m e tille t a S s r e tc a r a h c 8 f o m u m ix a m A t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S I 1 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 2 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 137 21 APPENDIX L S s g nitt e s r e tlif P S D e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P 1 1 0 0 z H M F B S S 0 0 5 6 0 0 0 4 5 0 0 0 3 4 0 0 0 2 3 0 0 0 1 2 0
157. 0 2 C R r o f e d o m y alp si D A G E N E V I T I S O P E V I T A 1 6 tc ele s e d o m r e t a e p e R F F O K C O L D E S S O R C B 1 6 dlo h X T r e t a e p e R F F O N O C 1 6 e d o c D Ilo rt n o c e t o m e R r e b m u n tigid 3 9 9 9 0 0 0 D 1 6 la n r e tx e nila n gis t n e m e g d el w o n k c A e d o m lo rt n o c e t o m e r F F O N O E 1 6 lo rt n o c e t o m e r la n r e tx E F F O N O A 2 6 y k S r o f n gislla c r e d n a m m o C II d n a m m o C 3 8 e g a p e e S s r e tc a r a h c 9 f o m u m ix a m A B 2 6 y k S r o f n gislla c r e tr o p s n a r T II d n a m m o C 3 8 e g a p e e S s r e tc a r a h c 9 f o m u m ix a m A C 2 6 y c n e u q e rf e n o t II d n a m m o C y k S r e b m u n e n o t e h t r o f 5 3 e g a p e e S D 2 6 n oit a cin u m m o c II d n a m m o C y k S d e e p s 0 0 2 1 0 0 6 9 E 2 6 e d o m II d n a m m o C y k S F F O I L C T N E M O C D N A M R O P T R E T 123 21 APPENDIX A F y c n e u q e rf A O F V e h t st e
158. 000XE La gamma di frequenza della banda a 7 MHz del trasmettitore pagina 105 stata ampliata a 7 0 MHz 7 2 MHz NACHRAG Dieser Nachtrag enth lt Informationen die zum Zeitpunkt der Drucklegung der Bedienungsanleitung noch nicht verf gbar waren und oder Korrekturen f r fehlerhafte Informationen in der Bedienungsanleitung Sub Ton Funktionen Ton CTCSS DCS im Satellitenmodus FM Sub Ton Funktionen Ton CTCSS DCS k nnen im Satellitenmodus aktiviert werden der Tone An Aus Status kann in jedem Satellitenspeicherkanal festgehalten werden Obwohl der Tone An Aus Status in jedem Satellitenspeicherkanal festgehalten wird ist Sub Ton Frequenz Code Speicherung wegen begrenzter Speicherkapazit t nicht m glich Stattdessen wird die Ton Frequenz Code Konfiguration vom normalen VFO VFO A oder VFO B verwendet Die Ton Frequenz Code Suchfunktion kann im Satellitenmodus nicht eingesetzt werden Codierung und Decodierung erfolgen gem Daten vom Uplink Frequenzband Technische Daten des TS 2000XE Zum Frequenzbereich des Senders Seite 105 und des Empf ngers Seite 106 siehe E Typ in der Spalte TS 2000 TS B2000 Die brigen technischen Daten bleiben unver ndert Technische Daten des TS 2000E E2 TS B2000E E2 und TS 2000XE Der Frequenzbereich des Senders Seite 105 im 7 MHz Frequenzband wurde auf 7 0 MHz 7 2 MHz erweitert TOEVOEGSEL Deze bijlage bevat informatie die niet beschikbaar was te
159. 3 P 4 P 5 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 5 P 5 P 5 P 5 P 5 P 5 P 5 P 5 P 5 P 5 P 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 0 3 5 P 5 P 5 P 5 P 5 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 E X 1 P 1 P 1 P 2 P 2 P 3 P 4 P r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 E X 1 P 1 P 1 P 2 P 2 P 3 P 4 P 5 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 5 P 5 P 5 P 5 P 5 P 5 P 5 P 5 P 5 P 5 P 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 0 3 5 P 5 P 5 P 5 P 5 P 120 21 APPENDIX u n e M o N n oitc n u F 5 P r ete m a r a p d n a m m o c X E 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 r e v O 0 0 s s e n t h gir b y alp si D F F O 1 2 3 4 1 0 n oit a ni m ulli y e K F F O N O 2 0 n oit ulo v e r r e p e g n a h c lo rt n o c g nin u T 0 0 5 0 0 0 1 3 0 e h t h ti w g nin u T H C I T L U M lo rt n o c F F O N O 4 0 s eic n e u q e rf O F V ff o s d n u o R e h t g nis u y b d e g n a h c H C I T L U M lo rt n o c F F O N O 5 0 e h t r o f e zis p e ts y c n e u q e rf z H k 9 H C I T L U M n o e d o m M A nilo rt n o c d n a b ts a
160. 3 e d o m y e k g u B 5 3 oit a r t h gie w h s a d t o d g niy e k W C 3 3 e m it e sir W C 2 3 y c n e u q e rf e n o t e dis X T h ctip X R W C 1 3 o t B S S g nig n a h c r o f n oitc e rr o c y c n e u q e r F W C 7 3 k c a b y alp r e v o ytir oir p g niy e K 0 3 oit a r t h gie w o t u a g niy e k W C e s r e v e R 4 3 R E F S N A R T A T A D tilp S d e rr e fs n a rt e h t e tir w o t ti m r e P s O F V t e g r a t e h t o t s eic n e u q e rf 3 5 e v als r e ts a m ni r e fs n a rt y c n e u q e rf tilp S n oit a r e p o 2 5 p u o r G u n e M o N n oitc n u F s n oitc ele S tlu afe D fe R e g a P y k S II d n a m m o C yln O e p yt K 2 6 n oit a r u gif n o c II d n a m m o C y k S s s e c c a o t B U S s s e r P u n e m b u s e h t A 2 6 II d n a m m o C y k S r o f n gislla c r e d n a m m o C e h t r o f n gislla c a t u p n I r e d n a m m o C O N L L A C 3 8 B 2 6 II d n a m m o C y k S r o f n gislla c r e tr o p s n a r T e h t r o f n gislla c a t u p n I r e tr o
161. 4 1 e p yt K z H M 2 1 5 0 2 2 e p yt E z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 e t aid e m r e t n I F I y c n e u q e r F r e vie c s n a rt nia M F I ts 1 z H M 5 2 9 5 7 r o z H M 5 8 0 9 6 z H M 0 6 3 0 0 z H M 5 9 8 1 4 z H M 2 1 5 8 1 1 z H M 5 9 4 5 3 1 z H M 0 0 3 1 0 4 2 1 z H M 5 9 6 0 1 F I d n 2 z H k 5 5 4 F I d r 3 z H k 0 2 1 F I h t 4 r e vie c e r b u S z H M 5 2 5 8 5 F I ts 1 z H k 5 5 4 F I d n 2 107 20 SPECIFICATIONS r e vie c e R 0 0 0 2 S T 0 0 0 2 B S T X 0 0 0 2 S T ytivitis n e S K S F W C B S S B d 0 1 N S nia M 4 z H M 5 0 7 1 5 0 s s el r o V 2 0 z H M 5 4 2 5 0 7 1 s s el r o V 3 1 0 z H M 0 0 3 5 4 2 s s el r o V 3 1 0 z H M 0 4 5 0 0 5 s s el r o V 1 1 0 z H M 6 4 1 4 4 1 s e p yt E ll A s s el r o V 6 1 0 z H M 8 4 1 4 4 1 e p yt K s s el r o V 1 1 0 z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 s e p yt E ll A s s el r o V 1 1 0 z H M 0 5 4 0 3 4 e p
162. 48 56 38 40 43 53 46 35 51 39 41 47 54 52 44 36 37 50 5 Appears while in Satellite mode page 53 6 Appears while Memory Recall or Memory Scroll is being used for the sub receiver page 59 7 Shows the memory channel number for the sub receiver If you select a channel over 99 a leading digit 1 or 2 appears the memory number ranges from 00 to 299 8 Appears when the sub receiver is selected for the transmission band 9 Appears when the sub receiver s functions can be controlled using the front panel keys 0 ATT Appears when the sub receiver s receive attenuator approx 12 dB is ON pages 57 73 1 TNC Appears when the internal TNC is assigned to the sub receiver 2 XIT Appears when Transmit Incremental Tuning of the main transceiver is ON page 40 3 PRE Appears when the receiver pre amplifier of the sub receiver is ON page 57 4 or appears indicating which offset direction is selected for the sub receiver appears when the 7 6 MHz 430 MHz or 6 0 MHz 1 2 GHz offset is selected all E types only page 32 5 RIT Appears when Receive Incremental Tuning of the main transceiver is ON page 38 6 DCS Appears when the DCS Digital Code Squelch of the sub receiver is ON page 36 7 R R appears when the Reverse function of the sub receiver is ON R appears when the ASC Automat
163. 5 1 8 2 0 5 0 8 2 Note You may adjust the carrier level when necessary Press FUNC MIC CAR to enter the adjustment mode With a key down condition turn the MULTI CH control so that the ALC meter reads in the ALC zone but does not exceed the upper ALC zone limit 52 11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS AMTOR PacTOR CLOVER G TOR PSK31 Besides Packet and RTTY digital modes which have been used among hams include AMTOR PacTOR CLOVER G TOR and PSK31 This manual does not describe much about these modes For details consult reference books about Amateur Radio AMTOR AMateur Teleprinting Over Radio has brought amateur HF digital communication into the computer age It is the first error free HF digital mode by which data bursts not steady stream of data are transmitted PacTOR Packet Teleprinting On Radio has combined the best features of both AMTOR and Packet to improve the efficiency of HF digital communications Like Packet and AMTOR PacTOR sends error free data using a handshaking method Of all the Amateur Radio HF digital modes CLOVER offers the best overall performance using a complicated modulation technique automatic power adjustment and other advanced features It may allow communications to be maintained under the worst conditions G TOR Golay coded Teleprinting Over Radio is a relatively new Amateur Radio digital mode currently in use G TOR was developed specifically to handle the advers
164. 5 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES If the tuning was successful AT stops blinking and the MAIN band red LED turns off If tuning does not finish within approximately 20 seconds an alarm 5 in Morse code sounds Press AT ANT1 2 to stop the alarm and tuning If you access Menu No 27 and select ON received signals will also pass through the internal tuner When this function is ON appears This may reduce interference on the receive frequency Note N The internal tuner will not tune outside the available transmission frequency limits N Pressing AT ANT1 2 for more than one second while transmitting interrupts transmitting and starts tuning N If you would like to use a separate receiving antenna access Menu No 18 and switch it ON When this function is ON received signals bypass the internal antenna tuner N While using CW Full Break in the internal tuner will be in line for both transmitting and receiving N Tuning automatically turns OFF in approximately 60 seconds AT disappears and the error beeps stop N Tuning may still continue when the SWR meter indicates 1 1 This happens due to the tuning algorithm this is not a malfunction N Even though the SWR meter shows more than one segment the internal tuner may not retune This happens because of an SWR calculation algorithm tolerance between 10 W approx transmit power for tuning and 100 W transmit power N If tuning d
165. 7 6 MHz 430 MHz or 6 0 MHz 1 2 GHz offset is selected all E types only page 32 15 4 GETTING ACQUAINTED FILTE R S 1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60dB PW R 10 25 50 100 W AL C 33 31 32 34 21 17 19 23 25 28 27 26 29 30 22 18 24 20 7 DCS Appears when the DCS Digital Code Squelch of the main transceiver is ON page 36 8 R R appears when the Reverse function of the main transceiver is ON R appears when the ASC Automatic Simplex Check of the main transceiver is activated page 34 9 C T T appears when the Tone function of the main transceiver is ON page 33 C T appears when the Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System CTCSS of the main transceiver is ON page 35 0 AGC Appears when the AGC Automatic Gain Control of the main transceiver is ON page 38 Disappears when the AGC is OFF 1 M B C B C appears when the automatic Beat Canceller is ON M B C appears when the single Beat Cancel frequency is manually controlled page 56 2 NB Appears when the Noise Blanker is ON page 57 3 FINE Appears when the Fine function for the main Tuning control is ON page 38 4 A NOTCH Appears when the DSP Auto Notch function of the main transceiver is ON page 56 5 or appears depending on whether DSP Noise Reduction 1 Line Enhanced method or Noise Reduction 2 SP
166. A W A 8 8 7 ts o h sti d n a C N T n e e w t e b stib f o h t g n el e h t st e S N O C A E B B 0 Y R E V E Y R E V E n R E T F A 0 n 0 5 2 e h t f o sla v r e t nit a t e k c a p n o c a e b a s d n e s Y R E V E o t t e s fI n o c a e b a s d n e s R E T F A o t t e s fI n d oir e p d eific e p s f o tin u e h T n d oir e p d eific e p s e h t r e tf a e c n o yln o t e k c a p s d n o c e s 0 1 si n T X E T B T B 9 5 1 0 s r e tc a r a h c n o c a e b a f o n oitr o p a t a d e h t f o t n e t n o c e h t s eific e p S t e k c a p A R B I L A C L A C o t Q r e t n E oit a r 0 5 0 5 e v a w e r a u q s k r a m e c a p s a s d n e S e d o m d n a m m o C e h t e r o ts e r d n a e d o m e t a r bila C tix e K C E H C H C 0 3 0 5 2 0 f o n oit u c e x e lit n u t u o p o r d la n gis m o rfla v r e t ni e h t s eific e p S s d n o c e s 0 1 si r e t e m a r a p e h t f o tin u e h T n oitc e n n o c sid T C E N N O C C A I V 1lla C 3lla c
167. AC method of the main transceiver is selected page 56 6 appears when the TX Equalizer function is ON appears when the RX Equalizer function of the main transceiver is ON pages 41 78 7 Appears when the Quick Menu function of the transceiver is ON page 21 It also appears when the frequency point of Program Scan Partially Slowed is selected on the main transceiver page 67 8 appears when the Trace function is ON while in Satellite mode appears when the Reverse Trace function is ON page 53 9 P C T Appears when Packet Cluster Tune mode is ON page 53 0 SPLIT Appears when the transmit frequency differs from the receive frequency page 31 1 tA s tA or As appears while VFO A is selected page 18 A appears while Menu A is being accessed page 21 2 tB s tB or Bs appears while VFO B is selected page 18 B appears while Menu B is being accessed page 21 3 tM s tM or Ms appears while a simplex memory channel is selected page 59 tMs appears while a split frequency memory channel is selected page 60 4 appears when the Frequency Lock function is ON appears when the Lock All key function is ON page 77 16 4 GETTING ACQUAINTED FILTE R S 1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60dB PW R 10 25 50 100 W AL C 57 55 58 42 45 49
168. ANSMITTING 47 SELECTING A TRANSMIT POWER 47 MICROPHONE GAIN 47 FM REPEATER OPERATION 47 REVERSE FUNCTION 47 AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK ASC 48 TRANSMITTING A TONE 48 MEMORY 48 CHAPTER 11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS PACKET RADIO 49 BUILT IN TNC 49 PREPARATION 50 DCD SENSE 50 vi CONTENTS TNC 79 TRANSVERTER 79 TX MONITOR 79 TX POWER 79 QUICK DATA TRANSFER 80 SETTING UP 80 Equipment Needed 80 Connections 80 USING QUICK TRANSFER 80 Transferring Data 80 Rec
169. ASING MEMORY CHANNELS 62 MEMORY CHANNEL NAME 63 MEMORY GROUP 64 Memory Group Select 64 QUICK MEMORY 64 STORING INTO QUICK MEMORY 64 RECALLING QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS 65 TEMPORARY FREQUENCY CHANGES 65 QUICK MEMORY VFO TRANSFER 65 CW BREAK IN 42 USING SEMI BREAK IN OR FULL BREAK IN 42 ELECTRONIC KEYER 42 CHANGING KEYING SPEED 42 AUTO WEIGHTING 42 Reverse Keying Weight Ratio 42 BUG KEY FUNCTION 43 CW MESSAGE MEMORY 43 Storing CW Messages 43 Checking CW Messages without Transmitting 43 Transmitting CW Messages 43 Changing the Inter message Interval Time 44 Changing the Sidetone Volume 44 Inset Keying 44 FREQUENCY CORRECTION FOR CW 44 CW REVERSE RECEIVE 44 AUTO CW TX IN S
170. Also use the ACC 2 connector to connect SSTV and phone patch equipment 1 male ACC2 connector E07 1351 XX is supplied Connect the TNC or MCP to the ACC 2 connector using a cable equipped with a 13 pin DIN plug Connecting the TNC or MCP to a personal computer or dumb terminal requires an RS 232C cable Note Do not share a single power supply between the transceiver and the TNC or MCP Keep as wide a separation as possible between the transceiver and the computer to reduce noise pickup by the transceiver 13 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 o N ni P ni P e m a N n oitc n u F 1 O N A S r e vie c e r b u s e h t m o rf t u p t u o F A n oit a r e p o la tigid r o f nip a t a d e vie c e r P C M r o C N T e h t o t tc e n n o C g nitt e s lo rt n o c F A B U S m o rf t n e d n e p e d ni sile v elt u p t u o F A e ula v D 0 5 o N u n e M e h t g nits ujd a y b d e g n a h c e b n a c le v elt u p t u o F A k 0 1 x o r p p A e c n a d e p m it u p t u O 2 Y T T R t u p ni y e k Y T T R 3 O N A M r e vie c s n a rt nia m e h t m o rf t u p t u o F A n oit a r e p o la tigid r o f nip a t a d e vie c e r P C M r o C N T e h t
171. B depending on which VFO was used to recall the channel When a split channel is recalled the RX data is copied to VFO A and the TX data is copied to VFO B Note N The Memory Channel Lockout status and the subtone frequency are not copied N Pressing Ms s s s sVFO MG SEL after temporarily changing the retrieved data copies the new data to the VFO I Channel Channel Transfer You can also copy channel information from one memory channel to another This function is useful when storing frequencies and associated data that you temporarily change in Memory Recall mode 1 Recall the desired memory channel page 59 2 Press M IN to enter Memory Scroll mode To exit Memory Scroll mode press CLR 3 Select the memory channel where you would like the data copied using the MULTI CH control 4 Press M IN again 9 8 2 0 0 le n n a h C a 9 8 2 0 0 le n n a h C y c n e u q e rf X R a y c n e u q e rf X R y c n e u q e rf X T a y c n e u q e rf X T X R r o f e d o M a X R r o f e d o M X T r o f e d o M a X T r o f e d o M y c n e u q e rf t e sff O a y c n e u q e rf t e sff O n oitc e rid tfih S a n oitc e rid tfih S F F O N O e s r e v e R a F F O N O e s r e v e R p e ts y c n e u q e rf X R a p e ts
172. B 144 MHz band 142 152 MHz FM 430 440 MHz band 420 450 MHz FM 1 2 GHz band optional 1240 1300 MHz FM To add the frequency points to the Auto Mode selection 74 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES The next table is an example of adding 4 frequency points into memory With this setup the transceiver selects AM mode below 1 62 MHz CW mode from 1 62 MHz to 2 0 MHz LSB mode from 2 0 MHz to 9 5 MHz FM mode from 9 5 MHz to 53 0 MHz and USB mode from 53 0 MHz to 60 0 MHz If multiple data contains the same frequency but a different mode is entered into memory the lowest numbered memory channel is reflected as the Auto Mode o N le n n a h C ata D e d o m g nita r e p O 0 z H M 2 6 1 M A z H M 3 0 0 lt M A z H M 2 6 1 z H M 2 6 1 lt W C z H M 0 2 z H M 0 2 lt B S L z H M 5 9 z H M 5 9 lt M F z H M 0 3 5 z H M 0 3 5 B S U z H M 0 0 6 1 z H M 0 2 W C 2 z H M 0 7 B S L 3 z H M 5 9 B S L 8 2 z H M 0 3 5 M F To activate the AUTO MODE function press FUNC LSB USB AUTO BEEP FUNCTION The Beep function provides you confirmation of entry error status and malfunctions of the transceiver Although you can turn the beep function OFF by accessing Menu No 12 we recommend yo
173. C 1 P D B d n a b y c n e u q e rf e h t n w o d s e v o M s r e t e m a r a P e n o N t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 B D d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 117 21 APPENDIX P B s g nitt e s y c n e u q e rf r elle c n a C t a e B la u n a M e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P 3 6 0 0 0 0 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 B P 1 P 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 B P r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 B P 1 P 1 P 1 P U B d n a b y c n e u q e rf e h t p u s e v o M s r e t e m a r a P e n o N t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 B U d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 Y B s u t a ts la n gis y s u b e h t s d a e R s r e t e m a r a P 1 P r e vie c s n a rt nia M y s u b t o N 0 y s u B 1 2 P r e vie c e r b u S y s u B t o N 0 y s u B 1 1 P e h t yln o N O si n oitc n u f d n a m m o C y k S e h t n e h W d e s u si r e t e m a r a p t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 d a e R 1 2 3 4 5
174. C N U F F F O r e w o p r e tr o p s n a r T e h t h cti w S 88 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES These keys and controls are available on the Commander to control the Transporter Note N When the synconize operation is incomplete the main display of the Commander may disappear In this case press SUB to re syncronze N You cannot recall memory channels 100 to 299 using ENT and the numeric keys To recall memory channels 100 299 use N You can recall only the memory channels that have HF 50 MHz frequencies N Do not use VHF UHF frequencies that are suffering from the harmonics of HF 50 MHz transmissions N The frequency control operations such as the Tuning control and RIT XIT control are much slower than using direct controls because each control command in steps of 10 Hz is sent as packet data N When you change the frequency continuously using the Tuning control or the MULTI CH control the last entry of the Commander frequency is reflected on the HF 50 MHz transceiver N Since Sky Command II requires 2 VHF UHF frequencies check the operating frequencies carefully to avoid interference with other parties N When the transceiver exits the Sky Command II operation the internal TNC retains the data transfer speed in Menu No 47 If a different data transfer speed is required for packet operation reconfigure it to the desired value U
175. CK ASC ASC functions only when you have programmed an offset on the 29 50 144 430 440 MHz or 1 2 GHz Optional band While using a repeater ASC periodically monitors the strength of a signal that you receive directly from the other station If the station s signal is strong enough to allow direct contact without a repeater the ASC indicator on the display starts to blink Press and hold TF SET for approximately 1 second to switch the function ON The R indicator appears when the function is ON When direct contact is possible the R indicator blinks To quit the function press TF SET Note N Pressing Mic PTT causes the ASC indicator to stop blinking N ASC does not function if your transmit and receive frequencies are the same simplex operation N ASC does not function while scanning N Activating ASC while using Reverse switches Reverse OFF N If you recall a memory channel or the Call channel that has the Reverse status ON ASC is switched OFF N ASC causes received audio to be momentarily intermitted every 3 seconds TONE FREQ ID SCAN This function scans through all tone frequencies to identify the incoming tone frequency on a received signal You can use this function to find which tone frequency is required by your local repeater 1 Press FUNC 4 TONE SEL The current tone frequency appears 2 Press SCAN SG SEL to activate the Tone Freq
176. CP TNC SETUP TNC MCP TS 2000 TS 2000X TS 2000B PS 53 LINEAR AMPLIFIER 50 MHz VHF UHF and 1 2 GHz Connect an external 50 MHz VHF UHF 1 2 GHz power amplifier control cable to the EXT CONT connector 1 male EXT CONT connector E07 0851 XX is supplied The TX RX switching time can be configured independently for each band accessing Menu Nos 28B 28E Select 1 for 10 ms delay or 2 for 25 ms delay However when CW Full Break in is enabled 10 ms switching delay is applied automatically regardless of the settings You can also disable the EXT CONT control selecting OFF default Note The TX RX control method differs depending on external amplifier models Most amplifiers enter the TX mode when the control terminal is grounded For those amplifiers connect the metal cover of the EXT CONT connector to the GND terminal of the amplifier and connect pin 2 50 MHz pin 6 144 MHz pin 1 430 440 MHz or pin 4 1 2 GHz of the connector to the control terminal of the amplifier Personal computer Power supply for TNC MCP Power supply for TS 2000 X TS B2000 Red Black EXT CONT connector 97 INSTALLING OPTIONS You will require a Phillips screwdriver when installing the optional units REMOVING THE BOTTOM CASE When installing the optional DRU 3A or VS 3 unit remove the bottom case first 1 Remove the 10 screws 2 Lift off the bottom case DRU 3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT SWITCH OFF THE POWER AND U
177. CTCSS function ON or OFF C T appears when the function is ON 7 Press FUNC 6 CTCSS SEL The current CTCSS frequency appears The default CTCSS frequency is 88 5 Hz 8 Turn the MULTI CH control to select the appropriate CTCSS frequency The selectable CTCSS frequencies are listed in the following table 9 Press FUNC 6 CTCSS SEL to complete the setting o N q e r F z H o N q e r F z H o N q e r F z H o N q e r F z H 1 0 0 7 6 1 1 4 7 9 1 2 5 6 3 1 1 3 8 2 9 1 2 0 9 1 7 2 1 0 0 0 1 2 2 3 1 4 1 2 3 5 3 0 2 3 0 4 4 7 3 1 5 3 0 1 3 2 2 6 4 1 3 3 7 0 1 2 4 0 0 7 7 4 1 2 7 0 1 4 2 4 1 5 1 4 3 1 8 1 2 5 0 7 9 7 5 1 9 0 1 1 5 2 7 6 5 1 5 3 7 5 2 2 6 0 5 2 8 6 1 8 4 1 1 6 2 2 2 6 1 6 3 6 3 3 2 7 0 4 5 8 7 1 8 8 1 1 7 2 9 7 6 1 7 3 8 1 4 2 8 0 5 8 8 8 1 0 3 2 1 8 2 8 3 7 1 8 3 3 0 5 2 9 0 5 1 9 9 1 3 7 2 1 9 2 9 9 7 1 0 1 8 4 9 0 2 8 1 3 1 0 3 2 6 8 1 You will hear calls only when the selected tone is received To answer the call press SEND or press and hold Mic PTT then speak into the microphone Ski
178. CW that other operators can copy solidly Selecting a speed that is beyond your keying ability will only result in mistakes You will obtain the best results by selecting a speed that is close to the speed used by the other station 1 Press CW FSK REV to select CW mode CW appears 2 Press KEY DELAY The current keying speed appears The default is 20 WPM 3 While keying the paddle and listening to the transmit sidetone turn the MULTI CH control to select the appropriate speed The speeds range from 10 WPM to 60 WPM in steps of 1 The larger the number the faster the speed 4 Press KEY DELAY again to complete the setting Note When using the semi automatic Bug function the selected speed applies only to the rate that dots are sent AUTO WEIGHTING The electronic keyer can automatically change the dot dash weighting Weighting is the ratio of dash length to dot length The weighting changes with your keying speed thus making your keying easier for other operators to copy Use Menu No 33 to select AUTO or 2 5 4 0 in steps of 0 1 fix weight ratio The default is AUTO When the fix weight ratio is selected the dot dash weight ratio is locked regardless of the keying speed I Reverse Keying Weight Ratio Auto Weighting increases the weighting as you increase your keying speed However the electronic keyer also can decrease the weighting as you increase your keying spee
179. For diagrams on how to connect the two transceivers see CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT page 93 Note If you are using a DSP 100 unit with the transceiver turn on the transceiver first then turn on the DSP 100 USING QUICK TRANSFER When connecting with another TS 2000 X TS 570 or TS 870S use the same COM connector baud rate on each transceiver If transferring to or from other KENWOOD transceivers select 4800 bps and 2 stop bits On the TS 2000 X set the parameter in Menu No 56 to 4800 bps Note While transferring data other functions may work slower I Transferring Data The TS 2000 X transceiver works as the Master sending data to the Slave transceiver 1 Switch ON the Transfer function of each transceiver On the TS 2000 X access Menu No 52 and select ON For the compatible transceiver refer to the instruction manual that came with the transceiver 2 On the Master while in VFO mode select an operating frequency and mode 3 On the Master press QUICK MEMO M IN When using another TS 2000 X as the Slave PC appears on the Slave The displayed data is stored in Quick memory channel 0 on the Master and transferred to the Slave Note If the Master has RIT switched ON the offset frequency is added to the receive frequency to be transferred I Receiving Data The TS 2000 X transceiver works as the Slave receiving data from the Master transceiver The Slave can rec
180. H control to access Menu No 45B 2 Press to select SLOW 3 Press MENU to exit the Menu mode The DTMF tones will now be sent using the 100 ms tone 100 ms mute format DTMF Pause Period In the DTMF Memory you can enter blanks pauses among a series of DTMF tones The default pause period is set to 500 ms but you can change this value by accessing Menu No 45C 1 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 45C 2 Press to select the desired DTMF Pause period default is 500 ms 3 Press MENU to exit the Menu mode HF RX ANTENNA If you have a separate HF antenna below 30 MHz only for receiving connect the antenna coaxial cable to the HF RX ANT connector on the rear panel This connector is considered to be connected to a beverage antenna or directional loop antenna for low band operation To use the HF RX ANTENNA connector access Menu No 18 and select ON When the HF RX ANTENNA is selected for receiving appears on the display LINEAR AMPLIFIER CONTROL When you connect an external HF linear amplifier to the TS 2000 X transceiver using the REMOTE connector select 1 fast switching 10 ms delay or 2 slow switching 25 ms delay to activate the internal relay so you can interface with the HF linear amplifier page 94 Some linear amplifiers require a long transmission delay time because of the slow antenna relay switching time In this case se
181. Hz or 220 229 995 MHz is selected for the sub receiver the pre amplifier cannot be turned ON K type only 58 MEMORY FEATURES MEMORY CHANNELS The TS 2000 X provides you with 300 memory channels numbered 00 to 299 for storing operating frequency data modes and other information Memory channels 00 to 289 are called Conventional Memory Channels Memory channels 290 to 299 are designed for programming VFO tuning ranges and scan ranges The data you can store is listed below Conventional memory is used for storing data you will often recall For example you may store the frequency where you regularly meet your club members r ete m a r a P le n n a h C 9 8 2 0 0 le n n a h C 9 9 2 0 9 2 y c n e u q e rf X R s e Y s e Y 1 x elp m is y c n e u q e rf X T s e Y e d o m X R s e Y s e Y 1 x elp m is e d o m X T s e Y s eic n e u q e rf d n E tr a t S o N s e Y y c n e u q e rf t e sff O s e Y s e Y n oitc e rid tfih S s e Y s e Y e d o m e s r e v e R s e Y s e Y e zis p e ts y c n e u q e rf X R s e Y s e Y x elp m is e zis p e ts y c n e u q e rf X T s e Y y c n e u q e rf e n o T s e Y s e Y y c n e u q e rf S S C T C s e Y s e Y e d o c S C D s e Y s e Y
182. ING A MODE Press LSB USB AUTO CW FSK REV or FM AM NAR To select the second mode on each key press the same key again For example each press of LSB USB AUTO toggles between LSB and USB mode AUTO NAR REV LSB USB CW FSK FM AM PF F LOCK A 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC 3 CH3 REC 4 TONE SEL 5 METER 6 CTCSS SEL 7 NB LEVEL 8 AGC OFF 9 FINE STEP DCS SEL 0 SHIFT OFFSET ENT SEND PHONES MIC AT ANT1 2 PROC LEVEL VOX ATT PRE LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL MANUAL LO WIDTH HI SHIFT N R A N B C FUNC CLR MAIN AUTO CAR TX MONI DELAY NAR REV MIC PWR KEY LSB USB CW FSK FM AM DISP SEL 1MHz CTRL MEN M HF VHE UHF ALL MO Press FUNC LSB USB AUTO to toggle the Auto Mode selection When it is active AUTO appears If you change the frequency above or below 9 5 MHz the transceiver automatically switches modes LSB for frequencies under 9 5 MHz and USB for frequencies equal to or above 9 5 MHz HF 50 MHz band As for the 144 MHz 430 440 MHz and 1 2 GHz bands the transceiver automatically changes the operating mode to FM You can further add the frequency table data to change the mode automatically page 73 ADJUSTING SQUELCH The purpose of the Squelch is to mute the speaker when no signals are present With the squelch level correctly set you w
183. L 3 External Speakers EXT SP1 EXT SP2 3 Keys for CW PADDLE and KEY 3 CHAPTER 2 YOUR FIRST QSO HF 50MHz band RECEIVING 4 TRANSMITTING 5 CHAPTER 3 YOUR FIRST QSO VHF UHF band RECEIVING 6 TRANSMITTING 7 CHAPTER 4 GETTING ACQUAINTED FRONT PANEL 8 REAR PANEL 13 DISPLAY 14 MICROPHONE 17 CHAPTER 5 OPERATING BASICS SWITCHING POWER ON OFF 18 ADJUSTING VOLUME 18 AUDIO FREQUENCY AF GAIN 18 RADIO FREQUENCY RF GAIN 18 SELECTING VFO A OR VFO B 18 SELECTING A BAND 18 SELECTING A MODE 19 ADJUSTING SQUELCH 19 SELECTING A FREQUENCY 19 FRONT PANEL METER
184. M 0 0 3 0 8 2 s s el r o V 2 0 z H M 0 4 5 0 0 5 s s el r o V 1 0 z H M 6 4 1 4 4 1 s e p yt E ll A s s el r o V 6 1 0 z H M 8 4 1 4 4 1 e p yt K s s el r o V 1 0 z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 s e p yt E ll A s s el r o V 1 0 z H M 0 5 4 0 3 4 e p yt K s s el r o V 1 0 z H M 0 0 3 1 0 4 2 1 s e p ytll A s s el r o V M A b u S 1 1 z H M 6 4 1 4 4 1 s e p yt E ll A s s el r o V 1 1 z H M 8 4 1 4 4 1 e p yt K s s el r o V 1 1 z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 s e p yt E ll A s s el r o V 1 1 z H M 0 5 4 8 3 4 e p yt K s s el r o V M F 8 1 0 z H M 6 4 1 4 4 1 s e p yt E ll A s s el r o V 3 2 0 z H M 8 4 1 4 4 1 e p yt K s s el r o V 8 1 0 z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 s e p yt E ll A s s el r o V 8 1 0 z H M 0 5 4 8 3 4 e p yt K s s el r o V 8 t u p t u o oid u A n oitr o tsid 0 1 e r o m r o W 5 1 2 P S T X E d n a 1 P S T X E e c n a d e p
185. MIC CAR key turns off With LSB or USB selected skip this step i Turn the Tuning control to tune in a station If you do not hear any stations you may have the wrong antenna connector selected Press FUNC AT ANT1 2 to switch between the antenna 1 and 2 connectors 5 2 YOUR FIRST QSO HF 50 MHz band TRANSMITTING PF F LOCK A 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC 3 CH3 REC 4 TONE SEL 5 METER 6 CTCSS SEL 7 NB LEVEL 8 AGC OFF 9 FINE STEP DCS SEL 0 SHIFT OFFSET ENT SEND PHONES MIC AT ANT1 2 PROC LEVEL VOX ATT PRE LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL MANUAL LO WIDTH HI SHIFT N R A N B C FUNC CALL C IN CLR MAIN AUTO CAR TX MONI DELAY NAR REV MIC PWR KEY LSB USB CW FSK FM AM SUB DISP SEL 1MHz CTRL MR MG SEL M IN QUICK MEMO M S REV TRACE MAIN MANUAL RF AF SQL SUB CH MULTI BC MAIN GAIN VFO CH MENU TF SET MAIN SUB SG SEL SCAN M VFO M IN RIT CW TUNE 9 6k STA RIT SUB CON XIT ALT SET CLEAR P C T _ HF VHF UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS 2000 SATL A B VFO M SPLIT A B 4 9 7 1 8 5 3 2 q Turn the Tuning control to tune in a desired station or to select an unused frequency w Press AT ANT1 2 momentarily AT appears FILTE R S 1 3 5 7 9 20
186. N 1 P 1 P T C s u t a ts n oitc n u f S S C T C e h t s d a e r d n a st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O n oitc n u f S S C T C 0 N O n oitc n u f S S C T C 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 C T 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 C T r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 C T 1 P 119 21 APPENDIX C D s u t a ts d n a b X T e h t s d a e r d n a st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P r e vie c s n a rt nia m e h t o t d n a b X T st e S 0 N O r e vie c e r b u s e h t o t d n a b X T st e S 1 2 P r e vie c s n a rt nia m e h t o t d n a b L O R T N O C st e S 0 r e vie c e r b u s e h t o t d n a b L O R T N O C st e S 1 t e s si r e t e m a r a p e m a s e h t s e g n a h c r e t e m a r a p 1 P e h t n e h W 2 P o t t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 D C 1 P 2 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 D C r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 D C 1 P 2 P N D y e k N W D e n o h p o r ci m e h t s e t alu m E s r e t e m a r a P 1 P 9 9 0 0 s a d e t e r p r e t ni si d n a m m o
187. NOTCH FILTER SSB 56 BEAT CANCEL SSB AM 56 MANUAL BEAT CANCEL ALL MODES 56 NOISE REDUCTION 56 Setting the N R 1 Level Adjustment 56 Settign the N R 2 Time Constant 56 NOISE BLANKER 57 PRE AMPLIFIER 57 ATTENUATOR 57 CHAPTER 13 MEMORY FEATURES MEMORY CHANNELS 58 STORING DATA IN MEMORY 58 Simplex Channels 58 Split Frequency Channels 59 MEMORY RECALL AND SCROLL 59 Memory Recall 59 Memory Scroll 60 Temporary Frequency Changes 60 MEMORY VFO SPLIT OPERATION 60 MEMORY TRANSFER 61 Memory VFO Transfer 61 Channel Channel Transfer 61 STORING FREQUENCY RANGES 62 Confirming Start End Frequencies 62 Programmable VFO 62 Memory Channel Lockout 62 ER
188. NPLUG THE DC POWER CABLE BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION 1 Remove the bottom case 10 screws 2 Locate the DRU 3A connector 3 Peel off the paper on the cushion attached to the PC board of the transceiver 4 Plug the DRU 3A into the DRU 3A connector of the PC board 5 Press the top of the DRU 3A to affix it to the cushion DRU 3A 6 Replace the bottom case 10 screws Note After the installation you can adjust the DRU 3A playback volume by selecting Menu No 14 VS 3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER UNIT SWITCH OFF THE POWER AND UNPLUG THE DC POWER CABLE BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION 1 Remove the bottom case 10 screws 2 Locate the VS 3 jack 3 Hold the VS 3 unit with the component side facing up and insert the VS 3 connector into the VS 3 jack 4 Replace the bottom case 10 screws Note After the installation you can adjust the VS 3 playback volume by selecting Menu No 15 Cushion 17 INSTALLING OPTIONS 98 MB 430 MOBILE BRACKET When installing the MB 430 attach the supplied plastic spacers G11 2698 XX to the transceiver in advance This is necessary to protect the TS 2000 X TS B2000 transceiver from scratches Once the bracket is installed onto the vehicle prepare the transceiver by loosely screwing in the rear screws Hook those screws onto the rear guide rail of the mounting bracket then adjust the transceiver to your desired angle before tightening the screws Insert and tighten the
189. P C O R P h c e e p S e h t h cti w s o t s s e r P N O n oitc n u F r o s s e c o r P N A N A N A N A N A h ct o N o t u A e h t elg g o t o t s s e r P F F O d n a N O n oitc n u f C B C B C B C B C B le c n a C t a e B e h t elg g o t o t s s e r P F F O d n a N O n oitc n u f R N R N R N R N R N 1 n oitc u d e R e sio N tc ele s o t s s e r P F F O r o 2 n oitc u d e R e sio N C N U F C N U F C N U F C N U F C N U F T A T A T A T A T A d n a 1 T N A n e e w t e b elg g o t o t s s e r P d n a b z H M 0 5 F H r o f 2 T N A C N U F C N U F C N U F C N U F C N U F L E V E L B N 7 L E V E L B N 7 L E V E L B N 7 L E V E L B N 7 L E V E L B N 7 r e k n al B e sio N e h t elg g o t o t s s e r P F F O r o N O n oitc n u f C N U F C N U F C N U F C N U F
190. P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P A r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P A 1 P 2 P B P s u t a ts k c a b y alp r e y e k cirtc ele r o A 3 U R D e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P e vitc a n I 0 1 H C k c a b y al P 1 2 H C k c a b y al P 2 3 H C k c a b y al P 3 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P B 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P B r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P B 1 P C P r e w o p t u p t u o e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P 1 f o s p e ts ni 0 0 1 5 0 0 m u m ix a m d n a m u m ini m e h t r o f s n oit a cific e p S e h t o t r e f e R e d o m d n a d n a b y c n e u q e rf g nit a r e p o h c a e r o f r e w o p d e s u sile v el r e w o p tx e n e h t tt a w 1 n a h t s s el si r e w o p e h t fI 1 0 0 W 5 0 3 0 0 W 5 2 x e t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P C 1 P 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P C r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 P C 1 P 1 P 1 P I P le n n a h c y r o m e M
191. P 5 1 P S I s u t a ts n oitc n u f T F I H S F I e h t s d a e r d n a st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P e c a p s 2 P e d o m W C ni 0 5 f o s p e ts ni 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 0 M A r o M F K S F B S S ni elih w d e s u e b t o n n a c s d n a m m o c S I e d o m t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 I S 1 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 I S r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 I S 1 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P S K r e y e k cirtc ele e h t f o d e e p s g niy e k e h t s d a e r d n a st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P M P W ni x a m 0 6 0 ni m 0 1 0 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 K S 1 P 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 K S r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 K S 1 P 1 P 1 P 126 21 APPENDIX Y K e d o c e s r o M o t ni s r e tc a r a h c e h t str e v n o C s r e t e m a r a P 1 P elb alia v a si r e ff u b r e tc a r a h C 0 elb alia v a t o n si r e ff u b r e tc a r a h C 1 d n a m m o c t e S r o f d e s u si e c a p s A yln o d n a m m o c r e
192. P 9 9 0 0 st nio p 8 2 d n a b z H M 0 5 F H 8 2 0 0 st nio p 8 d n a b z H G 2 1 z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 z H M 4 4 1 8 0 0 0 d n a b h c a e r o f 3 P tigid 1 1 z H ni y c n e u q e r F 4 P d e v r e s e R 0 B S L 1 B S U 2 W C 3 M F 4 M A 5 K S F 6 R W C 7 d e v r e s e R 8 R K S F 9 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A S 1 P 2 P 2 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 3 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 4 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A S 1 P 2 P 2 P r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A S 1 P 2 P 2 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 3 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 4 P C B s u t a ts n oitc n u f r elle c n a C t a e B e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O r elle c n a C t a e B 0 N O r elle c n a C t a e B o t u A 1 N O r elle c n a C t a e B la u n a M 2 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 B C 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 B C r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 B
193. P S 2 xi M b u S 4 1 nia M L 1 P S xi M nia M 4 1 b u S R 2 P S 7 1 e h t 2 P S T X E d n a 1 P S T X E e h t s e s r e v e R st u p t u o oid u a sle n n a h c R L k c aj e n o h p d a e h F F O N O F F O 8 7 23 6 MENU SETUP p u o r G u n e M o N n oitc n u F s n oitc ele S tlu afe D fe R e g a P a n n e t n A X R 8 1 r o tc e n n o c T N A X R F H e h t m o rf t u p ni n a elb a n E F F O N O F F O 6 7 r e t e m S h cle u q S 9 1 h cle u q s r e t e m S s s e c c a o t B U S s s e r P u n e m b u s e h t A 9 1 h cle u q s r e t e m S elb a n E F F O N O F F O 8 7 B 9 1 h cle u q s r e t e m S r o f e m it g n a H 0 0 5 0 5 2 5 2 1 F F O s m F F O 8 7 P S D r e zila u q E 0 2 r e zila u q e X R P S D F T S O O B H F F O T S O O B B S S A P R E S U N E V N O C F F O 8 7 4 0 1 F F O t al F T S O O B H ts o o b h gi H S S A P F s s a p t n a m r o F T S O O B B ts o o b s s a B N E V N O C la n oit n e v
194. P C T _ HF VHF UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS 2000 SATL A B VFO M SPLIT A B 6 2 1 8 5 3 1 7 1 4 Note This section explains only keys and controls required to briefly try the transceiver q Set the following as specified MAIN AF Fully counterclockwise MAIN RF GAIN Fully clockwise MAIN SQL Fully counterclockwise w Switch ON the DC power supply then press and hold POWER briefly on the transceiver Do not press the switch for more than approximately 2 seconds the transceiver will be switched OFF Upon power up HELLO appears followed by the selected frequency and other indicators d FILTE R S 1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60dB PW R 10 25 50 100 W AL C e Confirm that VFO A has been selected for communications tA should be visible on the display If it has not press A B to select VFO A r Turn the MAIN AF control slowly clockwise until you hear a suitable level of background noise t Press to select an HF 50 MHz Amateur radio band y Press LSB USB AUTO or FM AM NAR to select an operating mode To select the second mode on each key press the same key again For example each press of LSB USB AUTO switches between LSB and USB modes u If you have selected FM turn the MAIN SQL control clockwise until the background noise is just eliminated the MAIN band LED above the
195. R 0 1 T N A stc ele S 1 2 T N A stc ele S 2 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A N 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A N r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A N 1 P R A F F O N O n oitc n u f C S A e h t s d a e r r o st e S n oitc n u f C S A e h t f o s u t a ts e h t str o p e R s r e t e m a r a P 1 P r e vie c s n a rt nia M 0 r e vie c e r b u S 1 2 P F F O C S A 0 N O C S A 1 3 P elbis s o p si tc a t n o c x elp m i S 0 elbis s o p t o n si tc a t n o c x elp m i S 1 C S A n e h W d n a b L R T C o t yln o dila v si r e t e m a r a p 2 P n w o n k n u si e s n o p s e r e h t F F O si n oitc n u f t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A R 1 P 2 P 3 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A R 1 P r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A R 1 P 2 P 3 P S A s r e t e m a r a p n oitc n u f e d o M o t u A e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P d n a b z H M 0 5 F H 0 d n a b z H M 4 4 1 1 d n a b z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 2 d n a b z H G 2 1 3 2
196. R MAIN AUTO CAR TX MONI DELAY NAR REV MIC PWR KEY LSB USB CW FSK FM AM DISP SEL 1MHz CTRL MEN M HF VHE UHF ALL MO 3 To switch the transceiver OFF press POWER again 4 Switch the DC power supply OFF You may skip step 3 After switching the transceiver ON you can switch it OFF or ON using only the power switch of the DC power supply The transceiver stores the information of the POWER switch position when the DC power source is switched OFF ADJUSTING VOLUME AUDIO FREQUENCY AF GAIN Turn the MAIN AF control clockwise to increase the audio level and counterclockwise to decrease the level MAIN CALL C IN UTO SB SB SUB SEL 1MHz CTRL MR M VFO MG SEL M IN M IN QUICK MEMO SATL A B M S REV TRACE MAIN MANUAL RF AF SQL SUB CH MULTI BC MAIN GAIN VFO CH VFO M A B SPLIT MENU TF SET MAIN SUB SG SEL SCAN RIT CW TUNE 9 6k STA RIT SUB CON XIT ALT SET CLEAR P C T _ HF VHE UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS 2000 AF SQL Note N The position of the MAIN AF control does not affect the volume of beeps caused by pressing keys nor the CW transmit sidetone The audio level for Packet operation is also independent of the MAIN AF control setting N When the optional RC 2000 is installed you can control the volume with the AF controls on both the transceiver and
197. RATION Assuming that the 144 MHz band of the TS 2000 transceiver will be controlled On the control transceiver 1 Program a 3 digit secret number If you are using a TH D7A see WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL in its instruction manual 2 Select the transmit frequency on the 440 MHz band 3 Enter the Remote Control mode On the TS 2000 transceiver 4 Access Menu 61C and select the same secret number that you selected in step 1 5 Select the receive frequency on the 440 MHz band of the sub receiver Mate this frequency with the transmit frequency on the control transceiver 6 Select the 144 MHz band as the TX band or Control band for the main transceiver 7 To have the TS 2000 X transceiver send a control acknowledgment to the handheld access Menu 61D and select ON DTMF tones which represent the secret number will be used as an acknowledgment 8 Access Menu 61E and select ON appears when the TS 2000 X enters Remote Control mode CONTROL OPERATION When in Remote Control mode the DTMF keys of the control transceiver will function as shown in the table below Each time you press the desired key the transceiver will automatically enter transmit mode and send the corresponding command to the mobile Note If you are using a transceiver without a remote control function manually send AXXX YA where XXX is your 3 digit secret number and Y is a sing
198. S g n o r w 1 2 N O I T A R E P O R E T A E P E R M F w eiv e R d n a y c n e u q e rf tc e rr o c e h t tc ele s d n a e n o t b u s f o e p yt s r e t a e p e r e h t n o ti m s n a rt ts u m u o Y e h t n o e vie c e r d n a y c n e u q e rf t u p ni o t r e f e R y c n e u q e rf t u p t u o s r e t a e p e r N O I T A R E P O R E T A E P E R M F 2 3 2 3 n oit a r e p o la tigi D o n r o w e f ni stlu s e r stc a t n o c r o stc e n n o c s n oit a ts r e h t o h ti w 1 2 3 4 5 e h t n e e w t e b s n oitc e n n o c la cis y h P d n a r e t u p m o c r e vie c s n a rt e r a w tf o s r o tc e rr o c ni si P C M C N T g n o r w e r a P C M C N T e h t ni s g nitt e s e vie c e r d n a ti m s n a rt t n e r e ffi D d e s u g nie b e r a s eic n e u q e rf r e vie c s n a rt e h t n e e w t e b sle v el e h T tc e rr o c ni e r a P C M C N T e h t d n a e h t r o la n gis d e tti m s n a rt r u o Y k a e w o o t sila n gis e vie c e r g ni m o c ni r u o y ni r
199. S REV TRACE MAIN MANUAL RF AF SQL SUB CH MULTI BC MAIN GAIN VFO CH MENU TF SET MAIN SUB SG SEL SCAN M VFO M IN RIT CW TUNE 9 6k STA RIT SUB CON XIT ALT SET CLEAR P C T _ HF VHF UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS 2000 SATL A B VFO M SPLIT A B 2 3 5 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 q PF key You can assign a function to this Programmable Function key The default function is Voice 1 page 77 w POWER switch Press and hold briefly to switch the transceiver power ON Press again to switch the power OFF e ATT F LOCK key Press to switch the receiver attenuator ON or OFF page 57 Press FUNC ATT F LOCK to switch the Frequency Lock function ON or OFF page 77 r PRE LOCK A key Press to switch the receiver pre amplifier ON or OFF page 57 Press FUNC PRE LOCK A to lock all the transceiver keys page 77 t VOX LEVEL key In voice mode press to switch the Voice Operated Transmit function ON or OFF page 39 In CW mode press to switch the Break in function ON or OFF page 42 Press FUNC VOX LEVEL to adjust the microphone input level for VOX operation The VOX LED lights orange when the VOX function is active y PROC LEVEL key Press to switch the Speech Processor for transmitting ON or OFF page 40 Press FUNC PROC LEVEL to adjust the Speech Processor input level The PROC LED lights
200. S S I K s r e t n e r e vie c s n a rt e h t e d o m S S I K tix e o T s e m it w e f a yle vit a n r e tla k nilb s D E L e h t n r u t r o C N T e h t o t 0 C F F 0 C a t a d y r a nib e h t d n e s r e vie c s n a rt e h t n r u t u o y e m it tx e n e h T F F O r e vie c s n a rt ylla cit a m o t u a F F O r e t e m a r a p e h t st e s C N T e h t N O M O C M M O C M F F O F F O N O st e k c a p lo rt n o c r o tin o m o sla o t C N T e h t s e s u a c N O n e h W st e k c a p n oit a m r o f ni yln o r o tin o m o t ti s e s u a c F F O n e h W N O C M C M F F O F F O N O elih w s n oit a ts r e h t o r o tin o m o t C N T e h t s e s u a c N O n e h W n oit a ts t e g r a t e h t h ti w n oitc e n n o c ni R O T I N O M M N O F F O N O st e k c a p r o tin o m o t C N T e h t s e s u a c N O n e h W T P R M R M N O F F O N O tsilt a e pigid e rit n e e h t y alp sid o t C N T e h t s e s u a c N O n e h W st e k c a p d e r o tin o m r o f L L A C Y M Y M L L A C O N 6
201. S SEL 7 NB LEVEL 8 AGC OFF 9 FINE STEP DCS SEL 0 SHIFT OFFSET ENT SEND PHONES MIC AT ANT1 2 PROC LEVEL VOX ATT PRE LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL MANUAL LO WIDTH HI SHIFT N R A N B C FUNC CALL C IN CLR MAIN AUTO CAR TX MONI DELAY NAR REV MIC PWR KEY LSB USB CW FSK FM AM SUB DISP SEL 1MHz CTRL MR MG SEL M IN QUICK MEMO M S REV TRACE MAIN MANUAL RF AF SQL SUB CH MULTI BC MAIN GAIN VFO CH MENU TF SET MAIN SUB SG SEL SCAN M VFO M IN RIT CW TUNE 9 6k STA RIT SUB CON XIT ALT SET CLEAR P C T _ HF VHF UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS 2000 SATL A B VFO M SPLIT A B 17 18 15 14 16 4 Multi purpose keypad Consists of 10 keys that are used to enter numeric data Also used for the following functions 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC and 3 CH3 REC keys Press to play back or record the CW or voice messages that are associated with the DRU 3A Digital Recording Unit page 89 and the internal electronic keyer page 43 4 TONE SEL key Press to activate the sub audible Tone function to access repeaters for FM mode To select the Tone frequency press FUNC 4 TONE SEL then select your desired tone frequency using the MULTI CH control page 33 5 METER key Press to select the meter scales page 19
202. SB MODE 44 CHAPTER 10 SUB RECEIVER SUB RECEIVER 45 TX BAND AND CONTROL BAND 45 TX BAND 45 CONTROL BAND 45 RECEIVING 45 ACTIVATING THE SUB RECEIVER 45 CONTROLLING THE SUB RECEIVER 45 SELECTING A BAND 45 ADJUSTING THE AUDIO FREQUENCY AF GAIN 46 ADJUSTING THE SQUELCH 46 SELECTING A FREQUENCY 46 SUB RECEIVER PANEL METER 46 SELECTING A MODE FOR THE SUB RECEIVER 46 FM CTCSS OPERATION 46 FM DCS OPERATION 46 TONE FREQ ID SCAN 46 DCS CODE ID SCAN 46 ATTENUATOR 47 PRE AMPLIFIER 47 DUAL WATCH 47 SCAN 47 NOISE REDUCTION 47 TR
203. SING A SEPARATE TRANSPORTER If you have more than 2 TH D7A and or TM D700A transceivers you can use one of the transceivers as a Transporter This transceiver is connected to the TS 2000 X via the RS 232C port EXT SP jack and Mic connector of the base station and the other TH D7A or TM D700A transceiver works as a Commander With this configuration you can turn the TS 2000 X ON and OFF using the Commander Refer to the instruction manual of the TH D7A or TM D700A for interfacing the transceiver to the TS 2000 X transceiver TS 2000 TH D7A TM D700A Transporter Setup 1 Configure the TH D7A or TM D700A as a Transporter and connect all the necessary cables to the TS 2000 2 Select a frequency HF 50 MHz band on the main transceiver of the TS 2000 3 On the TS 2000 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 62E 4 Select a CLIENT 5 Press MENU to complete 6 Start the Transporter mode on the TH D7A or TM D700A TH D7A TM D700A Commander Setup Configure the TH D7A or TM D700A as a Commander Refer to the SKY COMMAND II chapter in the instruction manual to set up the transceiver as a Commander You can use a Commander as described on pages 84 and 86 REPEATER FUNCTION K type ONLY This transceiver is capable of receiving signals on one band and retransmitting them on another band For example a signal received on the sub recei
204. SS SEL 7 NB LEVEL 8 AGC OFF 9 FINE STEP DCS SEL 0 SHIFT OFFSET ENT SEND PHONES MIC AT ANT1 2 PROC LEVEL VOX ATT PRE LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL MANUAL LO WIDTH HI SHIFT N R A N B C FUNC CALL C IN CLR MAIN AUTO CAR TX MONI DELAY NAR REV MIC PWR KEY LSB USB CW FSK FM AM SUB DISP SEL 1MHz CTRL MR MG SEL M IN QUICK MEMO M S REV TRACE MAIN MANUAL RF AF SQL SUB CH MULTI BC MAIN GAIN VFO CH MENU TF SET MAIN SUB SG SEL SCAN M VFO M IN RIT CW TUNE 9 6k STA RIT SUB CON XIT ALT SET CLEAR P C T _ HF VHF UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS 2000 SATL A B VFO M SPLIT A B 36 35 40 41 42 34 43 39 37 38 4 QUICK MEMO keys Controls the Quick Memory function page 64 MR key Press to recall data from the Quick Memory page 65 M IN key Press to write data into the Quick Memory page 64 5 SATL key Press to activate Satellite communication mode page 53 6 Frequency control keys These keys control functions related to selecting a frequency a VFO or a memory channel A B M S key Press to select either VFO A or VFO B page 18 In Satellite mode press to swap the MAIN and SUB frequencies so that you can change the frequencies with a Tuning control page 54 SPLIT REV
205. Sending Messages 90 Erasing a Recorded Message 90 Changing Inter message Interval Time 90 Changing Playback Volume 90 VS 3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER OPTIONAL 91 MICROPROCESSOR RESET 92 INITIAL SETTINGS 92 PARTIAL RESET 92 FULL RESET 92 CHAPTER 16 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT COMPUTER 93 COMPATIBLE TRANSCEIVER 93 RTTY EQUIPMENT 94 HF LINEAR AMPLIFIER 94 ANTENNA TUNER 94 MCP AND TNC 95 TYPICAL MCP TNC SETUP 96 LINEAR AMPLIFIER 50 MHz 144 MHz 430 440 MHz and 1 2 GHz 96 CHAPTER 14 SCAN NORMAL SCAN 66 VFO SCAN 66 PROGRAM SCAN 67 PROGRAM SCAN PARTIALLY SLOWED 67 SCAN HOLD 68 MHz SCAN
206. Straight key Paddle Bug key Electronic keyer MCP CW output GND GND dash dot Microphone Headphone TS 2000 TS 2000X TS B2000 MIC connector Front view GND STBY GND MIC NC 8 V 10 mA max MIC PTT DOWN UP External speaker 4 YOUR FIRST QSO HF 50 MHz band Are you ready to give your TS 2000 X a quick try Reading these two pages should get your voice on the air in your first QSO on the HF 50 MHz band shortly The instructions below are intended only for a quick guide If you encounter problems or there is something you don t understand read the detailed explanations given later in this manual RECEIVING PF F LOCK A 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC 3 CH3 REC 4 TONE SEL 5 METER 6 CTCSS SEL 7 NB LEVEL 8 AGC OFF 9 FINE STEP DCS SEL 0 SHIFT OFFSET ENT SEND PHONES MIC AT ANT1 2 PROC LEVEL VOX ATT PRE LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL MANUAL LO WIDTH HI SHIFT N R A N B C FUNC CALL C IN CLR MAIN AUTO CAR TX MONI DELAY NAR REV MIC PWR KEY LSB USB CW FSK FM AM SUB DISP SEL 1MHz CTRL MR MG SEL M IN QUICK MEMO M S REV TRACE MAIN MANUAL RF AF SQL SUB CH MULTI BC MAIN GAIN VFO CH MENU TF SET MAIN SUB SG SEL SCAN M VFO M IN RIT CW TUNE 9 6k STA RIT SUB CON XIT ALT SET CLEAR
207. TS 2000 X transceiver has an independent VHF and UHF sub receiver in addition to the main transceiver the sub receiver can work as a Transporter without requiring another VHF UHF transceiver So if you already have Kenwood s TH D7A handheld or TM D700A mobile transceiver you can immediately start enjoying Sky Command II features to remotely control the HF 50 MHz band of your TS 2000 X Or if you have a friend who has another TS 2000 X you can also use his her TS 2000 X as a Commander a remote unit to control the HF 50 MHz band of your TS 2000 X at home using VHF and UHF bands You will use one transceiver as a remote control unit called a Commander The VHF UHF sub receiver in the TS 2000 X transceiver is called the Transporter It will function as an interface between the Commander and the HF 50 MHz band of the TS 2000 X main transceiver This system allows you for example to watch for and hunt DX while washing your car or to operate the HF transceiver while relaxing in your car living room or patio instead of actually operating inside your shack SKY COMMAND II DIAGRAM PF ATT PRE AMP VOX PROC SEND CH1 MIC CW FSK LSB USB FM AM AT TUNE POWER HF TRANSCEIVER TS 570D PHONES 1 CH2 2 CH3 3 ANT 4 REC 5 FINE 6 NB 7 AGC TONE 8 REV 9 CLR F LOCK 0 ENT MIC PWR KEY DELAY MENU 1MHz SPLIT M V DOWN
208. U to store the setting and exit Menu mode CONTRAST The contrast of the LCD dot matrix display can be selected from 1 to 16 by accessing Menu No 59 1 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 59 2 Press to select an appropriate contrast from 1 to 16 3 Press MENU to store the setting and exit Menu mode KEY ILLUMINATION The front panel key illumination can be switched ON or OFF 1 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 01 2 Press to select ON or OFF 3 Press MENU to store the setting and exit Menu mode DTMF MANUAL DTMF DIALING If you have an optional MC 52DM microphone you can send DTMF tones while you are transmitting To send a series of DTMF tones 1 Press Mic PTT or SEND on the front panel 2 Press the desired DTMF keys to transmit DTMF tones are monitored through the speaker 3 Release Mic PTT or press SEND on the front panel to return to receive mode DTMF MEMORY I Entering DTMF tones The transceiver has 10 DTMF Memory Channels Each channel can store a series of 16 DTMF tones You can also name each DTMF entry using a maximum of 8 alpha numeric characters 1 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 45 2 Press SUB to access Menu No 45A 3 Press SUB again to enter DTMF Memory Channel mode 76 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES 4 Select a DTMF Memory Channel 0 to 9
209. UENCY When you need to monitor the uplink TX frequency press TF SET Each time you press TF SET the uplink TX frequency and the downlink RX frequency are swapped USING XIT RIT IN SATELLITE MODE You can also use the RIT or XIT function while in the Satellite mode Press RIT CW TUNE or XIT ALT to activate the function When the RIT or XIT function is ON the sub band frequency display shows the current RIT or XIT offset frequency instead of the operating frequency To clear the RIT or XIT offset frequency press CLEAR Note You cannot activate both the RIT and XIT functions at the same time in the Satellite mode CHANGING THE FREQUENCY BAND If you need to change the uplink and or downlink frequency band press CTRL to move the icon to the frequency band that you want to change Then press to select the band you want to operate 55 REJECTING INTERFERENCE e d o M tu c w ol tlu afe D z H y c e u q e rf tu c h gih tlu afe D z H y c n e u q e rf M F B S S 0 0 3 0 0 6 2 M A 0 0 1 0 0 0 5 4 To return the display to the current operating mode press DISP Note N The cut off frequencies can be adjusted independently for each operating mode When you change the operating mode the previous setting is recalled for each operating mode N When the Packet filter Menu No 50A is ON you cannot change the DSP f
210. UP MR TF SET A B SCAN M gt VFO M IN M IN FILTER CW TUNE B C N R A B CLEAR RIT XIT RIT XIT IF SHIFT SQL CH 4 6 0 10 2 8 AF RF L O W C U T HIGH DSP SLOPE LOW 4 6 0 10 2 8 VHF freq Commander Transporter Audio Audio UHF freq Audios Control commands tResponse Control commands tResponse PREPARATION Although you can use either a TM D700A a TH D7A or another TS 2000 X transceiver as a Commander an external remote control unit the following procedure shows how to set up your TS 2000 as a Transporter at a base station and the TM D700A as a Commander TS 2000 Transporter Setup 1 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 62A 2 Press SUB then enter your callsign ex WD6DJY as a Commander callsign using or the MULTI CH control To move the cursor press MAIN or SUB Press M IN to store the callsign to Menu No 62A 3 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 62B 4 Press SUB then enter your alias callsign ex WD6DJY 1 as a Transporter callsign using or the MULTI CH control To move the cursor press MAIN or SUB Press M IN to store the callsign to Menu No 62B Note You can use alpha numeric characters A to Z 0 to 9 and The callsign must be no more than 9 characters long inc
211. VHF UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS 2000 SATL A B VFO M SPLIT A B 1 2 3 5 q Confirm that the operating mode is FM If it is not press FM AM NAR to change the operating mode to FM w Turn the Tuning control or the MULTI CH control to tune in a desired station or to select an unused frequency e Press SEND The MAIN band LED turns red r Begin speaking into the microphone in your normal tone of voice FILTE R S 1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60dB PW R 10 25 50 100 W AL C t When you finish speaking press SEND to return to receive mode This completes your introduction on how to receive and transmit using the TS 2000 X on a VHF UHF band Refer to OPERATING BASICS page 18 and the following chapters for explanations on all the functions of this transceiver 8 GETTING ACQUAINTED FRONT PANEL PF F LOCK A 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC 3 CH3 REC 4 TONE SEL 5 METER 6 CTCSS SEL 7 NB LEVEL 8 AGC OFF 9 FINE STEP DCS SEL 0 SHIFT OFFSET ENT SEND PHONES MIC AT ANT1 2 PROC LEVEL VOX ATT PRE LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL MANUAL LO WIDTH HI SHIFT N R A N B C FUNC CALL C IN CLR MAIN AUTO CAR TX MONI DELAY NAR REV MIC PWR KEY LSB USB CW FSK FM AM SUB DISP SEL 1MHz CTRL MR MG SEL M IN QUICK MEMO M
212. VOX LED lights 3 Press FUNC VOX LEVEL The current VOX gain appears on the sub dot matrix display 4 While speaking into the microphone using your normal tone of voice adjust the setting default is 4 using the MULTI CH control until the transceiver reliably switches to transmit mode each time you speak The selectable gain range is from 0 to 9 The setting should not allow background noise to switch the transceiver to transmit mode Note The VOX gain level can be adjusted even if VOX is switched OFF or while you are transmitting I Delay Time If the transceiver returns to receive mode too quickly after you stop speaking your final word may not be transmitted To avoid this select an appropriate delay time that allows all of your words to be transmitted without an overly long delay after you stop speaking 1 Select USB LSB FM or AM mode 2 Press VOX LEVEL to switch the VOX function ON 3 Press FUNC KEY DELAY The current setting appears on the sub dot matrix display The default is 50 4 While speaking into the microphone using your normal tone of voice adjust the MULTI CH control such that the transceiver switches to receive mode after you have stopped talking The selectable range is from 5 to 100 150 ms to 3000 ms in steps of 5 or OFF 5 Press FUNC KEY DELAY to set the VOX delay 40 9 COMMUNICATING AIDS SPEECH PROCESSOR The Speech Processo
213. Visual Scan graphically displays how all frequencies in the selected range are busy You will see a maximum of 7 segments for each frequency channel point that represent relative S meter levels Determine the scan range by selecting the center frequency and the number of channels The default number of channels is 61 I Using Visual Scan VFO 1 Select the desired band for Visual Scan 2 Turn the Tuning control or press Mic UP DWN to select the operating frequency This frequency will be used as the center frequency 3 Press and hold DISP for approximately 1 second to start Visual Scan VFO The center frequency is displayed on the main frequency display and the current scanning frequency is displayed on the sub frequency display The operating mode and the number of channels to be scanned are displayed on the main dot matrix display The sub dot matrix display shows the relative S meter level of each frequency point vertically To pause Scan press DISP P appears on the main dot matrix display While the Visual Scan is paused you can monitor the paused frequency Press DISP again to resume the Visual Scan 4 To change the current scanning frequency turn the Tuning control or press Mic UP DWN The displayed frequency changes and the cursor moves Press 1MHz SEL to make the current scanning frequency the new center frequency You can move the frequency using
214. WD6DJY You cannot use a as the first callsign character WD6DJY 19 An SSID must be within the range of 1 to 15 5 Access Menu No 62C then turn the MULTI CH control to select a CTCSS tone frequency for Sky Commander II default is 88 5 Hz 6 Access Menu No 62D and select the communication speed for Sky Command II Select 1200 bps for TH D7A 9600 bps can be used only when you use another TS 2000 as a Commander 7 Assign the TNC band to the sub band by accessing Menu No 46 and select SUB 8 Select a 144 MHz band frequency in FM mode on the main transceiver and 440 MHz band frequency in FM mode for the sub receiver for Sky Command operation TH D7A Commander Setup 1 Access Menu 4 1 to enter the same callsign that you entered for the Commander ex WD6DJY 2 Access Menu 4 2 to enter the same callsign that you entered for the Transporter ex WD6DJY 1 3 Access Menu 4 3 to select the same CTCSS tone frequency that you selected for the TS 2000 X Transporter 4 Set the same frequencies that you selected for the Transporter for the VHF and UHF bands Note Refer to Chapter 19 Sky Command II of the TH D7A instruction manual for details on how to enter the callsign and CTCSS tone frequency CONTROL OPERATION First switch the TS 2000 transceiver ON and select T PORTER Transporter from Menu 62E Then access Menu 4 4 on the TH D7A and select COMMANDER PUSH
215. Web pages Or you can directly go to the AMSAT the Radio Amateur Satellite Corporation homepage at http www amsat org From AMSAT Web pages you can download a variety of utilities including pass prediction programs which will ease your satellite operations BASIC OPERATION When you enter the Satellite mode you are always controlling one of 10 Satellite Memory channels with the adjustable frequency function The Satellite Memory channel number 0 9 appears on the main transceiver s display when you enter the mode 1 Press SATL to enter Satellite mode The default downlink 435 9 MHz and uplink 145 9 MHz frequencies appear TRACE and appear to indicate the current selections 2 On VFO A tune to the downlink RX frequency of the satellite 54 11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS 3 Press LSB USB AUTO or CW FSK REV to select LSB USB or CW mode 4 As the Satellite moves fine tune to the changing downlink RX frequency of the satellite using the Tuning control adjusting the Doppler effect As you adjust the downlink RX frequency the Trace function automatically changes the uplink frequency so that the sum of the two frequencies is kept the same Reverse Trace If necessary press A B TRACE to quit the Trace function TRACE disappears The trace function can also change the uplink TX frequency so that the difference between the two fre
216. When the 10 Hz digit last displayed digit is entered the digit 0 is automatically entered for the 1 Hz digit and frequency entry is completed The 1 Hz digit is not displayed N When an entered frequency is accepted RIT or XIT will be switched OFF but the RIT or XIT offset frequency is not cleared N After recalling memory channels 290 to 299 that have Start and End frequencies stored the receive frequency can be changed by using Direct Frequency Entry within the programmed range I Using 1 MHz Steps Pressing on the front panel changes Amateur bands You can also use the MULTI CH control to change the operating frequency in steps of 1 MHz 1 Press 1MHz SEL MHz appears 2 Turn the MULTI CH control Clockwise increases the frequency counter clockwise decreases the frequency 3 Press 1MHz SEL to exit the function MHz disappears If you prefer to change the frequency in steps of 100 kHz or 500 kHz steps rather than 1 MHz press FUNC 1MHz SEL then turn the MULTI CH control to select 100 kHz or 500 kHz Note Even if 100 kHz or 500 kHz is selected for the 1MHz SEL key the MHz icon appears I Quick QSY To move up or down the frequency quickly use the MULTI CH control Turning this control changes the operating frequency in steps of 5 kHz for SSB CW FSK and 10 kHz for FM AM below 60 MHz If you want to change the default frequency step size pr
217. a F F O N O T I R F F O N O T I X y c n e u q e rf t e sff o T I X T I R h t di w d n a b r e tlif r e vie c e R F F O N O r e k n al B e sio N F F O N O E N I F n oitc u d e R e sio N P S D 2 1 F F O le c n a C t a e B P S D F F O N O h ct o N o t u A P S D F F O N O s n oitc n u f X R X T STORING INTO QUICK MEMORY Each time you store a new frequency all previously stored frequencies are bumped to the next respective Quick memory channel When all ten memory channels contain frequencies storing one more frequency bumps the contents of memory channel 9 off the stack the data is lost The following diagram illustrates how the Quick Memory stacks the data in memory each time you press QUICK MEMO M IN 24 911 Memory 0 144 005 Memory 1 14 235 Memory 2 441 250 Memory 3 18 111 Memory 4 50 015 Memory 5 7 082 Memory 6 29 610 Memory 7 3 545 Memory 8 145 250 Memory 9 21 005 Memory 0 24 911 Memory 1 144 005 Memory 2 14 235 Memory 3 441 250 Memory 4 18 111 Memory 5 50 015 Memory 6 7 082 Memory 7 29 610 Memory 8 3 545 Memory 9 14 085 Memory 0 21 005 Memory 1 24 911 Memory 2 144 005 Memory 3 14 235 Memory 4 441 250 Memory 5 18 111 Memory 6 50 015 Memory 7 7 082 Memory 8 29
218. abetical command Terminator 00007000000 FA Parameters Commands can be classified as shown below Input command Input to the transceiver Output command From the transceiver Set command Sets a particular condition Read command Reads an answer Answer command Transmits a condition Computer control commands For example note the following in the case of the FA command Frequency of VFO A To set the frequency to 7 MHz the following command is sent from the computer to the transceiver FA00007000000 Set command To read the frequency of VFO A the following command is sent from the computer to the transceiver FA Read command When the Read command above has been sent the following command is returned to the computer FA00007000000 Answer command Note N Do not use the control characters 00 to 1Fh since they are either ignored or cause a answer N Program execution may be delayed while turning the Tuning control rapidly N Receive data is not processed if the frequency is entered from the keypad I Alphabetical Commands A command consists of 2 alphabetical characters You may use either lower or upper case characters The commands available for this transceiver are listed in the PC Control Command Tables page 115 115 21 APPENDIX C A s u t a ts r e n u t a n n e t n a la n r e t ni
219. again to complete the setting All E types only If you have selected for the offset direction you cannot change the default 7 6 MHz or 6 0 MHz 29 520 MHz 88 5 Hz 29 520 MHz 88 5 Hz 29 620 MHz 29 620 MHz 33 8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS TRANSMITTING A TONE Some FM repeaters require the transceiver to transmit a sub audible tone to prevent other repeaters on the same frequency from locking each other up The required tone frequency differs among repeaters Repeaters also differ in their requirements for either continuous or burst tones For the appropriate selections for your accessible repeaters consult your local repeater reference After completing the tone settings pressing SEND or pressing and holding Mic PTT causes the transceiver to transmit the selected tone If you have selected a 1750 Hz tone press 4 TONE SEL to transmit the tone without pressing Mic PTT Note If you store tone settings in a memory channel you need not reprogram each time Refer to MEMORY FEATURES page 58 I Activating the Tone Function 1 Confirm that FM mode has been selected on the VFO s When using two VFOs you must select FM mode on both VFOs 2 Press 4 TONE SEL to switch the Tone function ON or OFF T appears when the function is ON Note N You cannot use the Tone function with the CTCSS or DCS functions N You need to activate the Tone function only when select
220. and FSK modes and 10 Hz for FM and AM modes 1 Press 9 FINE STEP FINE appears 2 Turn the Tuning control to select the exact frequency 3 To quit the function press 9 FINE STEP again FINE disappears Note N Fine Tuning works only on the main transceiver N If Menu No 03 is ON you cannot perform fine tuning in FM mode for all bands and AM mode for the 144 MHz 430 440 MHz 1 2 GHz TS 2000 optional bands I Equalizing VFO Frequencies A B This function allows you to copy the frequency and modulation mode of the active VFO to the inactive VFO 1 Select the frequency and mode on VFO A or VFO B 2 Press A B The frequency and mode selected in step 1 are copied to the inactive VFO 3 Press A B to confirm that the frequency was copied RIT RECEIVE INCREMENTAL TUNING RIT provides the ability to change your receive frequency by 20 00 kHz in steps of 10 Hz without changing your transmit frequency If the Fine Tuning 9 FINE STEP function is ON the step size becomes 1 Hz RIT works equally well with all modulation modes and while using VFO or Memory Recall mode 1 Press RIT CW TUNE RIT and the RIT offset appear 2 If required press CLEAR to reset the RIT offset to 0 3 Turn the RIT SUB control to change your receive frequency 4 To turn off RIT press RIT CW TUNE The receive frequency is returned to the frequency that
221. and repeater is unlike the lock band repeater in that both bands can be used to receive signals When a signal is received on one band it is retransmitted on the other band To activate the cross band repeater select CROSS in Menu No 61A in step 5 Note N The Repeater function has its own Time out Timer which is set at 3 minutes This value cannot be changed N After activating the Repeater function you cannot access Menu Nos other than 61A and 61B HANG TIME FOR REPEATER FUNCTION If necessary you can cause this transceiver to remain in the transmit mode for 500 ms after signals drop Access Menu No 61B and select ON 89 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES DRU 3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT OPTIONAL The optional DRU 3A unit allows you to record a voice message on up to 3 channels After recording a message via your transceiver microphone you can then send that message The maximum recording time for each channel is as follows Channel 1 Approx 30 seconds Channel 2 Approx 15 seconds Channel 3 Approx 15 seconds The DRU 3A is useful in many situations DX chasing or contest operation where repeated calls are necessary for extended periods of time Checking interference complaints with other equipment lets you be in two places at one time Checking or adjusting your transmit signal or your antenna s if it s not convenient to be sitting in front of your microphone Helping a friend adjust
222. anges After retrieving frequencies and associated data in Memory Recall mode you can temporarily change the data without overwriting the contents of the memory channel 1 Access Menu No 06B and select ON Skip this step when changing only the associated data not the frequency 2 Recall a memory channel 3 Change the frequencies and associated data Use only the Tuning control to select a frequency 4 If necessary for future use store the changed data in another memory channel Refer to Channel Channel Transfer page 61 Note Memory channel data can also be changed while using the TF SET function MEMORY VFO SPLIT OPERATION Under ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS page 31 you learned about split frequency operation using two VFOs Recalling a split frequency channel is another way to perform split frequency operation If you access Menu No 06A and select ON you can also use a memory channel and a VFO together for this operation as follows RX Memory channel TX VFO A or VFO B RX VFO A or VFO B TX Memory channel To use a memory channel for receiving 1 Access Menu No 06A and select ON 2 Press A B to select the VFO that you will use for transmitting tA or tB appears to show which VFO is selected 3 Select the frequency for transmitting 4 Recall a memory channel by pressing VFO M 5 Turn the MULTI CH control to select a memory channel to
223. are using the optional MC 47 or MC 52DM microphone assign one of the Mic PF keys to either VOICE1 or VOICE2 For programming Mic PF keys refer to MICROPHONE PF KEYS page 77 2 Press the PF key that you programmed An announcement is made based on the VOICE1 or VOICE2 selection To interrupt the announcement press the PF key again 92 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES MICROPROCESSOR RESET If your transceiver seems to be malfunctioning resetting the microprocessor default settings may resolve the problem There are 2 levels of resetting the microprocessor of the TS 2000 X partial reset and full reset INITIAL SETTINGS For each VFO the factory defaults for the operating frequency and mode are as follows MAIN VFO A 14 000 000 MHz USB MAIN VFO B 14 000 000 MHz USB SUB VFO 144 000 00 MHz FM The Memory channels and Quick Memory channels have no data stored PARTIAL RESET Perform a Partial Reset if a key or control does not function according to the instructions in this manual The following data is NOT erased by performing a Partial Reset Memory channel data Menu settings Antenna tuner preset data ANT 1 ANT 2 data Reset the transceiver by pressing A B A confirmatin message appears Press A B to proceed Otherwise press any other key to cancel the Partial Reset and return to normal operation HELLO appears on the display and t
224. ator ON and OFF ATT appears when the function is ON The ON OFF setting will be automatically stored in the current band Each time you select the same frequency band the attenuator setting will be automatically recalled The frequency range of each band is shown below s d n a B y c n e u q e r F z H M r eifilp m a e r P tlu afe D r ota u n ett A tlu afe D 5 2 3 0 0 F F O F F O 1 4 5 2 F F O F F O 5 7 1 4 F F O F F O 5 0 1 5 7 N O F F O 5 4 1 5 0 1 N O F F O 5 8 1 5 4 1 N O F F O 5 1 2 5 8 1 N O F F O 5 5 2 5 1 2 N O F F O 0 0 3 5 5 2 N O F F O 0 0 6 0 0 3 N O F F O 0 0 3 8 1 1 N O F F O 2 1 5 0 0 3 N O F F O 0 0 3 1 0 4 2 1 N O s y a w l A F F O s y a w l A Note N If the same frequency 144 MHz or 430 440 MHz band is selected on both the main transceiver and the sub receiver the attenuator can be switched ON or OFF for both receivers This is because the main transceiver and sub receiver share the same antenna N Available receiving frequencies in the above frequency bands vary depending on the market code Refer to the Specifications page 106 for details N If 118 135 995 MHz 155 173 995 M
225. ault is ON K type U S A and Canada versions This complies with the standard ARRL band plan All E types European versions Note N Automatic Repeater Offset does not function when Reverse is ON However pressing TF SET after Automatic Repeater Offset has selected an offset split status exchanges the receive and transmit frequencies N If you change the offset direction by pressing 0 SHIFT OFFSET when Automatic Repeater Offset is ON the Shift direction on the above figure is applied when you change the frequencies REVERSE FUNCTION After programming an offset on the 29 50 144 430 440 MHz and 1 2 GHz Optional band the reverse function exchanges a separate receive and transmit frequency So while using a repeater you can manually check the strength of a signal that you receive directly from the other station If the station s signal is strong both stations should move to a simplex frequency to free up the repeater Press TF SET to switch the Reverse function ON or OFF while the Shift function is active R appears when the Reverse function is ON Note N If you press TF SET and try to receive outside the available receive frequency the transceiver will not allow you to tune the frequency The Reverse function will not operate N Automatic Repeater Offset does not function while Reverse is ON N You cannot switch Reverse ON or OFF while transmitting AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHE
226. became common Now you can easily start operating RTTY with a personal computer and MCP Unlike Packet each time you type a letter it is transmitted over the air What you typed is transmitted and displayed on the computer screen of the recipient RTTY operation uses frequency shift keying FSK and the 5 bit Baudot code or the 7 bit ASCII code to transmit information For the cable connections see RTTY page 95 For further information consult reference books about Amateur Radio 1 Access Menu No 38 and select an FSK shift FSK shift is the difference in frequencies between a mark and a space The 170 Hz default is used on the Amateur bands 2 Access Menu No 39 and select a key down polarity Select NORMAL to transmit a mark when keying down or INVERS to transmit a space The default is NORMAL 3 Access Menu No 40 and select high tone 2125 Hz or low tone 1275 Hz for mark High tone default is commonly used nowadays 4 Select an operating frequency 5 Press CW FSK REV to select FSK FSK appears 6 If necessary to be compatible with the other station press FUNC CW FSK REV to reverse the transceiver to the upper sideband FSR appears Traditionally the lower sideband is used for FSK operation Press FUNC CW FSK REV to return to the lower sideband 7 Following the instructions provided with your MCP ente
227. blies or printed circuit boards Send the complete transceiver Tag all returned items with your name and call sign for identification Please mention the model and serial number of the transceiver in any communication regarding the problem SERVICE NOTE If you desire to correspond on a technical or operational problem please make your note short complete and to the point Help us help you by providing the following 1 Model and serial number of equipment 2 Question or problem you are having 3 Other equipment in your station pertaining to the problem 4 Meter readings 5 Other related information Menu setup mode frequency key sequence to induce malfunction etc DO NOT PACK THE EQUIPMENT IN CRUSHED NEWSPAPERS FOR SHIPMENT EXTENSIVE DAMAGE MAY RESULT DURING ROUGH HANDLING OR SHIPPING 100 18 TROUBLESHOOTING m elb o r P e s u a C elb a b o r P n oitc A e vitc e rr o C e g a P fe R t o n lli w r e vie c s n a rt e h T r e tf a p u r e w o p C D V 8 3 1 a g nitc e n n o c d n a ylp p u s r e w o p g nih t o N g nis s e r p y alp sid e h t n o s r a e p p a si e sio n r e vie c e r o n d n a d r a e h 1 2 3 4 F F O si ylp p u s r e w o p C D elb a c r e w o p ytlu a F d e tc e n n o c t o n si elb a c r e w o
228. contents of the memory channels without changing the current receive frequency In this mode frequencies you retrieve are not used for receiving and transmitting I Memory Recall 1 Press VFO M to enter Memory Recall mode The memory channel that was last selected appears 2 Turn the MULTI CH control or press Mic UP DWN to select a memory channel Continuously holding down Mic UP DWN steps the transceiver through the memory channels until the key is released Memory channels which contain no data are skipped You cannot change memory channels while transmitting 3 To exit Memory Recall mode press VFO M Note Memory channels can also be changed while using the TF SET function 60 13 MEMORY FEATURES I Memory Scroll 1 Press M IN to enter Memory Scroll mode The memory channel that was last selected appears 2 Turn the MULTI CH control or press Mic UP DWN to step through the memory channels You can also change channels by entering a 3 digit number such as 012 using the numeric keys then pressing ENT 3 To exit Memory Scroll mode press CLR The transceiver re displays the memory channel or VFO frequency that was selected before you activated Memory Scroll Note Do not press M IN again after entering Memory Scroll mode Pressing M IN results in over writing the current VFO data to the memory channel you selected I Temporary Frequency Ch
229. continue to blow disconnect the power plug and contact a KENWOOD service station or your dealer for assistance n oita c o L e s u F g nita R tn e rr u C e s u F X 0 0 0 2 S T 0 0 0 2 B S T A 4 r e n u t a n n e t n a la n r e tx e n a r o F r e w o p C D d eilp p u S elb a c A 5 2 Fuse holders Fuse 25 A DC 13 8 V Red Black Pull the bail Fuse 4 A 3 1 INSTALLATION ACCESSORY CONNECTIONS FRONT PANEL I Headphones PHONES Connect monaural or stereo headphones having a 4 to 32 impedance This jack accepts a 6 3 mm 1 4 diameter 2 conductor mono or 3 conductor stereo plug After connecting the headphones you will hear no sound from the internal or optional external speaker I Microphone MIC Connect a microphone having an impedance between 250 and 600 Fully insert the connector then screw the retaining ring clockwise until secure Compatible microphones include the MC 43S MC 47 MC 52DM MC 60A MC 80 MC 85 and MC 90 Do not use the MC 44 MC 44DM MC 45 MC 45E MC 45DM MC 45DME or MC 53DM microphones REAR PANEL I External Speakers EXT SP1 EXT SP2 This transceiver has 2 independent receivers Thus it can output 2 separate audio signals As a default the transceiver mixes both audio signals internally and outputs them from the internal speaker On the rear panel of the transceiver
230. cy display returns to the receiving frequency of the DX Packet Cluster node SATELLITE OPERATION Amateur satellites receive on one band and transmit on another Unlike in regular operation Satellite mode can handle uplink downlink frequency combinations simultaneously in all operating modes as shown below K N IL P U N W O D K N IL d n a B F H z H M 0 5 z H M 4 4 1 0 3 4 z H M 0 4 4 z H G 2 1 F H z H M 0 5 z H M 4 4 1 0 3 4 z H M 0 4 4 z H G 2 1 Some satellites require a rotator that allows azimuth and elevation control plus a high gain directional antenna The antenna must track the satellite which travels from horizon to horizon Even so many hams have been successfully using fixed omnidirectional antennas If you are using a directional antenna it would be wise to obtain a pass prediction program Doppler Shift is another aspect that you must take into account when working the satellites As a target satellite travels away frequencies on which you will receive change This transceiver has a function that automatically keeps the sum or difference between the two frequencies identical when you change the receive frequency For further information consult Internet Web pages relating to Amateur satellites On Internet search engines use AMSAT as key words to find those
231. d To switch this function ON access Menu No 34 and select ON The default is OFF e sr e v e R g niy e K th gie W M P W d e e p S g niy e K 5 2 0 1 5 4 6 2 0 6 6 4 F F O 8 2 1 0 3 1 2 3 1 N O 2 3 1 0 3 1 8 2 1 43 9 COMMUNICATING AIDS BUG KEY FUNCTION The built in electronic keyer also can be used as a semi automatic key Semi automatic keys are also known as Bugs When this function is ON dots are generated in the normal manner by the electronic keyer Dashes however are manually generated by the operator by holding the keyer paddle closed for the appropriate length of time To switch this function ON access Menu No 35 and select ON The default is OFF Note When the Bug Key function is ON CW Message Memory see below cannot be used CW MESSAGE MEMORY This transceiver has three memory channels for storing CW messages Each memory channel can store approximately 50 characters equivalent of 250 dots These memory channels are ideal for storing contest exchanges that you want to send repeatedly Stored messages can be played back to check message content or for transmitting The electronic keyer has a function that allows you to interrupt playback and manually inject your own keying To switch this function ON access Menu No 30 and select ON The default is OFF The electronic keyer can als
232. de selection by pressing FUNC LSB USB AUTO the transceiver automatically selects the mode LSB for frequencies below 9 5 MHz and USB for frequencies greater than or equal to 9 5 MHz o N le n n a h C ata D e d o m g nita r e p O 0 z H M 5 9 B S L z H M 3 0 0 lt B S L z H M 5 9 z H M 5 9 B S U z H M 0 0 6 1 z H M 5 9 B S L 2 z H M 5 9 B S L 3 z H M 5 9 B S L 8 2 z H M 5 9 B S L The table below is an example of how to add the frequency point of 1 62 MHz AM into memory With this set up the transceiver selects AM mode below 1 62 MHz LSB mode from 1 62 MHz to 9 5 MHz and USB mode from 9 5 MHz to 60 0 MHz o N le n n a h C ata D e d o m g nita r e p O 0 z H M 2 6 1 M A z H M 3 0 0 lt M A z H M 2 6 1 z H M 2 6 1 lt B S L z H M 5 9 z H M 5 9 B S U z H M 0 0 6 1 z H M 5 9 B S L 2 z H M 5 9 B S L 3 z H M 5 9 B S L 8 2 z H M 5 9 B S L 75 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES The transceiver also generates the following warning confirmation and malfunction beeps s p e e B s n a e m ti t a h W p e e b tr o h s d e h c ti p h g i h A d e s s e
233. dently The transceiver therefore allows you to switch between two different environments quickly and easily For example you can configure Menu A for DXing and contesting while Menu B is for the relaxed local ragchewing By switching from Menu A to Menu B you can instantly change the Menu configuration and key assignment to suit your current operating style Or two operators may share a single transceiver by dedicating one Menu to each operator Both operators can always enjoy their own configuration MENU ACCESS 1 Press MENU The Menu No and setting appear on the main dot matrix display and the explanation of the menu appears on the sub dot matrix display 2 Press A B to select Menu A or Menu B A or B appears indicating which Menu is selected 3 Turn the MULTI CH control to select the desired Menu No Each time you change the Menu No a different scrolling message appears on the sub dot matrix display describing the Menu No You will see PUSH SUB if there are sub menus in the Menu No Pressing SUB allows you to select from among the sub menus Press MAIN to exit the sub menu selection 4 Press Mic UP DWN to select a parameter 5 Press MENU to exit Menu mode QUICK MENU Because the number of functions this transceiver provides is extraordinary there are numerous items in each Menu If you find accessing desired Menu Nos to be too time consu
234. dependent repeater offset frequency for the sub receiver if necessary Refer to FM REPEATER OPERATION page 32 for details REVERSE FUNCTION Press TF SET to switch the sub receiver Reverse function ON or OFF R appears while the Reverse function is active on the sub receiver Refer to REVERSE FUNCTION page 34 for details 48 10 SUB RECEIVER AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK ASC You can also use ASC functions on the 144 MHz and 430 440 MHz bands of the sub receiver While using a repeater ASC periodically monitors the strength of the uplink frequency to check the signals Press and hold TF SET until R appears on the SUB band display Refer to AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK page 34 for function and control details TRANSMITTING A TONE You can assign another Tone to the sub receiver Refer to TRANSMITTING A TONE page 33 for function and control details MEMORY You can also utilize all the memory functions page 58 including the Quick Memory function page 64 while you are operating the sub receiver However the operating frequency range is limited to the sub receiver s frequency coverage You cannot recall any memory channels that are outside the sub receiver s frequency coverage These channels are automatically skipped when they are recalled on the sub receiver 49 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS PACKET RADIO Packet is a unit of data transmitted as a whole from one comp
235. e For example s PLAY BACK and AP 1 appear while playing back the message in channel 1 To interrupt playback press CLR 5 To play back another message in sequence press the corresponding key 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC or 3 CH3 REC while the first message is being played Up to 3 channels can be queued 6 If you pressed SEND or Mic PTT in step 3 press SEND again or release Mic PTT I Erasing a Recorded Message 1 Press FUNC then 1 CH1 REC or 2 CH2 REC or 3 CH3 REC to select the message which you want to erase REC WAIT and APn appear where n represents the channel number 2 To erase the recorded message press and hold the same key as in step 1 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC or 3 CH3 REC and press CLR at the same time A beep sounds and the message is erased I Changing Inter message Interval Time For repetitive message playback you can change the interval between each series of messages Use Menu No 29B and select the time in the range of 0 to 60 seconds I Changing Playback Volume Turning the MAIN AF or SUB AF control does not change the volume for playback To change the volume access Menu No 14 to select the playback volume level from OFF and 1 to 9 91 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES VS 3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER OPTIONAL Install the optional VS 3 unit to use this function Each time you change the transc
236. e G 0 0 0 2 S T 0 0 0 2 B S T X 0 0 0 2 S T e d o M M F E 3 F M A E 3 A W C A 1 A B S U B S L E 3 J D 2 F D 2 F K S F D 1 F sle n n a h c y r o m e m f o r e b m u N 0 0 3 e c n a d e p m i a n n e t n A 0 5 0 5 1 7 6 1 r e n u T a n n e t n A h ti w e g a tlo V ylp p u S V 8 3 1 C D 5 1 d o h t e m g nid n u o r G d n u o r g e vit a g e N t n e rr u C x a m ti m s n a r T s s el r o A 5 0 2 la n gis o n e vie c e R s s el r o A 6 2 e g n a r e r u t a r e p m e t elb a s U 0 1 0 5 C 4 1 C 2 2 1 F F 0 1 ytilib a ts y c n e u q e r F 0 5 C C nia M nih ti w e d o m X T M F 0 1 x 5 0 6 z H k 2 nih ti w e d o m r e h t O 0 1 x 5 0 6 m p p 5 0 b u S nih ti W 0 1 x 5 0 6 z H 0 0 6 e r u t a r e p m e t m o o r t a y c a r u c c a y c n e u q e r F nih ti W m p p 5 0 d e d ulc ni s n oitc ejo r P D x H x W s n ois n e m i D ni 1 6 4 1 x ni 1 2
237. e h C y r a s s e c e n s a tc e rr o C a n n e t n a e h t f o R W S e h t e c u d e R m e ts y s o t 2 1 a e s u r o e g a tlo v t u p ni e h t tc e rr o C y r e tt a b V 6 1 a s a h t a h t ylp p u s r e w o p C D a e s U t a A 5 0 2 n a h t e r o m f o g nit a r t n e rr u c C D V 8 3 1 2 7 1 2 2 s a h r e vie c s n a rt e h T r e w o p ti m s n a rt w ol 1 2 w ol o o t t e s si nia g e n o h p o r ci m e h T s n oitc e n n o c m e ts y s a n n e t n a r o o P R W S h gih g nis u a c e r a 1 2 e s a e r c ni e d o m M A r o B S S ni n e h W nia g e n o h p o r ci m e h t s n oitc e n n o c a n n e t n a e h t k c e h C si r e n u t a n n e t n a e h t t a h t m rif n o C R W S w ol a g nitr o p e r 0 2 2 7 t o n s e o d X O V e t a r e p o w ol o o t t e s si nia g X O V e h T nia g X O V e h t e s a e r c n I 9 3 r eifilp m a r a e niL F H e t a r e p o t o n s e o d 1 2 si y ale r lo rt n o c r eifilp m a r a e nil e h T F F O e h T E T O M E R si g ni
238. e p ytll A s s el r o V M A B d 0 1 N S b u S 5 5 1 z H M 6 4 1 4 4 1 s e p yt E ll A s s el r o V 5 2 2 z H M 8 4 1 4 4 1 e p yt K s s el r o V 5 5 1 z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 s e p yt E ll A s s el r o V 5 5 1 z H M 0 5 4 8 3 4 e p yt K s s el r o V M F D A N I S B d 2 1 8 2 0 z H M 6 4 1 4 4 1 s e p yt E ll A s s el r o V 0 4 0 z H M 8 4 1 4 4 1 e p yt K s s el r o V 8 2 0 z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 s e p yt E ll A s s el r o V 8 2 0 z H M 0 5 4 8 3 4 e p yt K s s el r o V ytivitc ele S B S S z H 0 0 3 t u c w o L z H 0 0 6 2 t u c i H nia M z H k 4 4 B d 0 6 z H k 2 2 B d 6 M A z H 0 0 1 t u c w o L z H 0 0 0 3 t u c i H z H k 0 2 1 B d 0 5 z H k 0 6 B d 6 M F z H k 0 5 2 B d 0 5 z H k 0 2 1 B d 6 M A b u S z H k 0 5 2 B d 0 5 z H k 0 2 1 B d 6 M F z H k 0 5 2 B d 0 5 z H k 0 2 1 B d 6 n oitc e
239. e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P 9 0 0 0 0 0 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 V G 1 P 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 V G r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 V G 1 P 1 P 1 P R V y e k 2 E C I O V r o 1 E C I O V e h t s e t alu m E s r e t e m a r a P 1 P 1 E C I O V 0 2 E C I O V 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 V R 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 X V s u t a ts n oitc n u f X O V e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O X O V 0 N O X O V 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 V X 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 V X r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 V X 1 P T X s u t a ts n oitc n u f T I X e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O T I X 0 N O T I X 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 X T 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 X T r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 X T 1 P ADDENDUM This supplement provides information not available at the time the instruction manual was printed and or corrects erroneous information a
240. e t e m a r a p e m it y ale d X T e h T t e s yltc e rr o c ni s a w P C M C N T 1 2 3 4 5 sih t g nis u s n oitc e n n o c lla k c e h c e R d n a la u n a m P C M C N T r u o y la u n a m s a la u n a m e r a w d r a h r e t u p m o c r u o y s e c n e r e f e r s n oitc n u f T I X d n a T I R e h t t a h t m rif n o C u o y t a h t m rif n o C F F O d e h cti w s e r a y c n e u q e rf tilp s g nit a r e p o T O N e r a u n e M g nis u sle v el X R d n a X T ts ujd A n o slo rt n o c le v el d n a D 0 5 B 0 5 s o N P C M C N T r u o y r o a n n e t n a r u o y e t a c ole r t n eir o e R nia g a n n e t n a r u o y e s a e r c ni o t e m it y ale d X T P C M C N T e h t t e S s m 0 0 3 n a h t e r o m 5 9 4 9 0 4 8 3 0 5 t a st p m e tt A e h t g nillo rt n o c e h t h ti w r e vie c s n a rt e v a h r e t u p m o c d elia f 1 2 stc e n n o c t a h t elb a c e h t h ti w m elb o r P 0 0 0 2 B S T X 0 0 0 2 S T e h t o t C P e h t r u o y nit
241. e transmit power even while transmitting 1 Press PWR TX MONI The current transmit power appears CAR MIC TX MONI PWR DELAY KEY PF F LOCK A 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC 3 CH3 REC 4 TONE SEL 5 METER 6 CTCSS SEL 7 NB LEVEL 8 AGC OFF 9 FINE STEP DCS SEL 0 SHIFT OFFSET ENT SEND PHONES MIC AT ANT1 2 PROC LEVEL VOX ATT PRE LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL MANUAL LO WIDTH HI SHIFT N R A N B C FUNC CLR MAIN AUTO CAR TX MONI DELAY NAR REV MIC PWR KEY LSB USB CW FSK FM AM DISP SEL 1MHz CTRL MEN M HF VHE UHF ALL MO 2 Turn the MULTI CH control counterclockwise to reduce the power or clockwise to increase the power CH MULTI CALL C IN UTO SB SB SUB SEL 1MHz CTRL MR M VFO MG SEL M IN M IN QUICK MEMO SATL A B M S REV TRACE MAIN MANUAL RF AF SQL SUB CH MULTI BC MAIN GAIN VFO CH VFO M A B SPLIT MENU TF SET MAIN SUB SG SEL SCAN RIT CW TUNE 9 6k STA RIT SUB CON XIT ALT SET CLEAR P C T _ HF VHE UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS 2000 The selectable range differs depending on the current band and mode 3 Press PWR TX MONI to complete the setting Note You may access Menu No 23 FINE TRANSMIT POWER TUNING and select ON press
242. e SUB receiver LED lights orange Turn to adjust the volume for the sub receiver 2 LO WIDTH control Turn clockwise counterclockwise to increase decrease the value for the low cut off DSP filter frequency or the filter bandwidth CW FSK The selected value appears on the main dot matrix display page 55 3 HI SHIFT control Turn clockwise counterclockwise to increase decrease the value for the high cut off DSP filter frequency or the Shift frequency The selected value appears on the sub dot matrix display page 55 4 MAIN band LED Lights green while the main transceiver s squelch is open Lights red while transmitting on the main transceiver s VFO band 5 SUB band LED Lights green while the sub receiver s squelch is open Lights red while transmitting on the sub receiver s VFO band 13 4 GETTING ACQUAINTED REAR PANEL EXT SP2 8 PANEL COM ANT 2 ANT 1 ANT 144 AT ANT 1 2G DC 13 8V ANT 430 EXT SP1 8 ACC2 EXT CONT REMOTE HF RX ANT PADDLE KEY GND 2 1 1 9 10 12 13 14 15 11 3 2 4 5 8 6 7 q ANT 1 and ANT 2 connectors Connect your primary HF 50 MHz antenna to ANT 1 If you are using 2 antennas for the HF 50 MHz band connect the secondary antenna to the ANT 2 connector w GND post Connect a heavy gauge wire or copper strap between the ground post and the nearest earth ground page 1 e KEY and PADDLE jacks The PADDLE jac
243. e Speech Processor function is ON it becomes the Speech Processor output level adjustment key page 40 Press FUNC MIC CAR to adjust the carrier level for CW FSK and AM mode page 20 7 PWR TX MONI key Press to adjust the output power page 20 Press FUNC PWR TX MONI to monitor your transmission signal page 79 8 KEY DELAY key Press to adjust the internal electronic keyer speed Press FUNC KEY DELAY to adjust the VOX delay time or break in time Full break in Semi break in time for CW mode page 42 10 4 GETTING ACQUAINTED PF F LOCK A 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC 3 CH3 REC 4 TONE SEL 5 METER 6 CTCSS SEL 7 NB LEVEL 8 AGC OFF 9 FINE STEP DCS SEL 0 SHIFT OFFSET ENT SEND PHONES MIC AT ANT1 2 PROC LEVEL VOX ATT PRE LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL MANUAL LO WIDTH HI SHIFT N R A N B C FUNC CALL C IN CLR MAIN AUTO CAR TX MONI DELAY NAR REV MIC PWR KEY LSB USB CW FSK FM AM SUB DISP SEL 1MHz CTRL MR MG SEL M IN QUICK MEMO M S REV TRACE MAIN MANUAL RF AF SQL SUB CH MULTI BC MAIN GAIN VFO CH MENU TF SET MAIN SUB SG SEL SCAN M VFO M IN RIT CW TUNE 9 6k STA RIT SUB CON XIT ALT SET CLEAR P C T _ HF VHF UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS 2000 SATL A B VFO M SPLIT A
244. e conditions of communicating across the solar system with spacecraft during their missions PSK31 was developed by an RTTY enthusiast G3PLX in the Great Britain The operating technique is very similar to the conventional Baudot RTTY although more sensitive fine tuning is required as a PSK31 signal requires a tuning accuracy of a few Hertz A special feature of PSK31 is that it allows the entire ASCII character set including the back space character Your MCP should handle some or all of the above modes For available modes on your MCP consult the instruction manual for the MCP For the cable connections see MCP AND TNC page 95 On most HF bands audio frequency shift keying AFSK is used for the above modes This method of modulation uses audio tones therefore either LSB or USB mode should be selected Traditionally LSB is used similar to RTTY with the exception of AMTOR which is normally operated in USB AMTOR activity can be found on or near 14075 and 3637 5 kHz These are also good starting places when searching for PacTOR CLOVER G TOR or PSK31 stations Note When using SSB mode for digital operation use a fast AGC setting and switch your Speech Processor OFF SLOW SCAN TV FACSIMILE Slow scan Television SSTV is a popular application for transmitting still images over the air from one station to another Instead of trying to describe your station simply showing it is much faster Transmitting imag
245. e interference is present N When RIT function is ON only RIT frequencies change to make the Auto Zero beat adjustment TX SIDETONE RX PITCH FREQUENCY As you send CW you will hear tones from the transceiver speaker These are called transmit TX sidetones Listening to these tones you can monitor what you are transmitting You may also use the tones to ensure that your key contacts are closing the keyer is functioning or to practice sending without actually putting a signal on the air Receive pitch refers to the frequency of CW that you hear after tuning in a CW station On this transceiver the frequency of the sidetone and receive pitch are equal and selectable Access Menu No 31 to select the frequency that is most comfortable for you The selectable range is from 400 Hz to 1000 Hz in steps of 50 Hz To change the volume of the TX sidetone access Menu No 13 The selections range from 1 to 9 and OFF Note The position of the MAIN AF and SUB AF controls do not affect the volume of the TX sidetone 31 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS SPLIT FREQUENCY OPERATION Usually you can communicate with other stations using a single frequency for receiving and transmitting In this case you select only one frequency on either VFO A or VFO B However there are cases where you must select one frequency for receiving and a different frequency for transmitting This requires the use of two VFOs This is referred to as split freq
246. e mode is activated Press FUNC SET P C T to switch the Packet Cluster Tune mode ON or OFF page 53 3 TNC Status Indicators 9 6k LED Lights when the internal TNC is operating at 9600 bps The default operating mode is 1200 bps page 50 STA LED Lights when the internal TNC holds the data in the buffer to transmit CON LED Lights when the internal TNC is connected to another TNC 12 4 GETTING ACQUAINTED PF F LOCK A 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC 3 CH3 REC 4 TONE SEL 5 METER 6 CTCSS SEL 7 NB LEVEL 8 AGC OFF 9 FINE STEP DCS SEL 0 SHIFT OFFSET ENT SEND PHONES MIC AT ANT1 2 PROC LEVEL VOX ATT PRE LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL MANUAL LO WIDTH HI SHIFT N R A N B C FUNC CALL C IN CLR MAIN AUTO CAR TX MONI DELAY NAR REV MIC PWR KEY LSB USB CW FSK FM AM SUB DISP SEL 1MHz CTRL MR MG SEL M IN QUICK MEMO M S REV TRACE MAIN MANUAL RF AF SQL SUB CH MULTI BC MAIN GAIN VFO CH MENU TF SET MAIN SUB SG SEL SCAN M VFO M IN RIT CW TUNE 9 6k STA RIT SUB CON XIT ALT SET CLEAR P C T _ HF VHF UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS 2000 SATL A B VFO M SPLIT A B 47 46 54 55 44 45 53 52 51 50 49 48 4 RIT SUB control After switching the RIT or XIT function ON t
247. e of the message Use Menu No 29B and select the time in the range of 0 to 60 seconds in steps of 1 second Note Menu Nos 29A and 29B settings are shared with the voice communication modes when the optional DRU 3A is installed I Changing the Sidetone Volume Turning the MAIN AF or SUB AF control does not change the CW sidetone playback volume To change the CW sidetone volume access Menu No 13 and select OFF or 1 to 9 I Insert Keying If you operate a CW keyer manually while playing back a recorded CW message the transceiver stops playing back the message However during contests or regular QSOs you may sometimes want to insert a different number or message at a certain point in the recorded message In this case first record the CW message as usual page 43 without the number or message you want to insert Then access Menu No 30 and select ON Now if you operate a CW keyer while you play back a recorded message the transceiver pauses the playback of the recorded message instead of stopping it When you finish sending the number or message with the keyer the transceiver resumes playback of the message FREQUENCY CORRECTION FOR CW If you operate both SSB and CW modes you would sometimes use SSB mode USB or LSB just to watch and listen CW signals It is fine just to monitor those CW signals but you have experienced that changing the mode from SSB to CW results losing the target CW signal This is because
248. e squelch threshold Scan may fail to stop at a channel where a signal is present If this happens turn the SQL control slightly counterclockwise N Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions GROUP SCAN For the purpose of Group Scan the 300 memory channels can be divided into 10 groups so that you can select one or more groups to be scanned depending on the situation When you store frequency data in a memory channel page 58 the transceiver automatically adds the default Group 0 zero to the memory channel data To recall the existing memory channel data and revise the Group number 1 Press M IN to enter Memory Scroll mode 2 Select the desired memory channel by turning the MULTI CH control 3 Press DISP The Memory Name input prompt appears Press DISP again to skip the input or enter a Memory Name using and MAIN or SUB page 63 4 Press the desired Group number 0 to 9 using the numeric keypad The selected Group number appears in a larger font Note You can select only one of 10 groups 0 to 9 for each memory channel 5 Press M IN to store and overwrite the new channel data to the memory channel 6 Repeat steps 2 through 6 for each memory channel you want to assign to a specific group You can select a maximum of 10 groups and sequentially scan the channels that belong to those groups Group Scan starts with the smallest group number and repeats t
249. e table below The S meter and FILTER scales appear when the main transceiver is in receive mode and the PWR meter appears when it is in transmit mode Each press of 5 METER switches among the ALC SWR and COMP meters Peak readings for the S meter ALC SWR COMP and PWR functions are held momentarily r ete M d e r u s a e M sI ta h W S sla n gis d e vie c e r f o h t g n e rt S R W P r e w o p t u p t u o ti m s n a r T C L A s u t a ts lo rt n o c le v el cit a m o t u A R W S oit a r e v a w g nid n a ts m e ts y s a n n e t n A P M O C g nis u n e h w le v el n ois s e r p m o c h c e e p S 0 4 e g a p r o s s e c o r P h c e e p S e h t R E T L I F h t di w r e tlif P S D Note N The COMP meter functions only when the Speech Processor is ON for SSB FM or AM mode N The PWR indicator shows the output power level as a percentage on the 1 2 GHz band N The SWR meter works only for ANT 1 and ANT 2 HF 50 MHz band N Peak Hold readings cannot be deactivated 5 OPERATING BASICS 20 TRANSMITTING For voice communications press SEND or press and hold Mic PTT then speak into the microphone in your normal tone of voice When you finish speaking press SEND again or release Mic PTT To transmit CW press VOX LEVEL to swi
250. ect a faster time constant turn the MULTI CH control clockwise The bar indicator moves from S low to F ast 3 If you want to turn the AGC OFF press FUNC 8 AGC OFF Note You cannot adjust the AGC time constant on the sub receiver 39 9 COMMUNICATING AIDS TRANSMITTING VOX VOICE OPERATED TRANSMIT VOX eliminates the necessity of manually switching to the transmit mode each time you want to transmit The transceiver automatically switches to transmit mode when the VOX circuitry senses that you have begun speaking into the microphone When using VOX develop the habit of pausing between thoughts to allow the transceiver to drop back to receive mode briefly You will then hear if anybody wants to interrupt plus you will have a short period to gather your thoughts before speaking again Your listeners will appreciate your consideration as well as respect your more articulate conversation VOX can be switched ON and OFF independently for CW and the other modes excluding FSK Press VOX LEVEL to toggle between VOX ON and OFF The VOX LED lights I Microphone Input Level To enjoy the VOX function take the time to properly adjust the gain of the VOX circuit This level controls the capability of the VOX circuit to detect the presence or absence of your voice In CW mode this level cannot be adjusted 1 Select USB LSB FM or AM mode 2 Press VOX LEVEL to switch the VOX function ON The
251. eiv e R t a h w g nid n a ts r e d n u r e tf A T E S E R fI t e s e R laitr a P a o d ts ol e b lli w a t a d t e s e R llu F a o d s nia m e r m elb o r p e h t 2 2 9 e h t N O g nih cti w s r e tf A la n r e t ni e h t r e vie c s n a rt e h t o t st e s e r C N T s e ula v tlu a f e d y r o tc a f m uih til p u k c a b C N T la n r e t ni e h T w ol o o t si e g a tlo v y r e tt a b r u o y y b d ella ts ni y r e tt a b w e n a e v a H a t a r o r ela e d D O O W N E K D O O W N E K D O O W N E K D O O W N E K D O O W N E K r e t n e C e civ r e S 9 9 s e o d r e vie c s n a rt e h T yltc e rr o c d n o p s e r t o n y e k g nis s e r p r e tf a g nin r u t r o s n oit a nib m o c s n oitc u rts ni r e p slo rt n o c la u n a m sih t ni 1 2 3 4 g nie b t o n e r a s e r u d e c o r P yle sic e r p d e w ollo f si n oitc n u f k c o L y c n e u q e r F e h T N O sti d n a r o s s e c o r p o r ci m e h T g nitt e s e r d e e n y r o m e m e r a r e vie c s n a rt e h t n o s y e k e h T e
252. eive data using either Quick memory channel 0 or the VFO 1 Switch ON the Transfer function of each transceiver On the TS 2000 X access Menu No 52 and select ON For the compatible transceiver refer to the instruction manual that came with the transceiver 2 On the Slave access Menu No 53 and select either OFF QUICK MEMO channel 0 or ON the VFO The default is OFF QUICK MEMO 3 On the Master perform the appropriate operation to send data For the correct method refer to the instruction manual that came with the transceiver Note N If you always use the TS 2000 X for receiving only activate the TX Inhibit function accessing Menu No 54 to avoid unintentional transmission N When the Slave receives data using the VFO programmed with a simplex frequency the received data replaces the data on both VFOs On the Slave both RIT and XIT are set to OFF N When the Slave receives data using the VFOs programmed with split frequencies the received data replaces the data only on the TX side of the VFO On the Slave XIT is set to OFF but RIT is not changed 81 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES COMPUTER CONTROL By connecting this transceiver to a computer you can change the computer into an electronic console from which you can remotely control functions of the transceiver This capability makes remote operation of your transceiver possible from across the room from another room or when coupled wi
253. eiver mode such as VFO A B or Memory Recall the transceiver automatically announces the new mode In addition you can program the front panel PF key so that pressing it makes the transceiver announce the displayed information If you have the optional MC 47 microphone you can program one of the Mic PF keys for this function as well For an explanation on how to install the VS 3 unit refer to INSTALLING OPTIONS page 97 The table below indicates what the transceiver automatically announces when it changes the settings d e s s e r P y e K n oita r e p O tn e m e c n u o n n A B A A O F V y c n e u q e rf O F V B O F V e g n a h c d n a B L L A C le n n a h c lla C y c n e u q e rf lla C M O F V r o O F V y r o m e M lla c e R y c n e u q e rf O F V r o o N y r o m e M R M y c n e u q e rf U N E M o N u n e M n oitc ele s o N u n e M r e b m u n d e tc ele S r e t e m a r a p N I M y r o m e M e d o m llo r c S le n n a h C R M tigid 3 o N y r o m e M y c n e u q e r F T N E y c n e u q e r F y rt n e r e t n E H C I T L U M lo rt n o c
254. eiving Data 80 COMPUTER CONTROL 81 SETTING UP 81 Equipment Needed 81 Connections 81 COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS 81 REMOTE MICROPHONE CONTROLLER 81 WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL K type ONLY 82 PREPARATION 82 CONTROL OPERATION 82 SKY COMMAND II K type ONLY 83 PREPARATION 83 CONTROL OPERATION 84 USING TH D7A AS A COMMANDER 85 CONTROL OPERATION 85 USING ANOTHER TS 2000 AS A COMMANDER 87 USING A SEPARATE TRANSPORTER 88 REPEATER FUNCTION K type ONLY 88 LOCK BAND REPEATER 88 CROSS BAND REPEATER 88 HANG TIME FOR REPEATER FUNCTION 88 DRU 3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT OPTIONAL 89 RECORDING MESSAGES 89 MESSAGE PLAYBACK 89 Checking Messages 89
255. entry to the transceiver Take care not to drop objects or spill liquid into the transceiver through enclosure openings Metal objects such as hairpins or needles inserted into the transceiver may contact voltages resulting in serious electrical shocks Never permit children to insert any objects into the transceiver Do not attempt to defeat methods used for grounding and electrical polarization in the transceiver particularly involving the power input cable Adequately ground all outdoor antennas for this transceiver using approved methods Grounding helps protect against voltage surges caused by lightning It also reduces the chance of a build up of static charge EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS GROUND CLAMPS POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM Minimum recommended distance for an outdoor antenna from power lines is one and one half times the vertical height of the associated antenna support structure This distance allows adequate clearance from the power lines if the support structure fails for any reason Locate the transceiver so as not to interfere with its ventilation Do not place books or other equipment on the transceiver that may impede the free movement of air Allow a minimum of 4 inches 10 cm between the rear of the transceiver and the wall or operating desk shelf
256. er to Memory VFO Split Operation page 60 under MEMORY FEATURES Note You cannot perform SPLIT operation on the sub receiver it has only one VFO TF SET TRANSMIT FREQUENCY SET TF SET allows you to temporarily switch your transmit frequency and receive frequency Canceling this function immediately restores the original transmit and receive frequencies By activating TF SET you can listen on your transmit frequency and change it while listening This allows you to check whether or not the newly selected transmit frequency is free of interference 1 Configure split frequency operation as explained in the previous section 2 Press and hold TF SET 3 While holding down TF SET change the operating frequency by turning the Tuning control or by pressing Mic UP DWN The transceiver receives on the frequency that you select but the frequency shown on the sub display stays unchanged 4 Release TF SET You are now receiving again on your original receive frequency Successfully contacting a DX station in a pileup often depends on making a well timed call on a clear frequency That is it is important to select a relatively clear transmit frequency and to transmit at the exact instant when the DX station is listening but the majority of the groups aren t transmitting Switch your receive and transmit frequencies by using TF SET and listen You will soon learn the rhythm of the DX station a
257. es over the air requires a scan converter besides a transceiver A scan converter transforms images taken with a video camera into audio signals that can be fed into your transceiver The recipient s scan converter transforms audio signals back into video images so that he or she can view them on a TV set Nowadays instead of a scan converter many hams use a personal computer a software application and an interface attached to the transceiver This is much cheaper more flexible and does not require a TV set In recent years many low cost digital cameras have become available You can transfer images from these cameras into your computer For further information consult reference books about Amateur Radio The frequencies measured in kHz commonly used for SSTV operation are listed below a d a n a C A S U 1 n oig e R U R A a cirf A e p o r u E 7 5 8 3 5 4 8 3 0 4 7 3 0 3 7 3 1 7 1 7 5 4 0 7 5 3 0 7 3 3 2 4 1 0 3 2 4 1 5 3 2 4 1 5 2 2 4 1 0 4 3 1 2 5 4 3 1 2 5 3 3 1 2 0 8 6 8 2 5 8 6 8 2 5 7 6 8 2 0 0 5 5 4 1 Fax facsimile is one of the original image transmission modes Using this mode allows you to exchange more detailed graphics than SSTV Amateur Radio fax functions much like old analog fax systems It scans paper and converts acquired image data into a series of tones
258. ess FUNC 9 FINE STEP Select 5 kHz 6 25 kHz 10 kHz 12 5 kHz 15 kHz 20 kHz 25 kHz 30 kHz 50 kHz or 100 kHz for FM AM and 1 kHz 2 5 kHz 5 kHz or 10 kHz for the other modes The default step size is 5 kHz for SSB CW FSK AM and 10 kHz for FM below 60 MHz When changing the operating frequency by using the MULTI CH control frequencies are rounded such that new frequencies are multiples of the frequency step size To cancel this function access Menu No 04 and select OFF default is ON Within the AM broadcast band the step size automatically defaults to the frequency step value in Menu No 05 This step size can be switched between 9 kHz all E types ON and 5 kHz K type OFF via Menu No 05 Note The programmed frequency step size for the MULTI CH control is stored independently for the HF 50 MHz 144 MHz 430 440 MHz and 1 2 GHz bands main transceiver You can also set a different frequency step size for SSB CW FSK AM and FM modes The sub receiver also stores the independent frequency step size for 118 MHz K type only 144 MHz 300 MHz K type only and 430 440 MHz bands You can also set a different frequency step size for FM and AM 38 9 COMMUNICATING AIDS I Fine Tuning The default step value when turning the Tuning control to change the frequency is 10 Hz for SSB CW and FSK modes and 100 Hz for FM and AM modes However you can change the step size to 1 Hz for SSB CW
259. ethod and the number of selectable codes For DCS you can select from 104 different codes listed in the table below 1 Press A B to select VFO A or VFO B tA or tB appears to show which VFO is selected 2 Select a band 3 Select an operating frequency 4 Press FM AM NAR to select FM mode FM appears 5 Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch 6 Press DCS SEL to switch the DCS function ON or OFF DCS appears when the function is ON 7 Press FUNC DCS SEL The current DCS code appears The default is 023 8 Turn the MULTI CH control to select the appropriate DCS code The available DCS codes are listed in the following table 3 2 0 5 6 0 2 3 1 5 0 2 5 5 2 1 3 3 3 1 4 5 6 4 2 1 6 1 3 7 5 2 0 1 7 0 4 3 1 2 1 2 1 6 2 2 3 3 3 2 4 6 6 4 4 2 6 2 3 7 6 2 0 2 7 0 3 4 1 3 2 2 3 6 2 3 4 3 1 3 4 3 0 5 7 2 6 4 3 7 1 3 0 3 7 0 5 4 1 5 2 2 5 6 2 6 4 3 2 3 4 6 0 5 1 3 6 3 4 7 2 3 0 4 7 0 2 5 1 6 2 2 6 6 2 1 5 3 5 4 4 6 1 5 2 3 6 4 5 7 6 3 0 4 1 1 5 5 1 3 4 2 1 7 2 6 5 3 6 4 4 3 2 5 4 5 6 3 4 0 5 1 1 6 5 1 4 4 2 4 7 2 4 6 3 2 5 4 6 2 5 2 6 6 7 4 0 6 1 1 2 6 1 5 4 2 6 0 3 5 6 3 4 5 4 2 3 5 4 6 6 1 5 0 2 2 1 5 6 1 6 4 2 1 1 3 1 7
260. f the TX Monitor function page 79 is OFF the transmission signal may be monitored through the speaker INTERNAL BEATS On some spots of the transceiver bands the S meter moves or you cannot receive any signals This is inevitable when you use superheterodyne receivers You may notice the signals on the following spots of the bands On the main transceiver 51 259 MHz 430 151 MHz 432 209 MHz 436 799 MHz 439 298 MHz 442 440 MHz K type only 1247 999 MHz and 1269 387 MHz When the sub receiver frequency is 144 000 MHz 146 663 MHz K type only and 436 249 MHz When the sub receiver frequency is 440 000 MHz 437 333 MHz and 444 315 MHz K type only Note When the sub receiver frequency changes the above beat frequencies may be changed accordingly In this case turn the sub receiver OFF to remove the internal spurious signals On the sub receiver 144 490 MHz 144 945 MHz 430 150 MHz 436 210 MHz 436 800 MHz 442 020 MHz K type only 449 400 MHz K type only and 429 050 MHz K type only VISUAL SCAN When you have the same VHF band or UHF band for both the main transceiver and the sub receiver the Visual scan may indicate the signals on the bar graph display even if no signal is monitored on the main transceiver This error occurs due to the internal spurious harmonics that are generated by the sub receiver Refer to INTERNAL BEATS above for the frequencies SENSITIVITY K type only While the
261. f each TXC pin 1 2 4 and 6 Circuit of ALC inputs pin 3 5 7 and 8 20 V DC 20 mA max pin 3 pin 5 pin 7 pin 8 o N ni P ni P e m a N n oitc n u F 1 C X T 3 4 r e vie c s n a rt e h t n e h w d e d n u o r G z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 e h t n o sti m s n a rt x a m A m 0 2 V 0 2 C D d n a b 2 C X T 0 5 r e vie c s n a rt e h t n e h w d e d n u o r G d n a b z H M 0 5 e h t n o sti m s n a rt x a m A m 0 2 V 0 2 C D 3 C L A r eifilp m a m o rf t u p ni C L A z H M 0 5 V 7 4 C X T 2 1 r e vie c s n a rt e h t n e h w d e d n u o r G d n a b z H G 2 1 e h t n o sti m s n a rt x a m A m 0 2 V 0 2 C D 5 C L A m o rf t u p ni C L A z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 V 7 r eifilp m a 6 B X T 4 1 r e vie c s n a rt e h t n e h w d e d n u o r G d n a b z H M 4 4 1 e h t n o sti m s n a rt x a m A m 0 2 V 0 2 C D 7 C L A r eifilp m a m o rf t u p ni C L A z H G 2 1 V 7 8 C L A m o rf t u p ni C L A z H M 4 4 1 V 7 r eifilp m a la t e M r e v o c D N G d n u o r G TYPICAL M
262. firming Start End Frequencies Use this procedure to check the start and end frequencies that you stored in channels 290 to 299 1 Press VFO M to enter Memory Recall mode 2 Turn the MULTI CH control or press Mic UP DWN to select a memory channel from 290 to 299 3 Press to check the start frequency and to check the end frequency I Programmable VFO Using the start and end frequencies that you stored in channels 290 to 299 Programmable VFO restricts the frequency range that you can tune with the Tuning control One application of this function is to help you operate within the authorized frequency limits of your license 1 Press VFO M to enter Memory Recall mode 2 Turn the MULTI CH control or press Mic UP DWN to select a memory channel from 290 to 299 Now you can only tune from the start frequency to the end frequency using the Tuning control Note Pressing Mic UP DWN or turning the MULTI CH control results changing the memory channel number while in Programmable VFO mode Memory Channel Lockout You can lock out memory channels that you prefer not to monitor during Memory Scan Memory Scan is described in the next chapter page 68 1 Press VFO M to enter Memory Recall mode 2 Turn the MULTI CH control or press Mic UP DWN to select the memory channel 3 Press CLR momentarily Pressing CLR for more than approximately 2 seconds erases the contents of t
263. front screws to secure the transceiver in place To remove the transceiver from the bracket first remove the front screws then loosen the rear screws slightly and pull the transceiver forward to unlatch it from the bracket Do not install the transceiver so that it is vertically on its side RC 2000 REMOTE PANEL Plug the modular cable from the RC 2000 into the PANEL connector on the TS 2000 X TS B2000 rear panel Access Menu Nos 58 60 to adjust the panel configuration if necessary TS 2000 TS 2000X TS B2000 Rear screw Rear screw Front screw Front screw Make sure the tab faces out G11 2698 XX 99 TROUBLESHOOTING Note N Record the date of purchase serial number and dealer from whom the transceiver was purchased N For your own information retain a written record of any maintenance performed on the transceiver N When claiming warranty service please include a photocopy of the bill of sale or other proof of purchase showing the date of sale CLEANING The keys controls and case of the transceiver are likely to become soiled after extended use Remove the controls from the transceiver and clean them with a neutral detergent and warm water Use a neutral detergent no strong chemicals and a damp cloth to clean the case LITHIUM BATTERY This transceiver uses an EEPROM to store memory channel data menu configurations and all necessary operation parameters So you never have to worry ab
264. function TEMPORARY FREQUENCY CHANGES After recalling a Quick memory channel you can temporarily change the data without overwriting the contents of the channel You can change the frequency even when you select OFF in Menu No 06B 1 Press QUICK MEMO MR 2 Turn the MULTI CH control to select a Quick memory channel 0 to 9 3 Change the frequencies and associated data 4 To store the changed data in the Quick memory press QUICK MEMO M IN This action stores the new data in the current channel and bumps the old frequency to the next higher Quick memory channel 5 To exit press QUICK MEMO MR again Note Memory channel data can also be changed while using the TF SET function QUICK MEMORY VFO TRANSFER This function copies the contents of the recalled memory channel to the VFO 1 Recall a Quick Memory channel 2 Press Ms s s s sVFO MG SEL Note Pressing Ms s s s sVFO MG SEL after temporarily changing the recalled data copies the new data to the VFO 66 SCAN Scan is a useful function for hands off monitoring of your favorite frequencies By becoming comfortable with all types of Scan you will increase your operating efficiency This transceiver provides the following types of scans e p y T n a c S e s o p r u P la m r o N n a c S n a c S O F V e h t f o d n a b e rit n e e h t s n a c S d e tc ele s u o y y
265. function works even if the transceiver is scanning N The APO timer starts counting down the timer when no key presses no control adjustments and no command RS 232C port sequences are detected AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER As explained in ANTENNA CONNECTION page 1 matching the impedance of the coaxial cable and antenna is important To adjust the impedance between the antenna and the transceiver you have the choice of using the internal tuner or an external tuner This section describes how to use the internal tuner For the external tuner consult the instruction manual that comes with the tuner 1 Select the transmit frequency 2 Press FUNC AT ANT1 2 to select ANT 1 or ANT 2 If an external tuner is connected to the ANT 1 connector select ANT 2 to use the internal antenna tuner The internal antenna tuner is automatically bypassed if an external antenna tuner is connected to ANT 1 3 Press AT ANT1 2 momentarily AT appears indicating that the internal tuner is in line not bypassed FILTE R S 1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60dB PW R 10 25 50 100 W AL C 4 Press AT ANT1 2 for more than one second CW mode is selected and tuning begins blinks and the MAIN band LED lights red To cancel tuning press AT ANT1 2 again If the SWR of the antenna system is extremely high more than 10 1 an alarm SWR in Morse c
266. ge 42 45 SUB RECEIVER SUB RECEIVER The TS 2000 X transceiver is equipped with 2 independent receivers The main transceiver can receive from 30 kHz to the UHF band or 1 2 GHz band if the optional UT 20 is installed while the sub receiver can receive signals in FM or AM mode on the VHF 144 MHz or UHF 430 440MHz band You can assign the sub receiver to monitor the local repeater activities or your club channel while you are operating on the HF 50MHz or VHF UHF Optional 1 2 GHz bands with the main transceiver Since the TS 2000 also has a built in TNC you can assign the sub receiver to monitor the local DX Packet Cluster channel activities without using an external TNC If a new DX station is reported to the DX Packet Cluster the transceiver automatically displays the DX station data If desired you can further transfer the DX frequency information to the main tranceiver to watch and instantly make contact with the DX station page 53 TX BAND AND CONTROL BAND In this manual the frequency on the left of the display is referred to as the MAIN band and the frequency on the right is called the SUB band To understand how to control the MAIN band and SUB band frequencies and functions please note the differences between the TX band and the Control band below TX BAND Press MAIN to display the and icons on the MAIN band When is on the MAIN band display the MAIN band is curren
267. h the Microphone Remote function N The Repeater function is available for K type models only N Normally pressing 2 cycles through Tone CTCSS DCS and OFF However if 1750 Hz is selected for Tone pressing 2 will only transmit the 1750 Hz tone To return to Tone CTCSS DCS mode you must first deselect 1750 Hz for Tone N Press D to enter FUNC mode to use the 2nd function of the DTMF keys Pressing D while in FUNC mode will exit FUNC mode N FUNC on the transceiver works independently from the Microphone Remote FUNC key 82 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL K type ONLY If you have a Kenwood TH D7A handheld transceiver you can use it to remotely control the 144 MHz and 440 MHz bands of the TS 2000 X transceiver using FM mode You will be controlling one band on the TS 2000 X transceiver while sending DTMF tones to the other band from the remote control transceiver This function is useful for example when you want to control the VHF UHF FM repeater function of the TS 2000 X transceiver from a location outside your home or vehicle Note N To remotely control the TS 2000 X you can also use a handheld transceiver which does not have a remote control function but a DTMF function You must however manually send DTMF tones for control code strings Skip steps 1 and 3 in PREPARATION below N FCC rules permit you to send control codes only on the 440 MHz band PREPA
268. h the slow down frequency point s Note N During the Program Scan you can turn the RIT SUB control to adjust the scanning speed Turn the control clockwise counter clockwise to slow down speed up the scan The Program Scan speed indicator appears on the main dot matrix display during the Program Scan P1 is the fastest speed and P9 is the slowest N You cannot change the Program Scan speed in FM mode N You cannot change the scan speed on the sub receiver N You cannot specify the Program Scan slow down frequency point for FM mode SCAN HOLD This function stops Program Scan for approximately 5 seconds then resumes Scan when you jump to the desired frequency by turning the Tuning control or the MULTI CH control or by pressing Mic UP DWN To use this function access Menu No 09 and select ON The default is OFF MHz SCAN When you operate the main transceiver or sub receiver in VFO mode you can scan an entire 1 MHz frequency range within the current VFO frequency 1 Press VFO M to select VFO mode 2 Select the desired frequency to perform the MHz Scan If you want to scan the entire 145 MHz frequency for example select 145 650 MHz Scan will operate between 145 00000 MHz and 145 99999 MHz 3 Press and hold 1MHz SEL to start the MHz Scan 4 Turn the RIT SUB control to adjust the scan speed 5 To stop the MHz Scan press SCAN SG SEL or CLR Note N You cannot change the MH
269. he memory channel A dot appears beside the right most digit of the memory channel number to indicate the channel has been locked out Repeatedly pressing CLR toggles between adding and removing the channel from the scan list ERASING MEMORY CHANNELS If there are memory channels that you will not recall in the future you may prefer erasing the contents of those channels 1 Press VFO M to enter Memory Recall mode 2 Turn the MULTI CH control or press Mic UP DWN to select the memory channel You can also select a channel by entering a 3 digit number such as 012 using the numeric keys 3 Press and hold CLR for approximately two seconds A long beep sounds to confirm that the channel data has been erased 63 13 MEMORY FEATURES MEMORY CHANNEL NAME You can assign a name to each memory channel A maximum of 7 alpha numeric characters can be stored 1 Press M IN to enter Memory Scroll mode 2 Turn the MULTI CH control or press Mic UP DWN to select a memory channel 3 Press DISP 4 Press or turn the MULTI CH control to select the desired alpha numeric character You can move the cursor to the left by pressing MAIN or to the right by pressing SUB Or you can use an optional DTMF microphone to enter alpha numeric characters Note Alpha numeric entries are limited to those characters shown in the following DTMF character table when you are using a
270. he MAIN band LED lights green or turns off depending on the MAIN SQL setting Note You may adjust the carrier level when necessary Press FUNC MIC CAR to enter the adjustment mode With the key down turn the MULTI CH control so that the ALC meter reads within the ALC zone but does not exceed the upper ALC zone limit Press FUNC MIC CAR again to complete the adjustment AUTO ZERO BEAT Use Auto Zero beat before transmitting to tune in a CW station Auto Zero beat automatically and exactly matches your transmit frequency with the station you are receiving Neglecting to do this will reduce your chances of being heard by the other station 1 Press FUNC RIT CW TUNE to start Auto Zero beat CW TUNE appears Your transmit frequency automatically changes so that the pitch of the received signal exactly matches the TX sidetone RX pitch frequency that you have selected Refer to TX SIDETONE RX PITCH FREQUENCY below When matching is completed CW TUNE disappears If matching is unsuccessful the previous frequency is restored 2 To quit Auto Zero beat press FUNC RIT CW TUNE or CLR Note N You cannot start Auto Zero beat if you have selected 1 0 kHz or wider for the DSP filter bandwidth N When using Auto Zero beat the matching error is within 50 Hz in most cases N Auto Zero beat may fail if the keying speed of the target station is too slow or when som
271. he VFOs resets to the factory default values FULL RESET Perform a Full Reset if you want to erase all the data in all the memory channels In addition this function resets all the settings that you customized to the factory defaults i e menu settings antenna tuner preset data etc Reset the transceiver by pressing A B A confirmation message appears when performing the Full Reset Press A B to proceed Otherwise press any other key to cancel the Full Reset and return to normal operation When you perform the full reset HELLO appears on the display All frequencies modes memory data and AT preset data are set to the factory default values refer to INITIAL SETTINGS above 93 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT COMPUTER The COM connector allows you to directly connect a computer or dumb terminal by using an RS 232C cable terminated with a 9 pin female connector No external hardware interface is required between your computer and the transceiver See APPENDIX page 113 for information related to this connector COM connector Personal computer dumb terminal RS 232C serial port TS 2000 X TS B2000 Straight cable COMPATIBLE TRANSCEIVER When transferring data to or from another TS 2000 X TS 570 or TS 870S directly connect the two transceivers using the COM connectors When transferring data to other KENWOOD transceivers use the optional IF 232C interface uni
272. he sequence for example group 3 group 5 group 7 group 3 1 Select Time operated or Carrier operated mode via Menu No 10 2 Press VFO M to enter Memory Recall mode 3 Turn the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control to adjust the squelch threshold 4 Press FUNC SCAN SG SEL to enter Scan Group Select mode Then using the numeric keypad enter the group numbers you want to scan i e Press 3 for group 3 or press 3 5 7 for groups 3 5 and 7 The selected Memory Groups appear in a larger font 5 Press SCAN SG SEL to exit Scan Group Select mode 6 Press SCAN SG SEL again to start Memory Group Scan Scan ascends up through the channel numbers scan direction cannot be changed To jump to a desired channel while scanning turn the MULTI CH control or press Mic UP DWN 7 To stop Scan press SCAN SG SEL or CLR After using Group Scan press FUNC SCAN SG SEL then DCS SEL to deselect all the Group numbers you selected in step 4 This returns you to All channel Scan factory default Note N If you are operating on the sub receiver and perform the Group Scan the transceiver automatically skips the memory channels that cannot be received by the sub receiver The same conditions apply to the main transceiver N If you have turned the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control clockwise far beyond the squelch threshold Scan may fail to stop at a channel in which a signal is p
273. his is useful when you are waiting for a DX station on a certain frequency but the station may appear on slightly higher or lower frequency VFO SCAN VFO Scan scans the entire frequency range that is available for the current VFO When the Program Scan frequency range is not programmed or no Scan Group is selected for the Program Scan the transceiver also scans the entire frequency range available for the current VFO If one or more Program Scan frequency ranges are programmed in memory channels 290 to 299 1 Press FUNC SCAN SG SEL 2 If one or more memory channels are selected for the Program Scan the selected channels are displayed in a larger font on the main dot matrix display In this case press DCS SEL to temporarily deselect all the channels When there are no Scan Group channels selected VFO SCN MODE appears on the sub dot matrix display 3 Press SCAN SG SEL to return to the current VFO mode 4 Press SCAN SG SEL to start the VFO Scan Note N While scanning you can change the scan speed by turning the RIT SUB control Turn the control clockwise counterclockwise to decrease increase the scan speed The speed indicator appears on the main dot matrix display where P1 is the fastest speed and P9 is the slowest N You cannot change the VFO Scan speed in FM mode N You cannot change the VFO Scan speed on the sub receiver 67 14 SCAN PROGRAM SCAN Program Scan monitors
274. ia Wireless Remote Control page 82 N You can select a tone frequency independent of a CTCSS frequency I Selecting Continuous or Burst Access Menu No 42 to select Continuous or Burst With Continuous selected the transceiver sends the tone continuously during the transmission With Burst selected the transceiver sends a 500 ms tone each time transmission starts When using the 144 430 440 MHz or 1 2 GHz band continuous tones are always transmitted regardless of the selection I Transmitting a 1750 Hz Tone Most repeaters in Europe require transceivers to transmit a 1750 Hz tone With 1750 Hz tone selected pressing 4 TONE SEL causes the transceiver to transmit the 1750 Hz tone Releasing the key ceases transmission of the code Some repeaters in Europe must receive continuous signals for a certain period of time following a 1750 Hz tone This transceiver is capable of remaining in transmit mode for 2 seconds after transmitting the 1750 Hz tone Access Menu No 44 and select ON 34 8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS AUTOMATIC REPEATER OFFSET This function automatically selects an offset direction according to the frequency that you select on the 144 MHz band The transceiver is programmed for offset directions as shown below To obtain an up to date band plan for repeater offset direction contact your national Amateur Radio association Access Menu No 43 and switch the function ON or OFF The def
275. ic Simplex Check of the sub receiver is activated page 34 8 S Appears when the sub receiver meter shows the signal strength level page 46 9 PWR Appears when the sub receiver meter shows the output power level page 20 0 Serves as an S meter to measure and display the received signal strength for the sub receiver It also displays the relative output power when the sub band is selected for the transmission 1 C T T appears when the Tone function of the sub receiver is ON page 33 C T appears when the Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System CTCSS of the sub receiver is ON page 35 2 Appears when the DSP Noise Reduction 1 of the sub receiver is activated page 56 3 PKT Appears when the internal TNC is operating in Packet mode page 49 17 4 GETTING ACQUAINTED 4 PC Appears when the TS 2000 X is being controlled by a PC page 81 5 The main transceiver operating frequency display 6 When the sub receiver is switched ON it shows the receive frequency for the sub receiver However if you are controlling the main transceiver functions such as RIT XIT or SPLIT it is used to display the frequency information for these functions page 45 7 MAIN dot matrix display In the normal operating mode it displays the operating mode for the main transceiver It is also used to display various control information such as menu numbers and settings and the DSP filter
276. ill hear sound only while actually receiving signals The higher the selected squelch level the stronger the signals must be to receive The appropriate squelch level depends on the ambient RF noise conditions Turn the MAIN SQL control when there are no signals present to select the squelch level at which the background noise is just eliminated the MAIN band LED will turn off Many ham operators prefer leaving the MAIN SQL control fully counterclockwise unless operating on a full carrier mode such as FM The squelch level for the main transceiver is preset at the factory to approximately 9 o clock for FM and 11 o clock for SSB and AM MAIN CALL C IN UTO SB SB SUB SEL 1MHz CTRL MR M VFO MG SEL M IN M IN QUICK MEMO SATL A B M S REV TRACE MAIN MANUAL RF AF SQL SUB CH MULTI BC MAIN GAIN VFO CH VFO M A B SPLIT MENU TF SET MAIN SUB SG SEL SCAN RIT CW TUNE 9 6k STA RIT SUB CON XIT ALT SET CLEAR P C T _ HF VHE UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS 2000 AF SQL SELECTING A FREQUENCY Turn the Tuning control clockwise or press Mic UP to increase the frequency Turn the Tuning control counterclockwise or press Mic DWN to decrease the frequency SEL 1MHz CTRL CALL C IN UTO SB SB SUB SEL 1MHz CTRL MR M VFO MG SEL M IN M IN QUICK MEMO SATL A B M S REV TRACE MAIN
277. ilter bandwidth Switch the Packet filter OFF to adjust the DSP filter bandwidth I CW FSK Modes 1 Press CW FSK REV to select CW or FSK mode 2 Press DISP The current filter selection appears 3 Turn the LO WIDTH control clockwise to increase wide the bandwidth or counterclockwise to decrease narrow the bandwidth e d o M z H s n oitc ele S htdi w d n a B tlu afe D z H W C 0 0 4 0 0 3 0 0 2 0 5 1 0 0 1 0 8 0 5 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 6 0 0 5 0 0 6 K S F 0 0 5 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 5 0 5 2 0 0 5 1 4 As for CW you can further adjust the shift frequency for passband Turn the HI SHIFT control to adjust the shift frequency from 400 to 1000 Hz in steps of 50 Hz The default shift frequency is 800 Hz 5 To return the display to the current operating mode press DISP DSP FILTERS KENWOOD digital signal processing DSP technology is used for the functions described in this section Using DSP filtering the TS 2000 frees you from installing many analog filters for each operating mode Additionally you can control the bandwidth cancel the multiple jamming beat and reduce the noise level using DSP filtering technology CHANGING THE RECEIVE FILTER BANDWIDTH For improving interference reduction capability this transceiver also provides IF filters designed using DSP technology When in SSB
278. ing M IN RECALLING A SATELLITE MEMORY CHANNEL 1 Press VFO M VFO CH The MULTI CH LED lights 2 Turn the MULTI CH control to select the desired Satellite Memory channel 3 Press VFO M VFO CH to return to the frequency adjustment mode SATELLITE CHANNEL NAME You can name each Satellite Memory channel using a maximum of 8 alpha numeric characters First store the settings to the Satellite Memory channel above To store the Satellite Channel name 1 Press M IN then turn the MULTI CH control to select the Satellite Memory channel 2 Press DISP 3 An entry cursor appears Select a character by turning MULTI CH control then move the cursor using SUB or MAIN You can also use the other methods to enter the characters Refer to page 63 for details 4 Press M IN to store the name to the Satellite Memory channel Press CLR to quit 5 The stored Satellite Memory name appears on the main dot matrix display QUICK MEMORY IN SATELLITE MODE While in the Satellite mode only 1 Quick Memory channel is available It uses Satellite Memory channel 9 to store the settings To store the settings to the Quick Memory in Satellite mode press QUICK MEMO M IN The settings are stored to Satellite Memory channel 9 To recall the Quick Memory press QUICK MEMO MR or select Satellite Memory channel 9 using the MULTI CH control Satellite Memory channel 9 is recalled CHECKING THE UPLINK FREQ
279. ing one of the 38 standard frequencies The selection you make here will not affect the transmission of the 1750 Hz tone I Selecting a Tone Frequency 1 Press FUNC 4 TONE SEL The current tone frequency appears The default is 88 5 Hz 2 Turn the MULTI CH control to select the appropriate tone frequency The available tone frequencies are listed in the following table 3 Press FUNC 4 TONE SEL to complete the setting o N q e r F z H o N q e r F z H o N q e r F z H o N q e r F z H 1 0 0 7 6 1 1 4 7 9 1 2 5 6 3 1 1 3 8 2 9 1 2 0 9 1 7 2 1 0 0 0 1 2 2 3 1 4 1 2 3 5 3 0 2 3 0 4 4 7 3 1 5 3 0 1 3 2 2 6 4 1 3 3 7 0 1 2 4 0 0 7 7 4 1 2 7 0 1 4 2 4 1 5 1 4 3 1 8 1 2 5 0 7 9 7 5 1 9 0 1 1 5 2 7 6 5 1 5 3 7 5 2 2 6 0 5 2 8 6 1 8 4 1 1 6 2 2 2 6 1 6 3 6 3 3 2 7 0 4 5 8 7 1 8 8 1 1 7 2 9 7 6 1 7 3 8 1 4 2 8 0 5 8 8 8 1 0 3 2 1 8 2 8 3 7 1 8 3 3 0 5 2 9 0 5 1 9 9 1 3 7 2 1 9 2 9 9 7 1 9 3 0 5 7 1 0 1 8 4 9 0 2 8 1 3 1 0 3 2 6 8 1 Note N Use Nos 01 to 39 shown in the table above when selecting tone frequencies v
280. installation This equipment generates uses and can generate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that the interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer for technical assistance This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate iii PRECAUTIONS Please observe the following precautions to prevent fire personal injury and transceiver damage Connect the transceiver only to a power source described in this manual or as marked on the transceiver itself Route all power cables safely Ensure the power cables can neither be stepped upon nor pinched by items placed near or against the cables Pay particular attention to locations near AC receptacles AC outlet strips and points of
281. iver then returns to receive mode Full Break in As soon as the key contacts open the transceiver returns to receive mode USING SEMI BREAK IN OR FULL BREAK IN 1 Press CW FSK REV to select CW mode CW appears 2 Press VOX LEVEL The VOX LED lights 3 Press FUNC KEY DELAY The current setting Full or delay time appears The default is Full Break in 4 Turn the MULTI CH control to select Full Break in or a delay time for Semi Break in Delay time ranges from 5 to 100 50 ms to 1000 ms in steps of 5 5 Begin sending The transceiver automatically switches to transmit mode When FBK Full Break in is selected The transceiver immediately switches to receive mode when the key opens When a delay time is selected The transceiver switches to receive mode after the delay time that you have selected has passed 6 Press FUNC KEY DELAY again Note Full Break in cannot be used with the TL 922 922A linear amplifier ELECTRONIC KEYER This transceiver has a built in electronic keyer that can be used by connecting a keyer paddle to the transceiver s rear panel Refer to Keys for CW PADDLE and KEY page 3 for details regarding this connection The built in keyer supports lambic operation CHANGING KEYING SPEED The keying speed of the electronic keyer is fully adjustable Selecting the appropriate speed is important in order to send error free
282. je r e g a m I r e vie c s n a rt nia M e r o m r o B d 0 7 r e vie c e r b u S e r o m r o B d 0 6 n oitc eje r F I ts 1 r e vie c s n a rt nia M e r o m r o B d 0 7 r e vie c e r b u S e r o m r o B d 0 6 z H k 1 t a n oit a u n e tt a r e tlif h ct o N e r o m r o B d 0 3 z H k 1 t a n oit a u n e tt a le c n a c t a e B e r o m r o B d 0 4 e g n a r y c n e u q e rf tfih s T I R z H k 0 0 2 108 20 SPECIFICATIONS r e vie c e R 0 0 0 2 S T 0 0 0 2 B S T X 0 0 0 2 S T ytivitis n e s h cle u q S M A K S F W C B S S nia M 0 8 1 z H M 5 0 7 1 5 0 s s el r o V 8 1 z H M 7 8 2 8 1 s s el r o V 1 1 z H M 0 4 5 0 0 5 s s el r o V 1 1 z H M 6 4 1 4 4 1 s e p yt E ll A s s el r o V 1 1 z H M 8 4 1 4 4 1 e p yt K s s el r o V 1 1 z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 s e p yt E ll A s s el r o V 1 1 z H M 0 5 4 0 3 4 e p yt K s s el r o V 1 1 z H M 0 0 3 1 0 4 2 1 s e p ytll A s s el r o V M F 2 0 z H
283. k mates with a 6 3 mm 1 4 3 conductor plug for connecting a keyer paddle to the internal electronic keyer The KEY jack mates with a 3 5 mm 1 8 2 conductor plug for connecting an external key for CW operation Read Keys for CW PANEL and KEY page 3 before using these jacks r AT connector Mates with the connector on the cable supplied with the external antenna tuner Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the tuner for more information t ANT 144 Connect your 144 MHz band antenna to this connector y ANT 430 Connect your 430 440 MHz band antenna to this connector u ANT 1 2G TS 2000 TS B2000 Optional Connect your 1 2 GHz band antenna to this connector i DC 13 8V power input connector Connect a 13 8 V DC power source to this connector page 2 Use the cable supplied with the regulated DC power supply o COM connector Mates with a 9 pin female RS 232C connector for connecting a computer via one of its serial communication ports page 93 Also used with the Quick Data Transfer function page 93 0 PANEL connector Connect a cable from the optional separate remote panel RC 2000 to this connector 1 EXT SP1 and EXT SP2 jacks Mate with a 3 5 mm 1 8 2 conductor mono plugs for connecting external speakers pages 3 78 2 EXT CONT connector Connect your 50 MHz 144 MHz 430 440 MHz or 1 2 GHz linear amplifier control cable to this connector page 76 3 ACC2 connector
284. lch threshold when in FM mode Scan may fail to stop at a channel where a signal is present If this happens turn the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control slightly counterclockwise N If you press SCAN SG SEL before storing any frequency range for memory channels 290 to 299 the transceiver starts VFO scan N When the current receive frequency is within one of the ranges that you selected with channel numbers Scan starts with the current frequency The operating mode stored in the memory channel is used N When the current receive frequency is outside all the ranges that you selected with the channel numbers Scan starts with the start frequency stored in the smallest channel number N The operating mode can be changed while scanning but the memory channel is overwritten with the changed mode N When the current Scan range is smaller than a single step of the MULTI CH control turning the control clockwise causes Scan to jump to the start frequency and counterclockwise to the end frequency N Starting Program Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions N While in FM mode the Program Scan monitors rounded off frequencies regardless of the Menu No 04 setting N You cannot change the scan speed on the sub receiver PROGRAM SCAN PARTIALLY SLOWED You can specify a maximum of 5 frequency points for each memory channel from 290 to 299 so that the Program Scan slows down the scanning speed To specify the slow down frequency p
285. le d n ois si m s n a rt t e k c a p t n e m g d el w o n k c a e h t s eific e p S s d n o c e silli m 0 0 1 si r e t e m a r a p e h t f o tin u e h T T R A T S E R T R A T S E R n e h t F F O d e h cti w s sitifi s a n oitc n u f o t C N T e h t s e s u a C N O Y R T E R E R 0 1 5 1 0 e r a st e k c a p fI s eirt e r n ois si m s n a rt f o r e b m u n e h t s eific e p S tc e n n o c a n oitc e n n o c ni elih w d e t p e c c a yltc e rr o c t o n s eirt e r f o r e b m u n d eific e p s e h t r e tf a nia g a t n e s sits e u q e r C A P D N E S E S D 0 F 7 0 t n e s e b o t t e k c a p a s e c r o f h cih w r e tc a r a h c a s eific e p S 112 21 APPENDIX Note N If you are using a PC with a communication program to control the built in TNC prepare the RS 232C cable straight to connect with the COM terminal of the transceiver Then access Menu No 56 and select the same communication speed and communications parameters Other than 4800 bps the parameters must be set to 8 bit 1 stop bit and non parity 4800 bps is also used for the Quick Data Transfer function page 80 and the communication parameters are fixed as 8 bit 2 stop
286. le digit control command If you do not add A on the end you can skip sending AXXX next time however the mobile may be accidentally controlled by other stations 1 N O S C D 9 R M 2 N O E N O T 0 W O L 3 N O S S C T C A R E T N E 4 F F O S C D B L E S E N O T 5 F F O E N O T C N O R E T A E P E R 6 F F O S S C T C D F F O R E T A E P E R 7 L L A C N W O D 8 O F V P U To change the transmit receive frequency VFO ENTER 0 9 enter the necessary digits ENTER or VFO UP DOWN To recall a memory channel MR ENTER 0 9 enter the necessary digits ENTER or MR UP DOWN To change the tone or CTCSS frequency TONE SEL 0 9 enter 2 digits ex 0 5 TONE SEL Use Nos 01 to 38 shown in the table on page 35 First activate the Tone or CTCSS function You can select a separate tone frequency for the Tone and CTCSS functions Note While in Wireless Remote Control mode you can perform only the following operations on the TS 2000 X transceiver Transmit Acknowledge ON OFF Secret Number Change Partial Full Reset 83 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES SKY COMMAND II K type ONLY The Sky Command II allows you to remotely control the TS 2000 X transceiver from a separate location Since the
287. lect 2 for the slow switching If you have 50 MHz 144 MHz 430 440 MHz or 1 2 GHz band linear amplifiers connect the linear amplifier control cable to the EXT CONT connector for these bands page 96 1 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to select Menu No 28A HF 28B 50 MHz 28C 144 MHz 28D 430 440 MHz or 28E 1 2 GHz 2 Press to select OFF 1 or 2 OFF disables the TS 2000 X relay 1 is 10 ms transmission delay 2 is 25 ms transmission delay Note If CW full break in is enabled 10 ms transmission delay is applied regardless of the Menu No 28 settings 77 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES Directly select a Menu No without pressing MENU and turning the MULTI CH control Activate the same function as one of the front panel keys One of the following functions can be assigned to each PF key Selecting OFF assigns no function to the PF key N A 2 1 T N A B A B A C B L L A C 1 H C 2 H C 3 H C R L C L R T C E N U T W C I N O M P S D E N I F N I M O M E M K C I U Q N I M O M E M K C I U Q R M Ms O F V r e b m u N U N E M B N R N F F O z H M 1 I N O M X R N A C S T I L P S T E S F T M O F V 1 E C I O V 2 E C I O V MONITOR When you are receiving while the squelch function is ON weak signal
288. lp u r e vie c e r b u S k niln w o d r e vie c s n a rt nia M 1 4 P r e vie c s n a rt nia m e h t n o si L R T C 0 r e vie c e r b u s e h t n o si L R T C 1 5 P F F O E C A R T 1 F F O E C A R T 0 6 P N O V E R E C A R T 1 F F O V E R E C A R T 0 7 P e d o m O F V lo rt n o c H C I T L U M 0 le n n a h c y r o m e M lo rt n o c H C I T L U M 1 8 P s r e tc a r a h c 8 e m a n le n n a h C e tille t a S e h t e g n a h c o t d n a m m o c k nilp u B F r o k niln w o d A F e h t e s U s eic n e u q e rf t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S A 1 P 2 P 3 P 4 P 5 P 6 P 7 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S A r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S A 1 P 2 P 3 P 4 P 5 P 6 P 7 P 8 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 8 P 8 P 8 P 8 P 8 P 8 P 8 P 136 21 APPENDIX B S s u t a ts W F T B U S e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P F F O W F T B U S 0 N O W F T B U S 1 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 S B 1 P d a
289. luding Also the following callsign formats cannot be entered WD6DJYZ If you use only letters and numbers for the callsign the maximum length is 6 characters WD6 DJY 1 You cannot use more than 1 within a callsign WD6DJY You cannot use a as the first callsign character WD6DJY 19 An SSID must be within the range of 1 to 15 5 Access Menu No 62C then turn the MULTI CH control to select a CTCSS tone frequency for Sky Command II default is 88 5 Hz 6 Access Menu No 62D and select the communication speed for Sky Command II Select 1200 bps for TM D700A 9600 bps can be used only when you use another TS 2000 X as a Commander 7 Access Menu No 46 and select SUB 8 Select a 144 MHz band frequency in FM mode on the main transceiver and 440 MHz band frequency in FM mode for the sub receiver for Sky Command II operation TM D700A Commander Setup 1 Access Menu 4 1 and 4 2 to enter the same callsign that you entered for TS 2000 X 2 Access Menu 4 3 to select the same CTCSS tone frequency that you selected for TS 2000 X Transporter Note Refer to Chapter 17 Sky Command II of the TM D700A instruction manual for details on how to enter the callsign and CTCSS tone frequency Your shack HF 50 MHz VHF UHF TM D700A TH D7A TS 2000 X 84 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES Starting Sky Command II operation After you have completed the follo
290. m m o c t e k c a P 0 e d o m d n a m m o c lo rt n o C C P 1 e d o m n oit a cin u m m o c t e k c a P r e t n e o t 0 C T ni y e K e d o m d n a m m o c lo rt n o C C P o t n r u t e r o t 1 C T ni y e K t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 T C 1 P 2 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 T C r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 T C 1 P 2 P 139 21 APPENDIX D T a t a d le n n a h c y r o m e m F M T D e h t s d n e S s r e t e m a r a P 1 P r e b m u n le n n a h c y r o m e m F M T D 9 0 0 0 t n e s si a t a d o n le n n a h c e h t ni d e r o ts si a t a d o n fI t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 T D 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 I T s u t a ts D E L C N T e h t s d a e R s r e t e m a r a P 1 P N O si D E L k 6 9 1 F F O si D E L k 6 9 0 2 P N O si D E L A T S 1 F F O si D E L A T S 0 3 P N O si D E L N O C 1 F F O si D E L N O C 0 t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 T I
291. m o c D M e e S e d o m g nit a r e p O 0 1 P s d n a m m o c T F d n a R F e e S 1 1 P d n a m m o c C S e e S s u t a ts n a c S 2 1 P d n a m m o c P S e e S s u t a ts n oit a r e p o tilp S 3 1 P S C D 3 S S C T C 2 E N O T 1 F F O 0 4 1 P d n a m m o c N T e e S y c n e u q e rf e n o T 5 1 P d n a m m o c S O e e S s u t a ts tfih S 5 1 P d n a 2 P e h t II d n a m m o C y k S g nit a r e p o elih W h t g n el r e t e m a r a p 2 P e h T k n alb e m o c e b s r e t e m a r a p 5 s e m o c e b h t g n el r e t e m a r a p 3 P e h t d n a s e ty b 5 o t s e g n a h c s e ty b t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 I F r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 I F 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 P 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 0 2 1 P 1 P 1 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 2 P 3 P 3 P 3 P 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 0 3 3 P 3 P 3 P 4 P 5 P 6 P 7 P 7 P 8 P 9 P 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 0 4 0 1 P 1 1 P 2 1 P 3 1 P 4 1 P 4 1
292. main transceiver is receiving on the VHF band 142 152 MHz the sensitivity of the main transceiver slightly degrades when you select 118 136 MHz or 155 300 MHz for the sub receiver AGC When you turn the AGC function OFF page 38 the receiving audio signals can be distorted In this case decrease the RF GAIN turn the pre amplifier OFF or turn the attenuator ON In general the RF GAIN is greatly reduced when the AGC is turned OFF SUB RECEIVER When you turn the sub receiver ON or OFF a popping noise may be monitored from the speaker 104 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES PS 53 Regulated DC Power Supply 22 5 A MC 43S Hand Microphone MC 47 Multi function Microphone HS 6 Small Headphones SP 23 External Speaker SP 50B Mobile Speaker MB 430 Mobile Mounting Bracket HS 5 Deluxe Headphones DRU 3A Digital Recording Unit VS 3 Voice Synthesizer Unit LF 30A Low pass Filter PG 2Z DC Cable MC 60A Deluxe Desktop Microphone MC 90 DSP compatible Desktop Microphone MC 80 Desktop Microphone Microphone sensitivity is low in FM mode MC 52DM DTMF Microphone UT 20 1 2 GHz TX RX unit RC 2000 Mobile Controller Service center installation only Contact an authorized dealer for details See page 98 for the installation ARCP 2000 Advanced Radio Control Program This option is supplied with the TS B2000 105 SPECIFICATIONS la r e n
293. ming use the Quick Menu to create your own customized abbreviated Menu You can then add those Menu Nos which you frequently use to the Quick Menu Copying Menu Nos to the Quick Menu has no effect on the Menu PROGRAMMING THE QUICK MENU 1 Press MENU 2 Turn the MULTI CH control to select the desired Menu No 3 Press QUICK MEMO M IN A star appears indicating that the Menu item has been added to the Quick Menu To remove the item from the Quick Menu press QUICK MEMO M IN again 4 Press MENU to exit Menu mode Note You cannot add a sub menu No to the Quick Menu Press MAIN to go back to the main menu No then press QUICK MEMO M IN to add the menu No to the Quick Menu USING THE QUICK MENU 1 Press MENU 2 Press 1MHz SEL MHz appears 3 Turn the MULTI CH control to select the desired Quick Menu No 4 Press Mic UP DWN to change the current setting for the selected Menu No 5 Press MENU to exit Quick Menu mode Note If the Quick Menu has not been programmed turning the MULTI CH control in step 2 causes CHECK to be output in Morse code 22 6 MENU SETUP MENU CONFIGURATION p u o r G u n e M o N n oitc n u F s n oitc ele S tlu afe D fe R g a P e r o t a r e p O e c a fr e t n I 0 0 s s e n t h gir b y alp si D m u m ix a m 4 m u m ini m 1 F
294. n A 5 2 3 0 0 1 4 5 2 5 7 1 4 5 0 1 5 7 5 4 1 5 0 1 5 8 1 5 4 1 5 1 2 5 8 1 5 5 2 5 1 2 0 0 3 5 5 2 0 0 6 0 0 3 Note Connect an external antenna tuner to the ANT 1 connector only then select ANT 1 The internal tuner will be automatically bypassed when the transceiver is switched ON VHF UHF 1 2 GHz Band When you select the VHF UHF or 1 2 GHz TS 2000 TS B2000 optional band on the main transceiver and or the sub receiver the following antenna is automatically selected based on the operating frequencies r e vie c s n a rt N I A M z H M r e vie c e r B U S z H M 4 4 1 T N A e p yt K 2 5 1 2 4 1 s e p yt E ll A 6 4 1 4 4 1 e p yt K 4 7 1 8 1 1 e p yt K 0 0 3 0 2 2 s e p yt E ll A 6 4 1 4 4 1 0 3 4 T N A e p yt K 0 5 4 0 2 4 s e p yt E ll A 0 4 4 0 3 4 e p yt K 2 1 5 0 0 3 s e p yt E ll A 0 4 4 0 3 4 G 2 1 T N A s e p ytll A 0 0 3 1 0 4 2 1 A N Note The same antenna is shared and used when the main transceiver and sub receiver are on the same band The frequency coverage varies depending on the market codes 73 1
295. n o C R E S U e r a w tf o s P C R A r o f d e v r e s e R t al F 1 2 r e zila u q e X T P S D F T S O O B H F F O T S O O B B S S A P R E S U N E V N O C F F O 1 4 4 0 1 F F O t al F T S O O B H ts o o b h gi H S S A P F s s a p t n a m r o F T S O O B B ts o o b s s a B N E V N O C la n oit n e v n o C R E S U e r a w tf o s P C R A r o f d e v r e s e R t al F r e tli F P S D 2 2 M A r o B S S r o f h t di w d n a b r e tlif X T P S D 8 2 6 2 4 2 2 2 0 2 z H k 0 3 z H k 4 2 1 4 g nin u T e ni F 3 2 g nin u t r e w o p ti m s n a rt e ni F F F O N O F F O 8 3 T O T 4 2 r e m it t u o e m i T 0 3 0 2 0 1 5 3 F F O s e t u ni m F F O 8 7 r e tr e v s n a r T 5 2 y alp sid y c n e u q e rf r e tr e v s n a r T N O F F O F F O 9 7 a n n e t n A r e n u T 6 2 g nin u t e h t s e t elp m o c T A n e h w dlo h X T N O F F O F F O 3 7 7 2 g nivie c e r elih w T A e nil n I N O F F O F F O 3 7 r a e niL r eifil
296. n describes additional methods of frequency selection that may save you time and effort I Direct Frequency Entry When the desired frequency is far removed from the current frequency directly entering a frequency from the numeric keypad is usually the fastest method 1 Press ENT appears 2 Press the numeric keys 0 to 9 to enter your desired frequency Pressing ENT fills the remaining digits the digits you did not enter with 0 and completes the entry To select 1 85 MHz for example press 0 0 0 1 8 5 then press ENT to complete the input 7 key strokes To shorten the key strokes you can also use as MHz Press 1 MHz 8 5 then press ENT to complete the input 5 key strokes Pressing CLR cancels the entry and restores the current VFO frequency Note N You can enter the frequency in the range of 30 00 kHz to 1299 99999 MHz Refer to the specifications for the available frequency range N Attempting to enter a frequency that is outside the selectable frequency range causes an alarm to sound The entered frequency is rejected N When the entered frequency does not meet the current VFO frequency step size requirement the nearest available frequency is automatically selected sub receiver The nearest available frequency is automatically selected after the entered frequency is changed main transceiver N
297. n tijde van de druk van de gebruiksaanwijzing en of gecorrigeerde informatie die foutief is opgenomen in dezelfde gebruiksaanwijzing Subaudio toonfuncties Toon CTCSS DCS in Satelliet modus U kunt FM subaudiotonen Toon CTCSS DCS inschakelen in Satelliet modus en de Toon Aan Uit status opslaan in ieder Satelliet geheugenkanaal Hoewel de Toon Aan Uit status is opgeslagen in ieder Satelliet geheugenkanaal kunt u de subaudiotoon frequentie code niet opslaan wegens beperkte geheugencapaciteit Hiervoor in de plaats gebruikt u de configuratie van de toonfrequentie code van de normale VFO VFO A of VFO B De zoekfunctie van de toonfrequentie code kunt u niet gebruiken in Satelliet modus Codering en decodering gebeurt volgens de gegevens van de uplink frequentieband Specificaties TS 2000XE Raadpleeg E type voor het frequentiebereik van de zender pagina 105 en de ontvanger pagina 106 onder de kolom TS 2000 TS B2000 Andere specificaties blijven ongewijzigd Specificaties TS 2000E E2 TS B2000E E2 en TS 2000XE Het frequentiebereik van de 7 MHz band van de zender pagina 105 is vergroot tot 7 0 MHz 7 2 MHz
298. ncies in order to identify the incoming tone frequency on the receiving signal of the sub receiver Refer to TONE FREQ ID SCAN page 34 for function and control details DCS CODE ID SCAN This function scans through all the DCS codes in order to identify the incoming DCS code on the receiving signal of sub receiver Refer to DCS CODE ID SCAN page 36 for function and control details Holding down the key changes the bands continuously If MHz is visible on the display first press 1MHz SEL to exit from the 1 MHz Step Up Down mode ADJUSTING THE AUDIO FREQUENCY AF GAIN Turn the SUB AF control clockwise to increase the audio level and counterclockwise to decrease the level SUB CALL C IN UTO SB SB SUB SEL 1MHz CTRL MR M VFO MG SEL M IN M IN QUICK MEMO SATL A B M S REV TRACE MAIN MANUAL RF AF SQL SUB CH MULTI BC MAIN GAIN VFO CH VFO M A B SPLIT MENU TF SET MAIN SUB SG SEL SCAN RIT CW TUNE 9 6k STA RIT SUB CON XIT ALT SET CLEAR P C T _ HF VHE UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS 2000 AF SQL Note The position of the SUB AF control does not affect the volume of beeps caused by pressing buttons The audio level for Packet operation is also independent of the SUB AF control setting ADJUSTING THE SQUELCH Turn the SUB SQL control clockwise when no signals are present to select
299. nd the pileup The more proficient you become at using this function the more DX stations you will contact Note N If you press FUNC ATT F LOCK to lock the operating frequency before using TF SET pressing an incorrect button by mistake retains the original receive frequency N TF SET is disabled while transmitting N If you have recalled a memory channel excluding CH 290 to 299 you cannot change the recalled frequency using the Tuning control N To enable the Tuning control access Menu No 06B and select ON Pressing Mic UP DWN after recalling a memory channel changes the memory channels N An RIT frequency shift is not added however an XIT frequency shift is added to the transmit frequency 32 8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS FM REPEATER OPERATION When using FM mode you may access a repeater to enjoy long distance communications Repeaters which are often installed and maintained by radio clubs are usually located on mountain tops or other elevated locations Generally they operate at higher ERP Effective Radiated Power than a typical station This combination of elevation and high ERP allows communications in FM over much greater distances than FM communications without using repeaters Most repeaters use a receive and transmit frequency pair with an offset In addition some repeaters must receive a tone from the transceiver before it allows access Repeaters are available on the 29 50 144
300. ndwidth SSB AM 41 TX Equalizer SSB FM AM 41 TRANSMIT INHIBIT 41 CHANGING FREQUENCY WHILE TRANSMITTING 41 THANK YOU i FEATURES i SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES i WRITING CONVENTIONS FOLLOWED i MODELS COVERED BY THIS MANUAL ii MARKET CODES ii NOTICE TO USER ii PRECAUTIONS iii CONTENTS iv CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION ANTENNA CONNECTION 1 GROUND CONNECTION 1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION 1 DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION 2 UTILIZING THE BAIL TS 2000 X ONLY 2 REPLACING FUSES 2 ACCESSORY CONNECTIONS 3 FRONT PANEL 3 Headphones PHONES 3 Microphone MIC 3 REAR PANE
301. ne within the receive pass band This function operates digitally at the IF filter level hence it can affect your S meter reading and may also affect slightly attenuate your desired signal However controlling the AGC level by notching out the strong interfering beat signals could bring up the desired SSB signal that is covered by the interfering beat signal If the interfering tone is weak you may find that Beat Cancel eliminates them more effectively Before Interfering tones After Receive pass band Desired signal Press A N LEVEL to toggle the Auto Notch Filter ON and OFF A N appears when the function is ON The interfering beat signals are notched out If the interfering beat signals change the tone frequency randomly you can adjust the Auto Notch level Press FUNC A N LEVEL to access the Auto Notch level adjustment then turn the MULTI CH control to select the level from FIX and 1 to 4 Level 1 is the slowest beat tone tracking speed and Level 4 is the fastest FIX terminates the beat tone tracking Adjust this pamameter manually to remove the beat signal if necessary AUTO BEAT CANCEL SSB AM Auto Beat Cancel uses an adaptive filter and attenuates more than one cyclic interference within the receive pass band The adaptive filter changes its characteristics according to the nature of the signal being received at any given moment You can use automatic Beat Cancel when in SSB o
302. nes from your transceiver will ensure added protection 2 1 INSTALLATION DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION In order to use this transceiver you need a separate 13 8 V DC power supply that must be purchased separately Do not directly connect the transceiver to an AC outlet Use the supplied DC power cable to connect the transceiver to a regulated power supply Do not substitute a cable with smaller gauge wires The current capacity of the power supply must be 20 5 A peak or more TS 2000 TS 2000X TS B2000 First connect the DC power cable to the regulated DC power supply the red lead to the positive terminal and the black lead to the negative terminal Next connect the DC power cable to the transceiver s DC power connector Press the connectors firmly together until the locking tab clicks Note N Before connecting the DC power supply to the transceiver be sure to switch OFF the DC power supply and transceiver N Do not plug the DC power supply into an AC outlet until you make all connections UTILIZING THE BAIL TS 2000 X ONLY This transceiver is equipped with a bail so that you can angle the transceiver The bail is located on the bottom of the transceiver Pull the bail forward to the limit as shown REPLACING FUSES If a fuse blows determine the cause then correct the problem Only after the problem has been resolved replace the blown fuse with a new one with the specified ratings If newly installed fuses
303. ns Noise Blanker does not function in FM mode Press 7 NB LEVEL to toggle between the Noise Blanker ON and OFF NB appears when the function is ON You can further adjust the Noise blanker level from 1 to 10 The default level is 6 Press FUNC 7 NB LEVEL then turn the MULTI CH control to adjust the noise blanker level NB LEVEL and the current level appear on the sub dot matrix display Note Noise Blanker is available only for the main transceiver in SSB CW FSK and AM modes PRE AMPLIFIER Switching the Pre amplifier OFF may help reduce interference from adjacent frequencies Press PRE LOCK A to toggle between the Pre amplifier ON and OFF PRE appears when the function is ON The ON OFF setting will be automatically stored in the current band Each time you select the same band the same setting will be automatically selected The frequency range of each band is provided in the following table under ATTENUATOR Note If the same frequency 144 MHz or 430 440 MHz band is selected on both the main transceiver and the sub receiver the pre amplifier can be switched ON or OFF for both receivers This is because the main transceiver and sub receiver share the same antenna ATTENUATOR The Attenuator reduces the level of received signals This function is useful when there is strong interference from adjacent frequencies Press ATT F LOCK to toggle the Attenu
304. ns off depending on the MAIN SQL setting 7 Press MIC CAR to quit the Microphone Gain Adjust Refer to COMMUNICATING AIDS beginning on page 37 for information on additional useful operation functions Note If necessary adjust the carrier level before speaking into the microphone Press FUNC MIC CAR to enter the adjustment mode While transmitting only carrier signals turn the MULTI CH control so that the ALC meter just begins to indicate Press FUNC MIC CAR again to complete the adjustment NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR FM When operating in FM mode you can select wide or narrow bandwidth operation The table below shows the RX IF filter bandwidth and TX deviation combination for each operating mode The bandwidth selection is crucial to avoid audio distortion or insufficient intelligibility that the other station will encounter e d o M r etliF FI X R n oitaiv e D X T M F e di W e di W N M F w o rr a N 1 w o rr a N 1 K type Main transceiver only All E types Main transceiver and sub receiver 1 Press FM AM NAR to select FM mode 2 Press FUNC FM AM NAR to toggle the selection between Wide and Narrow FM or FMN appears to indicate which bandwidth is selected NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR AM When receiving AM on the main transceiver you can further decrease the bandwidth to eliminate interference However the TX deviation of AM is not affec
305. ntrol to select the monitor sound level from OFF and 1 to 9 4 Press CLR to store the selected TX monitor level Note N We recommend you use headphones when you monitor SSB AM or FM mode in order to avoid howling N The CW transmission signal cannot be monitored using the TX monitor function Use the CW sidetone function to monitor CW transmissions Menu Nos 13 and 31 TX POWER You can adjust the transmission output power by pressing PWR TX MONI and turning MULTI CH control If more precise power adjustment is required access Menu No 23 and select ON When this menu is ON the power adjustment steps change as shown in the table below d n a B e d o M 3 2 o N u n e M F F O 3 2 o N u n e M N O z H M 0 5 F H z H M 4 4 1 W C B S S K S F M F W 0 0 1 5 5 f o s p e ts ni W 0 0 1 5 1 f o s p e ts ni M A W 5 2 5 5 f o s p e ts ni W 5 2 5 1 f o s p e ts ni 0 4 4 0 3 4 z H M W C B S S K S F M F W 0 5 5 5 f o s p e ts ni W 0 5 5 1 f o s p e ts ni M A W 5 2 1 5 1 f o s p e ts ni z H G 2 1 W C B S S K S F M F W 0 1 1 1 f o s p e ts ni M A W 5 2 1 1 f o s p e ts ni Note N The output power settings are stored independently for HF 50 MHz 144
306. o N u n e M s e g n a h c o N u n e M r e b m u n d e tc ele S r e t e m a r a p y r o m e M o N le n n a h c s e g n a h c y r o m e M R M o N le n n a h c y c n e u q e rf y e k c ir e m u N y rt n e g nir e t n E s r e b m u n r e b m u n y r e v E d e r e t n e e h t g nir u D y c n e u q e rf y rt n e ztr e h a g e M Note The PF key assignment parameter is announced as the number shown below r e b m u n u n e M 3 6 1 E C I O V 4 6 2 E C I O V 5 6 I N O M X R 6 6 I N O M P S D 7 6 R M K C I U Q 8 6 N I M K C I U Q 9 6 T I L P S 0 7 T E S F T 1 7 B A 2 7 M O F V 3 7 B A 4 7 N A C S 5 7 O F V gt M 6 7 N I M 7 7 E N U T W C 8 7 1 H C 9 7 2 H C 0 8 3 H C 1 8 E N I F 2 8 R L C 3 8 L L A C 4 8 L R T C 5 8 z H M 1 6 8 2 1 T N A 7 8 B N 8 8 R N 9 8 C B 0 9 N A 9 9 F F O For the PF key the transceiver will announce different information depending on whether VOICE1 or VOICE2 is selected VOICE1 VFO or memory channel frequencies are announced beginning with the 10 MHz digit and continuing through to the 10 Hz digit If the memory channel has no
307. o m M F ni d e s u e b t o n n a c s d n a m m o c T G ni d e s u si d n a m m o c T G e h t n e h w s e c a p s 3 h ti w s d n o p s e r e d o m M F t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 G T 1 P 1 P 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 G T r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 G T 1 P 1 P 1 P 125 21 APPENDIX D I r e b m u n D I r e vie c s n a rt e h t s d a e R s r e t e m a r a P 1 P 0 0 0 2 S T 9 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 I D r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 I D 1 P 1 P 1 P F I s u t a ts r e vie c s n a rt e h t s e v eirt e R s r e t e m a r a P 1 P tigid 1 1 z H ni y c n e u q e rf e h t yfic e p S 0 e b ts u m stigid k n alb e h T 2 P e zis p e ts y c n e u q e r F 3 P y c n e u q e rf T I X T I R z H ni 9 9 9 9 9 4 P N O T I R 1 F F O T I R 0 5 P N O T I X 1 F F O T I X 0 C M e e S r e b m u n k n a b le n n a h c e h t yfic e p S 7 P 6 P d n a m m o c 8 P X T 1 X R 0 9 P slia t e d r o f s d n a m
308. o consumer products such as stereo receivers and televisions You may even interfere with your own transceiver Reports that your signal is distorted could indicate that your antenna system is not efficiently radiating the transceiver s power Connect your primary HF 50 MHz antenna feed line to ANT 1 on the rear of the transceiver If you are using two HF 50 MHz antennas connect the secondary antenna to ANT 2 Connect VHF 144 MHz UHF 430 440 MHz and 1 2 GHz TS 2000 TS B2000 Optional antennas to their respective antenna connectors on the rear of the transceiver Refer to page 13 for the location of the antenna connectors N Transmitting without connecting an antenna or other matched load may damage the transceiver Always connect the antenna to the transceiver before transmitting N All fixed stations should be equipped with a lightning arrester to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and transceiver damage Note The transceiver s protection circuit will activate when the SWR is greater than 2 5 1 however do not rely on protection to compensate for a poorly functioning antenna system Connect all accessories to the transceiver pages 3 94 Accessories include the following Microphone Antenna Tuner CW Key Computer TNC Multimode Communications Processor Install and connect an antenna system page 1 Install a ground system that satisfies DC and RF grounding requirements page 1
309. o repeatedly play back the message that you stored To switch this function ON access Menu No 29A and select ON The default is OFF For repetitive message playback you can change the interval between each series of messages Use Menu No 29B and select the time in the range of 0 to 60 seconds Note N This function cannot be used when the Bug Key function is ON N Operating the keyer paddle with Menu No 30 OFF cancels message playback Even if message playback does not stop because of your keying start timing you can cancel playback by pressing CLR I Storing CW Messages 1 Press CW FSK REV to select CW mode CW appears 2 If VOX is ON press VOX LEVEL The VOX LED turns off 3 Press FUNC and 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC or 3 CH3 REC to select a memory channel to be recorded 4 Begin sending using the keyer paddle The message you send is stored in memory 5 To complete the message storage press CLR to stop When the memory becomes full recording automatically stops Note If you do not operate the keyer paddle after starting to record a message a pause is stored in the channel I Checking CW Messages without Transmitting 1 Press CW FSK REV to select CW mode CW appears 2 If VOX is ON press VOX LEVEL to switch it OFF 3 Press 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC or 3 CH3 REC to select the channel to be played back The message is
310. ock All function disables all the keys and controls on the TS 2000 transceiver except FUNC PRE LOCK A Mic PTT and FUNC ATT F LOCK Press FUNC PRE LOCK A to toggle between the Lock All function ON or OFF appears when this function is ON To return to normal operation press FUNC PRE LOCK A MICROPHONE PF KEYS When using the optional MC 47 or MC 52DM microphone you can customize the functions of the Microphone PF1 CALL PF2 VFO PF3 MR and PF4 PF keys You can assign the following types of functions to these keys via Menu Nos 51B 51E 78 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES If you want to reverse the output 1 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 17 2 Press to select ON 3 Press MENU to store the setting and exit Menu mode The output is now reversed Note If you are using headphones the transceiver mutes The left channel represents the internal SP or EXT SP1 and the right channel represents the EXT SP2 S METER SQUELCH The S meter Squelch function opens the squelch only when the receiving signal has the same or greater strength than the S meter Squelch setting This function helps you to not open the squelch when receiving weak signals that you do not want to hear 1 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 19A 2 Press to select ON 3 Turn the MAIN SQL control and or the SUB SQL control to adjust
311. ode sounds and the internal tuner is bypassed Before attempting to tune again adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR 5 See the display and check that tuning has successfully finished ALT Auto Lock Tuning The ALT Auto Lock Tuning allows the transceiver to adjust the center receiving frequency automatically when you operate on the 1 2 GHz band in FM mode When the receiving audio signal is distorted or breaking up turn this function on to adjust the center receiving frequency Some old 1 2 GHz transceivers do not have stable and precise oscillating circuits and tend to be slightly off drifted from the displayed frequency Press FUNC XIT ALT to toggle between the ALT function ON or OFF ALT appears when the function is ON Note The ALT Auto Lock Tuning works only on the 1 2 GHz band in FM mode ANTENNAS HF 50 MHz Band Two antenna connectors are available for the HF 50 MHz band on the rear panel page 13 When you operate the main transceiver on these frequencies you can select one of 2 antennas Press FUNC AT ANT1 2 to select ANT 1 or ANT 2 for the main transceiver or appears to indicate which antenna is selected The ANT 1 ANT 2 setting will automatically be stored in the antenna band memory Next time you select the same band the same antenna will be automatically selected z H M e g n a R y c n e u q e r F n oitc ele S a n n et
312. oes not finish even though the SWR meter indicates smaller than 3 1 adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR then attempt to tune again N Tuning may not reach an SWR of 1 1 depending on the transceiver conditions I Presetting After each successful tuning session the AT Preset memory function stores the position of the tuning capacitor in the memory The position of the capacitor is stored for each of the antenna tuner bands see the following table and for each antenna connector ANT 1 and ANT 2 Press AT ANT1 2 momentarily AT will appear showing that the internal tuner is in line not bypassed Each time you go across the antenna tuner band the AT Preset memory is automatically recalled to position the tuning capacitor without the need for retuning If no preset data exists for a particular band antenna combination then the default data of 50 is used Note Tuning may restart in order to obtain the optimum matching condition even though the current antenna tuner band has the preset data z H M e g n a R y c n e u q e r F te s e r P T A 5 8 1 3 0 0 0 5 2 5 8 1 5 2 5 3 0 5 2 5 7 5 3 5 2 5 3 5 2 7 3 5 7 5 3 0 1 4 5 2 7 3 3 0 7 0 1 4 0 1 7 3 0 7 0 5 7 0 1 7 0 5 0 1 0 5 7 0 1 4 1 0 5 0 1 0 5
313. oints first program the start and end frequencies into a memory channel 290 299 page 62 1 Access Menu No 07 to confirm that the function is ON default is ON 2 You can further configure the slow down frequency width Access Menu No 08 to select the range from 100 Hz to 500 Hz default is 300 Hz Note If you select for example 500 Hz for Menu No 08 the Program Scan slows down to a 500 Hz width centering the frequency you marked below 3 Press VFO M to recall the memory channel 290 299 for which you want to specify the scan slow down frequencies 4 Press to confirm the start or end frequency 5 Turn the Tuning control to the center frequency point that you want the Program Scan to slow down Press QUICK MEMO M IN to mark the Slow down frequency point The icon appears 68 14 SCAN 6 Repeat step 5 to specify the center slow down frequency points You can specify a maximum of 5 frequency points for each channel 7 If you want to clear the slow down frequency points that you previously stored press and hold QUICK MEMO M IN for 1 second A confirmation beep sounds and the transceiver clears all the slow down frequency points you specified in the memory channel Note You must clear all the previous slow down frequency points you cannot clear only specific points 8 Press VFO M to return to VFO mode 9 Press SCAN SG SEL to start the Program Scan wit
314. ommand II may not operate properly N When the TS 2000 X exits the Sky Command II operation the operating frequency of VFO A will be set to the VHF frequency that the Sky Command II was operated 85 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES USING TH D7A AS A COMMANDER To use a TH D7A transceiver as a Commander an external remote control unit follow the steps below Basically it is the same as using a TM D700A as a Commander described on the previous page TS 2000 X Transporter Setup 1 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 62A 2 Enter your callsign ex WD6DJY as a Commander callsign using or the MULTI CH control To move the cursor press MAIN or SUB Press M IN to store the callsign to Menu No 62A 3 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 62B 4 Enter your alias callsign ex WD6DJY 1 as a Transporter callsign using or the MULTI CH control To move the cursor press MAIN or SUB Press M IN to store the callsign to Menu No 62B Note You can use alpha numeric characters A to Z 0 to 9 and The callsign must be no more than 9 characters long including Also the following callsign formats cannot be entered WD6DJYZ If you use only letters and numbers for the callsign the maximum length is 6 characters WD6 DJY 1 You cannot use more than 1 within a callsign
315. ontrol unit follow the steps below Basically it is the same as using a TM D700A as a Commander described on pages 83 and 84 TS 2000 X Transporter Setup 1 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 62A 2 Enter your callsign ex WD6DJY as a Commander callsign using or the MULTI CH control To move the cursor press MAIN or SUB Press M IN to store the callsign to Menu No 62A 3 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 62B 4 Enter your alias callsign ex WD6DJY 1 as a Transporter callsign using or the MULTI CH control To move the cursor press MAIN or SUB Press M IN to store the callsign to Menu No 62B Note You can use alpha numeric characters A to Z 0 to 9 and The callsign must be no more than 9 characters long including Also the following callsign formats cannot be entered WD6DJYZ If you use only letters and numbers for the callsign the maximum length is 6 characters WD6 DJY 1 You cannot use more than 1 within a callsign WD6DJY You cannot use a as the first callsign character WD6DJY 19 An SSID must be within the range of 1 to 15 5 Access Menu No 62C then turn the MULTI CH control to select a CTCSS tone frequency for Sky Command II default is 88 5 Hz 6 Access Menu No 62D and select the communication speed for Sky Command II
316. or FM mode 9 Access Menu No 50A and select ON to activate the DSP packet filter for the main transceiver 10 Turn the HI SHIFT control to select the center frequency of the packet mode You can further select either NAR narrow or WID wide for the receiver filter width by turning the LO WIDTH control y c n e u q e r F r etn e C e d o M g nita r e p O z H 0 0 0 1 1 3 K S P z H 0 0 7 1 s p b 0 0 2 1 K S F A t e k c a P z H 0 1 2 2 s p b 0 0 3 K S F A t e k c a P K S P K S P Note N The packet 9600 bps operation is not affected by the DSP packet filter settings N The DSP packet filter works only on the main transceiver If you are using an external TNC or MCP proceed with the subsequent steps 11 Following the instructions provided with your TNC or MCP enter the calibration mode so that you can generate a mark condition The MAIN band LED changes from green RX to red TX 12 Access Menu No 50B to select the appropriate AF input level Select a proper input level so that the ALC meter reflects within the ALC zone 13 Exit the calibration mode The MAIN band LED changes from red TX to green RX 14 Access Menu No 50C to select the appropriate AF output level You cannot use the AF control to make this adjustment If you have selected sub band in step 5 access Menu
317. orange when the Speech Processor function is actived u SEND key Press to switch the transceiver between receive mode and transmit mode pages 5 7 i AT ANT1 2 key Press to activate the internal antenna tuner page 72 or an external antenna tuner Press FUNC AT ANT1 2 to select either Antenna 1 or Antenna 2 for the HF 50 MHz band page 72 o PHONES jack Connect a set of headphones to this jack Inserting a plug into the jack automatically mutes the audio from the speaker pages 3 78 0 MIC connector Connect a compatible microphone to this connector then securely screw down the connector locking ring page 3 1 N R LEVEL key Press to switch the DSP Noise Reduction function ON or OFF Press FUNC N R LEVEL to adjust the Noise Reduction level Press FUNC N R LEVEL again to finish the adjustment page 56 2 A N LEVEL key Press to switch the DSP Auto Notch function ON or OFF Press FUNC A N LEVEL to adjust the DSP Auto Notch reduction level Press FUNC A N LEVEL again to finish the adjustment page 56 3 B C MANUAL key Press to switch the DSP Auto Beat Cancel function ON or OFF Press FUNC B C MANUAL to adjust the beat cancel frequency manually Press FUNC B C MANUAL again to finish the manual adjustment page 56 9 4 GETTING ACQUAINTED PF F LOCK A 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC 3 CH3 REC 4 TONE SEL 5 METER 6 CTCS
318. ou can select one from six different receiver profiles including the default flat response Selecting any of the following items from the Menu causes to appear on the display Off OFF The default frequency response for SSB FM and AM High boost H BOOST Emphasizes higher audio frequencies effective for a bassy voice Formant pass F PASS Improves clarity by suppressing audio frequencies outside the normal voice frequency range Bass boost B BOOST Emphasizes lower audio frequencies effective for a voice with more high frequency components Conventional CONVEN Emphasizes by 3 dB frequencies at 600 Hz and higher User USER Reserved for the ARCP software Off is programmed at the factory as a default SEPERATE SPEAKER OUTPUT The TS 2000 X has 2 independent receivers and is capable of receiving 2 different frequencies at the same time If no external speaker is connected to the TS 2000 X both audio signals are mixed internally then output through the internal speaker 1 Connect the external speaker s to the EXT SP1 and or EXT SP2 jack on the rear panel page 2 2 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 16 3 Press to select 0 1 or 2 4 Press MENU to store the setting n oitc ele S u n e M le n n a h c L le n n a h c R 0 d e xi M b u S amp nia M d e xi M b u S amp nia
319. out replacing batteries to operate the transceiver However the transceiver s built in TNC requires a lithium battery CR 2032 to store the TNC data Battery lifetime varies but under normal operating conditions it should last for approximately 5 years If you find that the TNC no longer stores the TNC parameters contact an authorized KENWOOD service center for replacing the lithium battery DEMONSTRATION MODE The transceiver can be configured to enter the demonstration mode for display purposes To enter the demonstration mode 1 Switch the transceiver OFF 2 Press FUNC to switch the transceiver ON On the dot matrix display windows you will see a few killer whales jump across the display You will also notice the display brightness changes and LEDs turn ON and OFF automatically If you operate the transceiver while in the demonstration mode the demonstration is temporarily paused But if no operation is performed for more than 10 seconds the demonstration starts again 3 To exit the demonstration mode first turn the transceiver OFF then press FUNC to turn the transceiver ON Note You cannot exit the demonstration mode by simply switching the transceiver OFF or performing a full reset page 92 You must switch the transceiver OFF then press FUNC to turn the transceiver ON in order to exit the demonstration mode GENERAL INFORMATION Your transceiver has been factory aligned and
320. out the memory channels that you prefer not to monitor while scanning To do this refer to Memory Channel Lockout page 62 ALL CHANNEL SCAN Use the following procedure to scan all the memory channels that contain frequency data in sequence ignoring the Memory Group number 1 Select Time operated or Carrier operated mode via Menu No 10 2 Press VFO M to enter Memory Recall mode 3 Turn the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control to adjust the squelch threshold 4 Press FUNC SCAN SG SEL to enter Scan Group Select mode The selected Groups appear in a larger font 5 Press DCS SEL to deselect all Groups so that the transceiver scans the memory channel sequentially ignoring the Memory Group number data 69 14 SCAN 6 Press SCAN SG SEL to return to Memory Recall mode 7 Press SCAN SG SEL to start All channel Scan Scan starts from the current memory channel and ascends up through the channel numbers scan direction cannot be changed To jump to a desired channel while scanning turn the MULTI CH control or press Mic UP DWN 8 To stop Scan press SCAN or CLR Note N If you are operating on the sub receiver and perform the Memory Scan the transceiver automatically skips the memory channels that cannot be received by the sub receiver The same conditions apply to the main transceiver N If you have turned the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control clockwise far beyond th
321. p m A 8 2 lo rt n o c r eifilp m a r a e niL s s e c c a o t B U S s s e r P u n e m b u s e h t A 8 2 d n a b F H r o f y ale d lo rt n o c r eifilp m a r a e niL 2 1 F F O F F O 6 7 B 8 2 d n a b z H M 0 5 r o f y ale d lo rt n o c r eifilp m a r a e niL 2 1 F F O F F O 6 7 C 8 2 d n a b z H M 4 4 1 r o f y ale d lo rt n o c r eifilp m a r a e niL 2 1 F F O F F O 6 7 D 8 2 z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 r o f y ale d lo rt n o c r eifilp m a r a e niL d n a b 2 1 F F O F F O 6 7 E 8 2 d n a b z H G 2 1 r o f y ale d lo rt n o c r eifilp m a r a e niL 2 1 F F O F F O 6 7 e g a s s e M k c a b y al P 9 2 k c a b y alp e g a s s e m W C d n a e cio V s s e c c a o t B U S s s e r P u n e m b u s e h t A 9 2 k c a b y alp e h t t a e p e R N O F F O F F O 4 4 0 9 B 9 2 k c a b y alp e h t g nit a e p e r r o f e m itla v r e t n I s d n o c e s 0 6 o t 0 d n o c e s 1 f o s p e ts ni c e s 0 1 4 4 0 9 24 6 MENU SETUP p u o r G u n e M o N n oitc n u F s n oitc ele
322. p yt tiu c ri C r e vie c n a rt nia M e n y d o r e t e h r e p u s v n o c elp u r d a u Q K S F M A W C B S S e n y d o r e t e h r e p u s n ois r e v n o c elpir T M F r e vie c e r b u S e n y d o r e t e h r e p u s n ois r e v n o c elb u o D M A M F e g n a r y c n e u q e r F r e vie c s n a rt nia M s e p ytll A z H M 0 0 6 3 0 0 e p yt K z H M 2 5 1 2 4 1 s e p yt E ll A z H M 6 4 1 4 4 1 e p yt K z H M 0 5 4 0 2 4 s e p yt E ll A z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 0 2 T U w z H M 0 0 3 1 0 4 2 1 s e p ytll A z H M 0 0 6 3 0 0 e p yt K z H M 2 5 1 2 4 1 e p yt E z H M 6 4 1 4 4 1 e p yt K z H M 0 5 4 0 2 4 e p yt E z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 s e p ytll A z H M 0 0 3 1 0 4 2 1 r e vie c e r b u S e p yt K z H M 4 7 1 8 1 1 s e p yt E ll A z H M 6 4 1 4 4 1 e p yt K z H M 2 1 5 0 2 2 s e p yt E ll A z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 e p yt K z H M 4 7 1 8 1 1 e p yt E z H M 6 4 1 4
323. p steps 7 and 8 if you have already programmed the appropriate CTCSS frequency Note N When using split frequency operation select FM mode on both VFOs to use CTCSS N Use Nos 01 to 38 shown in the table above when selecting CTCSS frequencies via Wireless Remote Control page 82 N You can select a CTCSS frequency independent of a tone frequency N You cannot use the CTCSS function with the Tone or DCS functions CTCSS FREQ ID SCAN This function scans through all CTCSS frequencies to identify the incoming CTCSS frequency on a received signal You may find this useful when you cannot recall the CTCSS frequency that the other persons in your group are using 1 Press FUNC 6 CTCSS SEL The current CTCSS frequency appears 2 Press SCAN SG SEL to activate the CTCSS Freq ID scan C T blinks and every CTCSS tone frequency is scanned When the CTCSS frequency is identified the transceiver stops scanning and the identified frequency is displayed Press SCAN SG SEL again to resume scanning Press SCAN SG SEL to stop scanning while the CTCSS tone frequency ID scan is active Note Received signals are audible while scanning is in progress 36 8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS FM DCS OPERATION Digital Code Squelch DCS is another FM application which allows you to ignore not hear unwanted calls It functions the same way as CTCSS The only differences are the encode decode m
324. ppearing in the instruction manual Sub audible tone functions Tone CTCSS DCS in Satellite mode FM sub audible tone functions Tone CTCSS DCS can be enabled in Satellite mode and the Tone On Off status can be stored in each Satellite memory channel Although the Tone On Off status is stored in each Satellite memory channel the sub audible tone frequency code cannot be stored due to limited memory capacity The tone frequency code configuration from the normal VFO VFO A or VFO B is used instead The tone frequency code search function cannot be operated in Satellite mode Encoding and decoding is performed according to the data from the uplink frequency band TS 2000XE specifications For the frequency range of the transmitter page 105 and receiver page 106 refer to E type under the TS 2000 TS B2000 column Other specifications remain unchanged TS 2000E E2 TS B2000E E2 and TS 2000XE specifications The 7 MHz band frequency range of the transmitter page 105 has been expanded to 7 0 MHz 7 2 MHz AI Commands The TS 2000 TS B2000 transceivers do not support the following old AI commands AI 1 and AI 3 There may be incompatibilities between the transceiver and your PC logging software changes may not be reflected when using these commands I A F F O N O n oitc n u f I A n oit a m r o f n I o t u A e h t s d a e r r o st e S s r e t e m a
325. quencies is kept the same Normal Trace 5 If you want to switch to the normal trace mode press SPLIT REV disappears 6 To adjust the frequency on the sub band display normally the uplink frequency without tracing turn the RIT SUB control To adjust it using the trace function press A B M S to swap the main band frequency and sub band frequency then turn the Tuning control or MULTI CH control The following table shows which control to use when adjusting frequencies with tracing ON and OFF E C A R T R E C A R T N O E C A R T R E C A R T F F O g n i n u T lo rt n o c la m r o N b u S d n a nia M nia M H C I T L U M e s r a o C lo rt n o c b u S d n a nia M nia M B U S T I R lo rt n o c b u S b u S STORING SATELLITE MEMORY CHANNELS You can store all the above settings to one of 10 Satellite memory channels for the future operations 1 Press M IN then turn the MULTI CH control to select a channel from 0 to 9 2 Select your desired settings 3 Press M IN again to store the selection to the memory channel To quit press CLR Note The Satellite Memory channel does not hold the frequency adjustment values when the channel is changed So when you change the channel number or switch the transceiver OFF the adjustment frequency values are cleared if they are not stored by press
326. r a P 1 P F F O I A 0 N O sit a m r o f I A d e d n e tx E 2 r e vie c s n a rt e h t d e tc ele s si t a m r o f I A d e d n e tx e e h t n e h W s r e t e m a r a p e h t s d n e s ylla cit a m o t u a e t o N ni d e tr o p p u s t o n e r a s d n a m m o c I A dlo 3 I A d n a 1 I A 0 0 0 2 B S T 0 0 0 2 S T e h t t e S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A I 1 P d a e R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A I r e w s n A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 A I 1 P IF Commands and OI Commands SUPLEMENTO Este suplemento contiene informaci n no disponible en la fecha que se imprimi el manual de instrucciones y o corrige informaci n err nea que aparec a en dicho manual Funciones de tono subaudible Tono CTCSS DCS en modo Sat lite Las funciones de tono subaudible en FM Tono CTCSS DCS se pueden activar en el modo Sat lite y el estado de tono activado desactivado se puede guardar en cada canal de memoria Sat lite Aunque el estado de tono activado desactivado se guarda en cada uno de los canales de memoria Sat lite el c digo frecuencia de tono subaudible no se puede guardar debido a la capacidad limitada de memoria En su lugar se utiliza la configuraci n de c digo frecuencia de
327. r p si y e k d il a v A p e e b g n o l d e h c ti p h g i h A d e t p e c c a si y rt n e y e K A e n u t T A r o s tr a t s n a c S d e t e l p m o c s a h p e e b tr o h s d e h c ti p w o l A si n o it a r e p o d il a v n i n A d e m r o fr e p e d o c e s r o M n i L U ti u c ric L L P l a n r e t n i e h T d e t c e t e d si s u t a t s k c o l n u e d o c e s r o M n i S e b t o n n a c e n u T o t u A W C d il a v n i n a r o d e t e l p m o c d e r e t n e si y c n e u q e rf e d o c e s r o M n i 5 e b t o n n a c e n u T T A e h t n i h ti w d e t e l p m o c e m it d e ific e p s e d o c e s r o M n i R W S o o t si R W S s a n n e t n a e h T o t 1 0 1 r e v o h g i h e n u T T A m r o fr e p e d o c e s r o M n i K C E H C O P A e h t e r o f e b e t u n i m 1 n o it c n u f ff O r e w o P o t u A r e vi e c s n a rt e h t s e h c ti w s F F O e d o c e s r o M n i T B W C a r o f g n iti a W d e d
328. r radio band FILTE R S 1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60dB PW R 10 25 50 100 W AL C y Confirm that the operating mode is FM If it is not press FM AM NAR to select FM u Turn the SQL control clockwise until the background noise is just eliminated the MAIN band LED turns off i Turn the Tuning control to tune in a station You can use the MULTI CH control to change the frequency faster If you do not hear any stations the antenna may not be installed or connected properly Check the antenna connector on the rear panel page 13 7 3 YOUR FIRST QSO VHF UHF band TRANSMITTING PF F LOCK A 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC 3 CH3 REC 4 TONE SEL 5 METER 6 CTCSS SEL 7 NB LEVEL 8 AGC OFF 9 FINE STEP DCS SEL 0 SHIFT OFFSET ENT SEND PHONES MIC AT ANT1 2 PROC LEVEL VOX ATT PRE LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL MANUAL LO WIDTH HI SHIFT N R A N B C FUNC CALL C IN CLR MAIN AUTO CAR TX MONI DELAY NAR REV MIC PWR KEY LSB USB CW FSK FM AM SUB DISP SEL 1MHz CTRL MR MG SEL M IN QUICK MEMO M S REV TRACE MAIN MANUAL RF AF SQL SUB CH MULTI BC MAIN GAIN VFO CH MENU TF SET MAIN SUB SG SEL SCAN M VFO M IN RIT CW TUNE 9 6k STA RIT SUB CON XIT ALT SET CLEAR P C T _ HF
329. r AM mode Before Interfering tones After Receive pass band Desired signal Press B C MANUAL to toggle between the Auto Beat Cancel ON and OFF B C appears when the function is ON If desired you can manually control the beat cancel frequency MANUAL BEAT CANCEL ALL MODES Press FUNC B C MANUAL then turn the MANUAL BC control to select the single Beat Cancel frequency manually You can select the beat cancel frequency from approx 300Hz to 3000 Hz by turning the control Turn the control clockwise to select a higher frequency and counterclockwise to select a lower frequency Since the DSP Beat Cancel processes the incoming signals at the AF stage strong beat signals may control the AGC then weaken the target signal level In this case use the Auto Notch Filter instead to remove the beat signal from the IF passband filter Note While adjusting the MANUAL BC control the transceiver clicks This is not a malfunction NOISE REDUCTION N R 1 ALL MODES N R 2 SSB CW FSK AM This transceiver provides two types of Noise Reduction functions 1 and 2 for reducing random noise which interferes with the desired signal Trying them both is the easiest way to judge which function works more effectively under the current conditions Normally select Noise Reduction 1 Line Enhanced in SSB mode and Noise Reduction 2 SPAC in CW mode Press N R LEVEL to toggle between Noise Reduc
330. r a command from your computer to select transmit mode The MAIN band LED changes from green RX to red TX You may instead press SEND to manually select the transmit mode 8 Begin sending data from your computer Use Menu No 50C to select the appropriate AF output level The AF control cannot be used for this adjustment Press FUNC PWR TX MONI to monitor your signals Press FUNC PWR TX MONI again to quit this function 9 When finished transmitting enter a command from your computer to return to receive mode The MAIN band LED changes from red TX to green RX If you pressed SEND in step 7 press SEND again The frequencies measured in kHz commonly used for RTTY operation are listed below a d a n a C A S U 1 n oig e R U R A a cirf A e p o r u E 0 4 8 1 0 0 8 1 2 4 8 1 8 3 8 1 0 9 5 3 X D 5 4 6 3 5 0 6 3 0 2 6 3 0 8 5 3 0 4 0 7 X D 0 0 1 7 0 8 0 7 5 4 0 7 5 3 0 7 0 5 1 0 1 0 4 1 0 1 0 5 1 0 1 0 4 1 0 1 5 9 9 0 4 1 0 7 0 4 1 5 9 9 0 4 1 0 8 0 4 1 0 1 1 8 1 0 0 1 8 1 9 0 1 8 1 1 0 1 8 1 0 0 1 1 2 0 7 0 1 2 0 2 1 1 2 0 8 0 1 2 0 3 9 4 2 0 2 9 4 2 9 2 9 4 2 0 2 9 2 2 0 5 1 8 2 0 7 0 8 2 0
331. r levels out large fluctuations in your voice while you speak When using SSB FM or AM mode this leveling action effectively raises the average transmit output power resulting in a more understandable signal The amount of voice compression is fully adjustable You will notice that using the Speech Processor makes it easier to be heard by distant stations 1 Select USB LSB FM or AM mode 2 Press PROC LEVEL to switch the Speech Processor ON The PROC LED lights 3 Press FUNC PROC LEVEL to enter the Speech Processor input level adjustment mode 4 As you speak into the microphone turn the MULTI CH control so that the compression meter indicates that the compression level is around 10 dB while you speak Using higher compression will not improve your signal clarity or apparent signal strength Excessively compressed signals are more difficult to understand due to distortion and are less pleasant to hear than signals with less compression 5 Press FUNC PROC LEVEL to exit the Speech Processor input level adjustment 6 Press MIC CAR to enter the Speech processor output level Adjustment As you speak into the microphone turn the MULTI CH control so that the ALC meter reflects according to your voice level but does not exceed the ALC limit Press MIC CAR to exit when you finish the adjustment XIT TRANSMIT INCREMENTAL TUNING Similar to RIT XIT provides the ability to change your
332. r lower or upper sideband mode LSB or USB appears to show which sideband is selected 3 Press MIC CAR to activate the Microphone Gain Adjust The current gain level appears 4 Press SEND or press and hold Mic PTT The MAIN band LED lights red Refer to VOX page 39 for information on automatic TX RX switching 5 Speak into the microphone and adjust the MULTI CH control so that the ALC meter reflects your voice level but does not exceed the ALC limit Speak in your normal tone and level of voice Speaking too close to the microphone or too loudly may increase distortion and reduce intelligibility at the receiving end You may want to use the Speech Processor Refer to SPEECH PROCESSOR page 40 for details 6 Press SEND or release Mic PTT to return to receive mode The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off depending on the MAIN SQL setting 7 Press MIC CAR to quit the Microphone Gain Adjust Refer to COMMUNICATING AIDS beginning on page 37 for information on additional useful operation functions FM TRANSMISSION FM is a common mode for communicating on VHF or UHF frequencies Many amateur radio operators use their portable radios and mobile transceivers in FM mode You can also utilize repeaters to reach your friends when they are outside your antenna coverage Although FM requires a wider bandwidth when compared to SSB or AM mode i
333. ransceiver Each VFO VFO A and VFO B works independently so that a different frequency and mode can be selected When SPLIT operation is activated VFO A is used for reception and VFO B is used for transmission The opposite combination is also possible Press A B to toggle between VFO A and VFO B tA or tB appears to indicate which VFO is selected SATL A B M S REV TRACE VFO CH VFO M A B SPLIT CALL C IN UTO SB SB SUB SEL 1MHz CTRL MR M VFO MG SEL M IN M IN QUICK MEMO SATL A B M S REV TRACE MAIN MANUAL RF AF SQL SUB CH MULTI BC MAIN GAIN VFO CH VFO M A B SPLIT MENU TF SET MAIN SUB SG SEL SCAN RIT CW TUNE 9 6k STA RIT SUB CON XIT ALT SET CLEAR P C T _ HF VHE UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS 2000 SELECTING A BAND Press to select your desired band Holding down either key changes the bands continuously MAIN SUB CALL C IN UTO SB SB SUB SEL 1MHz CTRL MR M VFO MG SEL M IN M IN QUICK MEMO SATL A B M S REV TRACE MAIN MANUAL RF AF SQL SUB CH MULTI BC MAIN GAIN VFO CH VFO M A B SPLIT MENU TF SET MAIN SUB SG SEL SCAN RIT CW TUNE 9 6k STA RIT SUB CON XIT ALT SET CLEAR P C T _ HF VHE UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS 2000 19 5 OPERATING BASICS SELECT
334. reliably use the 38400 or 57600 bps transfer rates the RS 232C port of the computer must support these high speed communications parameters REMOTE MICROPHONE CONTROLLER If you have a DTMF microphone you can use the microphone as a wired remote control unit as described below 1 Plug the DTMF microphone into the microphone connector of the transceiver 2 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 45D 3 Press to select ON 4 Press MENU to store the setting and exit Menu mode The DTMF keys function as follows F M T D y e k n oitc n u F C N U F e d o m F M T D y e k n oitc n u F C N U F e d o m 1 n a c S 9 h cle u q S 1 n w o D p U 2 e n o T S S C T C S C D e d o C tc ele S 0 R W P 1 n w o D p U 3 V E R T F I H S A T N E 4 z H M B L R T C N I A M B U S 5 I N O M K C O L N O 2 C r e t a e p e R 6 1 e cio V K C O L F F O 2 D C N U F C N U F F F O 7 e m ulo V 1 n w o D n w o D 8 d n a B 1 p U p U 1 Use the Up and Down keys to change the settings of these functions 2 The LOCK function is for the microphone keypad Note N Microphone Remote does not function while transmitting N You can use the DTMF Memory function page 75 wit
335. resent If this happens turn the SQL control slightly counterclockwise N When the current channel is within one of the groups that you selected Scan starts with the current channel N When the current channel is outside all the groups that you selected Scan starts with the group number that is larger than and closest to the group number of the current channel N Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions CALL SCAN A Call channel can be stored for each operating band such as HF 50 MHz 144 MHz 430 440 MHz and 1 2 GHz TS 2000 Optional bands You can monitor one of these Call channels and the current operating frequency alternatively 1 Select the frequency you want to monitor In VFO mode press A B to select VFO A or B for the main transceiver or press SUB or CTRL to select the sub receiver VFO Then turn the Tuning control or the MULTI CH control to select the desired frequency In Memory Recall mode press VFO M to select the memory channel you want to monitor by turning the MULTI CH control 2 Press CALL C IN to recall the Call channel for the frequency band 70 14 SCAN 3 Press SCAN SG SEL 4 The Call channel and the selected VFO frequency or memory channel are monitored alternatively 5 To stop Scan press SCAN SG SEL or CLR VISUAL SCAN While you are receiving Visual Scan allows you to monitor frequencies near the current operating frequency
336. ri w r o tc e n n o c ytlu a f r o g n o r w 1 2 N O o t A 8 2 o N u n e M e g n a h C e h t tc e p s n I E T O M E R g niri w r o tc e n n o c y r a s s e c e n s a tc e rr o c d n a 6 7 4 9 z H M 4 4 1 z H M 0 5 r o z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 r a e nil z H G 2 1 t o n s e o d r eifilp m a e t a r e p o 1 2 3 F F O silo rt n o c r eifilp m a r a e nil e h T si elb a c lo rt n o c r eifilp m a r a e nil e h T e h t o t d e tc e n n o c E T O M E R r o tc e n n o c e h T T N O C T X E si g niri w r o tc e n n o c ytlu a f r o g n o r w 1 2 3 N O o t E 8 2 B 8 2 s o N u n e M e g n a h C e h t o t elb a c e h t tc e n n o C T N O C T X E r o tc e n n o c e h t tc e p s n I T N O C T X E r o tc e n n o c y r a s s e c e n s a tc e rr o c d n a g niri w 6 7 6 9 6 9 s s e c c a t o n n a c u o Y s r e t a e p e r e s u d n a 1 2 r o e n o t b u s a e riu q e r s r e t a e p e r y n a M s s e c c a o t e n o t z H 0 5 7 1 si y c n e u q e rf tfih s r o n oitc e rid tfih
337. rogram Scan If no Program channel is selected or available for the Program Scan the transceiver performs the VFO Scan N When performing the Program Scan on the sub receiver the frequencies must be within the sub receiver frequency range limitations Otherwise the Program Scan cannot be performed The same conditions apply to the main transceiver 5 Press SCAN SG SEL to start the Program Scan To quickly move towards a desired frequency while scanning turn the Tuning control or the MULTI CH control or press Mic UP DWN When in a mode other than FM mode turning the RIT SUB control clockwise decreases the scan speed and counterclockwise increases the speed The current scan speed is shown on the display P1 is the fastest speed and P9 is the slowest While in FM mode Scan automatically stops on a frequency where a signal is present The transceiver will either remain on that channel for a short time Time operated mode or until the signal drops out Carrier operated mode depending on which mode you select via Menu No 10 page 68 6 To stop Scan press SCAN SG SEL or CLR Note N If you are operating on the sub receiver and perform the Program Scan the sub receiver automatically skips the memory channels that cannot be scanned on the sub receiver The same conditions also apply to the main transceiver N If you have turned the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control clockwise far beyond the sque
338. s a elt a k c oln U y r o m e m o w t ts a elt a ni a t a d e r o t S sle n n a h c e h t ts ujd A L Q S slo rt n o c 6 4 9 1 8 6 8 6 6 4 9 1 lli w n a c S y r o m e M e h t f o e n o n a c s t o n e h t sle n n a h c d e r o ts sile n n a h c d e ris e d t u o d e k c ol T O N le n n a h c e h t d e tc ele s n a c S p u o r G h ti W p u o r g t n e r e ffid a ni si n a c s o t t n a w u o y y r o m e m e h t s nia t n o c t a h t p u o r g e h t tc ele S n a c s o t t n a w u o y le n n a h c 9 6 lli w n a c S m a r g o r P g nin n a c s tr a ts t o n e r a s eic n e u q e rf d n e d n a tr a ts e h T la cit n e di s eic n e u q e rf d n e d n a tr a ts t n e r e ffid e r o t S 2 6 t o n s e o d g nin u T yllu fs s e c c u s h sinif d n a elb a c laix a o c e h t f o e c n a d e p m i e h T d e h ct a m t o n s a w a n n e t n a h sinif yllu fs s e c c u s t o n s e o d g nin u T e h t h g u o h tla s n oitid n o c n o g nid n e p e d 1 3 n a h t r ella m s s e t a cid ni r e t e m R W
339. s e h t y alp sid o t T r o M L I d n a m m o c e h t n e e w t e b e c a p s a r e t n E s s alc d n a m m o c H Y A L P S I D x e r eifit n e di s s alc a d n a e m a n s r e t e m a r a p tr o p C 2 3 2 S R C N Y S A A s r e tc a r a h c C N T laic e p S R A H C C s r e t e m a r a p r e t n u o C H T L A E H H s r e t e m a r a p D I D I I s u t a ts k nil C N T o t C N T K N I L L s r e t e m a r a p r o tin o M R O T I N O M M s r e t e m a r a p g ni m i T G N I M I T T T I A W D W D 0 3 0 5 2 0 lit n u n oitc e t e d r eirr a c o n m o rfla v r e t ni e h t s eific e p S si r e t e m a r a p e h t f o tin u e h T n ois si m s n a rt f o n oit u c e x e s d n o c e silli m 0 1 O H C E E N O F F O N O o t s r e tc a r a h c d e vie c e r o h c e o t C N T e h t s e s u a c N O n e h W r e t u p m o c e h t R N R M R I F R I F F F O F F O N O t o n sitifi u o y o t t e k c a p e cit o n a s d n e s n oit a ts r e h t o e h T e cit o n a h c
340. s r e tc a r a h c D I S S n gis lla c r u o y s eific e p S N E L C A P P 8 2 1 5 5 2 0 a f o n oitr o p a t a d e h t f o h t g n el m u m ix a m e h t s eific e p S t e k c a p E M I T C A P T C A P 0 1 R E T F A Y R E V E n R E T F A 0 n 0 5 2 d eific e p s e h t f o sla v r e t nit a t e k c a p a s d n e s Y R E V E o t t e s fI r e tf a e c n o yln o t e k c a p a s d n e s R E T F A o t t e s fI n d oir e p s d n o c e silli m 0 0 1 si n f o tin u e h T n d oir e p d eific e p s e h t T S I S R E P E P 8 2 1 5 5 2 0 e h t r o f ytilib a b o r p e t alu cla c o t r e t e m a r a p a s eific e p S d o h t e m E M I T T O L S T S I S R E P T S I S R E P P P P N O F F O N O d o h t e m E M I T T O L S T S I S R E P e h t e s u o t C N T e h t s e s u a C F F O n e h w d o h t e m T I A W D e h t r o N O n e h w T E S E R T E S E R s d n a m m o c e h tlla r o f s u t a ts tlu a f e d e h t s e r o ts e R E M I T P S E R S E R 5 0 5 2 0 y a
341. s become intermittent Or if the CTCSS function is ON you may want to disable the squelch function temporarily to monitor the current channel activities In these cases use the MONITOR function to disable the squelch function temporarily To assign the MONITOR function to a PF key on the front panel 1 Press MENU and turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 51A 2 Press to select RX MONI 3 Press MENU to exit Menu mode Note You can also assign the MONITOR function to a programmable function key on an optional MC 47 microphone PF KEY You can program the front panel PF key to assign a function that you frequently use The default is Voice 1 for the optional Voice Synthesizer VS 3 page 91 You can assign one of the functions in MICROPHONE PF KEYS to this PF key accessing Menu No 51A RISE TIME OF CW The rise time of a CW signal is the time for the RF output to rise to its maximum power after the key is closed The default setting 6 ms is fine for slow to medium keying speed and normal weighting dot dash ratio The 4 2 or 1 ms settings are good for faster keying speeds 1 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 32 2 Press to select the desired rise time default is 6 ms 3 Press MENU to store the setting and exit Menu mode LOCK FUNCTIONS FREQUENCY LOCK FUNCTION Frequency Lock disables some keys and controls to prevent
342. second to start Visual Scan Memory Channel The center memory channel number is displayed on the main frequency display and the current scanning frequency is displayed on the sub frequency display The operating mode of the center memory channel and the number of channels to be scanned are displayed on the main dot matrix display The sub dot matrix display shows the relative S meter level of each frequency point vertically To pause Scan press DISP P appears on the main dot matrix display While the Visual Scan is paused you can monitor the paused frequency Press DISP again to resume the Visual Scan 71 14 SCAN 6 To change the current scanning frequency turn the MULTI CH control or press Mic UP DWN The displayed memory channel number changes and the cursor moves Press 1MHz SEL to make the current scanning frequency the new center scanning channel 7 To quit Visual Scan press CLR or SCAN SG SEL 72 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES APO Auto Power OFF You can set the TS 2000 X to switch OFF automatically if no keys or controls are pressed or adjusted for a certain period of time 1 minute before the transceiver switches OFF CHECK is output in Morse code You can select the time from OFF 60 120 and 180 minutes Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 57 Select the APO time from OFF 60 120 or 180 minutes Note N The APO
343. t Connect the IF 232C to the ACC 1 connector located on the compatible transceiver TS 2000 X TS 2000 X 870S 570 TS 2000 X Cross wired cable Cross wired cable See IF 232C manual IF 232C Straight cable COM Connector cable TS 450S 690S 850S 950SDX ANT DIN 6P RS 232C 25P DIN 6P 94 16 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT RTTY EQUIPMENT Use the ACC 2 connector to connect to the RTTY equipment Connect the RTTY key output line to pin 2 of the ACC 2 connector Connect the demodulation input line of the RTTY equipment to pin 3 of the ACC 2 connector page 95 Note Do not share a single power supply between the transceiver and the RTTY equipment Keep as wide a separation as possible between the transceiver and the RTTY equipment to reduce noise pickup by the transceiver MCP power supply TS 2000 X ACC 2 MCP Personal computer dumb terminal HF LINEAR AMPLIFIER Connect an external transmit power amplifier to the REMOTE connector 1 male REMOTE connector E07 0751 XX is supplied Switch ON the linear amplifier control relay via Menu No 28A The TX RX relay response time is 10 ms when you have selected CW Full Break in and 25 ms when you have selected CW Semi Break in Note The TX RX control method differs depending on external amplifier models Some amplifiers enter the TX mode when the control terminal is grounded For those amplifiers connect pin 2 of the REMOTE connector to the GND terminal
344. t N O F F O F F O 0 8 tibih n I X T 4 5 tibih ni X T N O F F O F F O 1 4 t e k c a P 5 5 e d o m n oit a cin u m m o c t e k c a P N O F F O F F O 9 4 6 5 d e e p s n oit a cin u m m o c tr o p M O C 0 0 2 9 1 0 0 6 9 0 0 8 4 s p b 0 0 6 7 5 0 0 4 8 3 0 0 6 9 s p b 0 5 O P A 7 5 n oitc n u f ff O r e w o P o t u A O P A 0 8 1 0 2 1 0 6 F F O s e t u ni m F F O 2 7 0 0 0 2 C R n oit a r u gif n o C 8 5 e d o m n oit a r e p o y s a e nit n o f 0 0 0 2 C R 2 T N O F 1 T N O F 1 T N O F 8 9 9 5 y alp sid xirt a m t o d X 0 0 0 2 S T le n a p 0 0 0 2 C R ts a rt n o c 1 f o s p e ts ni 6 1 o t 1 8 5 7 0 6 0 0 0 2 C R r o f e d o m y alp si D E V I T A G E N E V I T I S O P E V I T I S O P 8 9 0 0 0 2 S T r e t a e p e R s n oitc n u F yln O e p yt K 1 6 n oitc n u f r e t a e p e R s s e c c a o t B U S s s e r P u n e m b u s e h t A 1 6 tc ele s e d o m r e t a e p e R D E K C O L F F O S S O R C F F O 8 8 B 1 6 dlo h X T r e t
345. t ni g ulp n e h t F F O o t 4 5 o N u n e M e g n a h C s s e r P O T U A B S U B S L r o R A N M A M F e d o m e cio v a tc ele s o t 2 2 o N u n e M ni s g nitt e s e h t ts ujd A s s e r P C N U F 2 1 T N A T A tc ele s o t r o tc e n n o c a n n e t n a r e h t o e h t 3 1 4 9 1 1 4 2 7 102 18 TROUBLESHOOTING m elb o r P e s u a C elb a b o r P n oitc A e vitc e rr o C e g a P fe R o t g nit p m e tt A ni stlu s e r ti m s n a rt O L L E H e h t g nir a e p p a e g a s s e m e vie c e r e h t d n a g nie b e d o m d e r o ts e r 1 2 3 4 d e tc e n n o c t o n si a n n e t n a e h T yltc e rr o c d n a a n n e t n a e h t f o s e c n a d e p m i e h T ylr e p o r p t o n e r a r e vie c s n a rt d e h ct a m V 8 3 1 e dist u o si e g a tlo v t u p ni e h T C D C D V 8 5 1 o t 7 1 1 5 1 r e w o p C D e h t f o g nit a r t n e rr u c e h T h g u o n e t o n si ylp p u s 1 2 3 4 n oitc e n n o c a n n e t n a e h t k c
346. t has the finest audio quality among these modes When combined with the full quieting aspect of FM signals which suppress background noise on the frequency FM can be the best method for maintaining regular schedules with your local friends If necessary refer to OPERATING BASICS beginning on page 18 for details on how to receive 1 Select an operating frequency 2 Press FM AM NAR to select FM mode FM appears 3 Press SEND or press and hold Mic PTT The MAIN band LED lights red Refer to VOX page 39 for information on automatic TX RX switching 4 Speak into the microphone in your normal tone and level of voice Speaking too close to the microphone or too loudly may increase distortion and reduce intelligibility at the receiving end You can switch the Microphone Gain for FM between LOW MID and HIGH by using Menu No 41 LOW is usually appropriate however select high if other stations report that your modulation is weak The MULTI CH control has no effect in FM mode 5 Press SEND or release Mic PTT to return to receive mode The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off depending on the MAIN SQL setting Refer to COMMUNICATING AIDS beginning on page 37 for additional information on useful operation functions Note Microphone gain adjustment for SSB or AM has no effect in FM mode In FM mode you must select LOW
347. t inchang es Caract ristiques des mod les TS 2000E E2 TS B2000E E2 et TS 2000XE La plage de fr quences de la bande 7 MHz de l metteur page 105 a t largie 7 0 MHz 7 2 MHz SUPPLEMENTO Questo supplemento fornisce informazioni non disponibili quando stato stampato il manuale di istruzioni e o contiene correzioni su informazioni errate pubblicate sul manduale di istruzioni Funzioni di tono sotto udibile Tono CTCSS DCS in modalit satellite Le funzioni di tono sotto udibile Tono CTCSS DCS possono essere abilitate in modalit satellite e lo stato di tono attivato disattivato pu essere memorizzato in ciascun canale di memoria satellite Anche se lo stato di tono attivato disattivato memorizzato in ogni canale di memoria satellite la frequenza di tono sotto udibile codice non pu essere memorizzata a causa della capacit di memoria limitata Viene invece utilizzata la configurazione di frequenza tono codice da VFO VFO A o VFO B normale La funzione di ricerca della frequenza di tono codice non pu essere utilizzata in modalit satellite La codifica e la decodifica viene eseguita secondo i dati dalla banda di frequenza superiore Specifiche TS 2000XE Per la gamma di frequenza del trasmettitore pagina 105 e ricevitore pagina 106 fare riferimento a Tipo E nella colonna TS 2000 TS B2000 Le altre specifiche restano invariate Specifiche TS 2000E E2 TS B2000E E2 e TS 2
348. tch the Break in function ON then close the key or keyer paddle Connect a key or keyer paddle pages 3 39 then select CW mode PF F LOCK A SEND AT ANT1 2 PROC LEVEL VOX ATT PRE LEVEL PF F LOCK A 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC 3 CH3 REC 4 TONE SEL 5 METER 6 CTCSS SEL 7 NB LEVEL 8 AGC OFF 9 FINE STEP DCS SEL 0 SHIFT OFFSET ENT SEND PHONES MIC AT ANT1 2 PROC LEVEL VOX ATT PRE LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL MANUAL LO WIDTH HI SHIFT N R A N B C FUNC CLR MAIN AUTO CAR TX MONI DELAY NAR REV MIC PWR KEY LSB USB CW FSK FM AM DISP SEL 1MHz CTRL MEN M HF VHE UHF ALL MO For a detailed explanation on transmitting see BASIC COMMUNICATIONS beginning on page 28 Note When using AM CW or FSK mode you may adjust the carrier level In general adjust the level so that the ALC meter reads within the limits of the ALC zone For the adjustment procedures refer to the instructions for each mode in TRANSMISSION pages 28 29 30 SELECTING TRANSMIT POWER It is wise to select a lower transmit power if communication is still reliable This lowers the risk of interfering with others on the band When operating from battery power selecting a lower transmit power allows you more operating time before a charge is necessary This transceiver allows you to change th
349. ted by this selection 1 Press FM AM NAR to select AM mode on the main transceiver 2 Press FUNC FM AM NAR to toggle the selection between Normal and Narrow AM or AMN appears to indicate which IF bandwidth is selected for the main transceiver 7 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS 30 CW TRANSMISSION CW operators know that this mode is very reliable when communicating under worst conditions It may be true that newer digital modes rival CW as being equally as useful in poor conditions These modes however do not have the long history of service nor the simplicity that CW provides This transceiver has a built in electronic keyer that supports a variety of functions For details on using these functions refer to ELECTRONIC KEYER page 42 If necessary refer to OPERATING BASICS beginning on page 18 for details on how to receive 1 Select the operating frequency 2 Press CW FSK REV to select CW mode CW appears To precisely tune in another station use Auto Zero beat Refer to AUTO ZERO BEAT below 3 Press SEND The MAIN band LED lights red Refer to CW BREAK IN page 42 for information on automatic TX RX switching 4 Begin sending As you transmit you should hear a sidetone that lets you monitor your own transmission Refer to TX SIDETONE RX PITCH FREQUENCY below 5 Press SEND to return to receive mode T
350. tested to specification before shipment Under normal circumstances the transceiver will operate in accordance with these operating instructions All adjustable trimmers coils and resistors in the transceiver were preset at the factory They should only be readjusted by a qualified technician who is familiar with this transceiver and has the necessary test equipment Attempting service or alignment without factory authorization can void the transceiver warranty When operated properly the transceiver will provide years of service and enjoyment without requiring further realignment The information in this section gives some general service procedures requiring little or no test equipment SERVICE If it is ever necessary to return the equipment to your dealer or service center for repair pack the transceiver in its original box and packing material Include a full description of the problems experienced Include both your telephone number and fax number if available along with your name and address in case the service technician needs to call for further explanation while investigating your problem Don t return accessory items unless you feel they are directly related to the service problem You may return your transceiver for service to the authorized KENWOOD dealer from whom you purchased it or any authorized KENWOOD service center A copy of the service report will be returned with the transceiver Please do not send subassem
351. th other commercially available products and where lawful from another city state or country via a telephone connection Note N You can use the front panel controls while using computer control Settings done from the front panel are effective immediately N After the computer is disconnected or turned off all values and settings on the front panel are restored SETTING UP I Equipment Needed A PC equipped with an RS 232C serial port One straight cable This cable must have a 9 pin D Sub RS 232C female connector at one end and at the other end a 9 pin or a 25 pin D Sub RS 232C female connector that mates with the RS 232C port of your computer Transceiver control application To design your programs consult APPENDIX for the necessary information I Connections Connecting the transceiver to the computer is easy See the diagram given in CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT page 93 Note Before connecting this transceiver to the computer switch OFF the power to both the transceiver and the computer COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS In order to control the transceiver by computer you must first choose the communication parameters 1 On the computer configure your transceiver control application for 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity 2 On the transceiver select the same transfer rate and number of stop bits via Menu No 56 The defaults are 9600 bps and 1 stop bit Note To
352. the frequency on the display always shows the true carrier frequency for all modes If you want the transceiver to shift the receiving frequency to trace the receiving CW signal when changing the mode from SSB USB or LSB to CW switch this function ON The transceiver shifts the receiving frequency when changing the mode from SSB to CW So you can still hear the target signal and instantly transmit the signal in CW without adjusting the frequency 1 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 37 2 Press to select ON 3 Press MENU to store the settings and exit the Menu mode CW REVERSE RECEIVE This function pivots the BFO from the default position USB to another position LSB in CW mode It is sometimes effective to remove the interfering signals from the IF passband by pivoting the BFO 1 Press FUNC CW FSK REV CWR appears 3 To return to normal operation press FUNC CW FSK REV again AUTO CW TX IN SSB MODE If you operate both SSB and CW modes you can configure the transceiver to change the operating mode from SSB USB or LSB to CW and then transmit in CW mode when you operate the CW keyers 1 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 36 2 Press to select ON 3 Press MENU to store the settings and exit the Menu mode Note You must switch the CW break in function ON to change the mode and transmit in CW mode pa
353. the range between the start and end frequencies that you have stored in Conventional memory channels 290 to 299 Refer to STORING FREQUENCY RANGES page 62 for details on how to store the start and end frequencies You can select a maximum of 10 memory channels Memory channels 290 to 299 and sequentially scan the ranges that you stored in these channels Program Scan starts with the smallest channel number and repeats the sequence as described below 1 Press A B to select VFO A or VFO B If you are operating the sub receiver press VFO M to select VFO mode 2 Press FUNC SCAN SG SEL 3 If no Program scan channel is selected all memory channel numbers from 290 to 299 are displayed in small fonts Only the one s digit of each memory channel is displayed on the main dot matrix display 0 represents channel 290 1 represents channel 291 2 represents channel 292 etc 4 To select the Program scan frequency range press a numeric key 0 to 9 For example press 3 for channel 293 only or press 3 5 7 to select channels 293 295 and 297 When a channel is selected for the Program Scan the number is displayed in a larger font To temporarily deselect all the channels 290 to 299 so that you can perform the VFO Scan press DCS SEL Refer to VFO SCAN on page 66 Note N At least one of the valid Program Scan channels from 290 to 299 must be programmed and selected to perform the P
354. tion 1 Noise Reduction 2 and OFF or appears depending on which function is selected I Setting the N R 1 Level Adjustment The Noise Reduction 1 Line Enhanced Method uses an adaptive filter to reduce the noise element from the received signals When the S N ratio is reasonably good in SSB using N R 1 will improve the S N further While N R 1 is ON you can further adjust the noise reduction level by pressing FUNC N R LEVEL then turn the MULTI CH control to select the level from 1 to 9 or AUTO The default is AUTO I Setting the N R 2 Time Constant You can change the correlation time for Noise Reduction 2 SPAC When in SSB mode select the correlation time that allows you to hear signals with more clarity When receiving CW it is best to select the longest correlation time that allows reliable reception The longer the correlation time the better the S N ratio When N R 2 is ON press FUNC N R LEVEL then turn the MULTI CH control to select the correlation time from 2 ms to 20 ms The default is 20 ms Note N Using Noise Reduction 2 in SSB mode may lower the clarity of signals or induce pulse noise depending on the conditions N Only Noise Reduction 1 is available for the sub receiver However the level cannot be adjusted 57 12 REJECTING INTERFERENCE NOISE BLANKER Noise Blanker was designed to reduce pulse noise such as that generated by automobile ignitio
355. tly selected as the transmission band You can use the MAIN band frequency to transmit signals or to control the main transceiver functions If you press SUB the and icons move to the SUB band display This means that the SUB band is now selected as the transmission band and controls the functions You can use the SUB band frequency to transmit signals or control the sub receiver functions CONTROL BAND On some occasions you may need to adjust the frequency and or functions for the band you are not transmitting on To do this press CTRL For example if both and are on the MAIN band display pressing CTRL will move to the SUB band display remains on the MAIN band display This allows you to continue transmitting on the MAIN band while you adjust the functions of the sub receiver RECEIVING ACTIVATING THE SUB RECEIVER Press the SUB AF control to switch the sub receiver ON or OFF The orange LED above the SUB AF SQL control lights when the sub receiver is switched ON Note When switching the sub receiver ON or OFF you may hear a popping sound from the speaker This is not a malfunction CONTROLLING THE SUB RECEIVER To control all the available functions of the sub receiver press SUB to transfer the controls and transmission capability to the sub receiver The and icons move from the main transceiver to the sub receiver When you press SEND
356. transmit frequency by 20 00 kHz in steps of 10 Hz without changing your receive frequency If the Fine Tuning function is ON the step size is 1 Hz 1 Press XIT ALT XIT and the XIT offset appear 2 If required press CLEAR to reset the XIT offset to 0 3 Turn the RIT SUB control to change your transmit frequency 4 To turn XIT OFF press XIT ALT The transmit frequency is returned to the frequency that was selected prior to step 1 Note N XIT works only on the main transceiver N The frequency shift set by the RIT SUB control is also used by the RIT function Therefore changing or clearing the XIT offset also affects the RIT offset N When the XIT frequency exceeds the limit of available transmission frequency the transceiver automatically stops transmitting Transmit power Transmit power Time Time Speech Processor OFF Speech Processor ON 41 9 COMMUNICATING AIDS CUSTOMIZING TRANSMIT SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS The quality of your transmitted signal is important regardless of which on air activity you pursue However it is easy to be casual and overlook this fact since you don t listen to your own signal The following sub sections provide information that will help you tailor your transmitted signal I TX Filter Bandwidth SSB AM Use Menu No 22 to select one of the following transmit bandwidths 2 0 kHz 2 2 kHz 2 4 kHz default 2 6 kHz 2 8 kHz or 3
357. trol so that the calibrated power meter slightly reflects to your voice level FM Skip this step i When you finish speaking press SEND to return to receive mode o Press MIC CAR to quit the Microphone Gain Adjustment Note If desired access Menu No 41 page 28 to try the Microphone Gain Adjust for FM This completes your introduction to the TS 2000 X but there is a great deal more to know OPERATING BASICS page 18 and the following chapters explain all the functions of this transceiver starting with the most basic commonly used functions 6 YOUR FIRST QSO VHF UHF band If your primary operating band is VHF 144 MHz or UHF 430 440 MHz the TS 2000 X can also serve you as a powerful All mode VHF UHF transceiver The instructions below are intended only for a quick guide to get you up on the air on the VHF UHF band If you encounter problems or there is something you don t understand read the detailed explanations given later in this manual RECEIVING PF F LOCK A 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC 3 CH3 REC 4 TONE SEL 5 METER 6 CTCSS SEL 7 NB LEVEL 8 AGC OFF 9 FINE STEP DCS SEL 0 SHIFT OFFSET ENT SEND PHONES MIC AT ANT1 2 PROC LEVEL VOX ATT PRE LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL MANUAL LO WIDTH HI SHIFT N R A N B C FUNC CALL C IN CLR MAIN AUTO CAR TX MONI DELAY NAR REV MIC PWR
358. ts the transceiver from being placed in transmit mode No signal can be transmitted when this function is ON even if the PTT or SEND is pressed TX Inhibit OFF Transmission is allowed TX Inhibit ON Transmission is not allowed Switch the function ON or OFF via Menu No 54 The default is OFF CHANGING FREQUENCY WHILE TRANSMITTING Moving your frequency while transmitting is usually an unwise practice due to the risk of interfering with other stations However if necessary by using the Tuning control you can change the operating frequency while transmitting You also can change the XIT offset frequency while in transmit mode While transmitting if you select a frequency outside the transmit frequency range the transceiver is automatically forced to receive mode If you selected transmit mode by pressing SEND transmission will not resume until you select a frequency inside the transmit frequency range at which time you must press SEND again 0 7 2 2 Amplitude Audio frequency kHz Bass boost High boost Off Conventional Formant pass 42 9 COMMUNICATING AIDS CW BREAK IN Break in allows you to transmit CW without manually switching between transmit and receive modes Two types of Break ins are available Semi Break in and Full Break in Semi Break in When the key contacts open the transceiver automatically waits for the passage of the time period that you have selected The transce
359. u leave it ON in order to detect unexpected errors and malfunctions You can also change the output level of the beeps by accessing Menu No 12 and selecting 1 to 9 The transceiver generates Morse code to tell you which mode is selected when you change operating modes When you change operating Modes the following Morse code sounds e d o M tu ptu O e d o C e sr o M B S L L B S U U W C C R W C R C K S F R R K S F R R N M A M A A N M F M F F 1 Press and hold USB LSB AUTO POWER to turn the transceiver ON 2 Press or to select the band to add the frequency points 3 Select a memory channel number by turning the MULTI CH control 4 Turn the Tuning control to select a desired frequency point to change the operating mode Or press ENT to enter the desired frequency point page 37 using the numeric keys 5 Press one of the mode keys to select the desired operating mode The selected mode appears on the main dot matrix display 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have added all the data 7 Press CLR to store the data The table below shows the default Auto Mode frequency points for the HF 50 MHz band When you activate the Auto Mo
360. u what you are selecting Though user friendly this transceiver is technically sophisticated and some features may be new to you Consider this manual to be a personal tutorial from the designers Allow the manual to guide you through the learning process now then act as a reference in the coming years FEATURES All mode operation from HF to 1 2 GHz TS 2000 TS B2000 Optional amateur radio band with DSP functions Dual high speed Digital Signal Processing DSP units Adjustable DSP filter frequencies High speed Digital Automatic Gain Control AGC A second independent sub receiver for the 144 MHz and 430 440 MHz bands FM and AM mode only A built in Antenna Tuner for HF 50 MHz band A built in 9600 1200 bps TNC for DX Packet Cluster Tune P C T and Sky Command II operations DX Packet Cluster Tune P C T for DX hunting Instant Satellite communication key A razor sharp DSP filter up to 50 Hz for CW operation SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES After carefully unpacking the transceiver identify the items listed in the table We recommend you keep the box and packing material below in case you need to repack the transceiver in the future e n o h p o r ci M X X 2 5 3 0 1 9 T 1 1 elb a c r e w o p C D X X 7 5 1 3 0 3 E 1 1 g ulp N I D nip 7 X X 1 5 7 0 7 0 E 1 1 g ulp N I D nip 8 X X 1 5
361. uency operation One typical case which requires this type of operation is when you use an FM repeater page 32 Another typical case is when you call a rare DX station When a rare or desirable DX station is heard that operator may immediately get many simultaneous responses Often such a station is lost under the noise and confusion of many calling stations If you find that you are suddenly being called by many operators it is your responsibility to control the situation You may announce that you will be listening up 5 kHz from your present transmit frequency or listening down between 5 and 10 kHz 1 Press MAIN A B to select VFO A or VFO B on the main transceiver tA or tB appears to show which VFO is selected 2 Select an operating frequency The frequency selected at this point will be used for transmitting To copy the selected VFO frequency to the other VFO press A B 3 Press A B to select the other VFO 4 Select an operating frequency The frequency selected on this VFO will be used for receiving 5 Press SPLIT SPLIT appears Each press of A B reverses the receive and transmit frequencies 6 To quit split frequency operation press SPLIT again SPLIT disappears If you access Menu No 06A and select ON you can recall a memory channel to use for either receiving or transmitting For more information ref
362. urn this control to select the desired frequency offset pages 38 40 Turn to adjust the sub receiver frequency when the RIT and XIT functions are switched OFF and the sub receiver is switched ON page 45 5 MANUAL BC control Turn to adjust the audio notch frequency while the DSP beat cancel function is set to the manual frequency adjustment mode page 56 6 MAIN RF GAIN control Turn to adjust the radio frequency gain for the main transceiver page 18 7 MULTI CH control In VFO mode rotate to step the operating frequency up or down page 37 In memory channel mode rotate to select a memory channel page 58 Also used for selecting Menu numbers when accessing the Menu mode page 21 and as a selector to choose settings for various functions activated by front panel buttons The MULTI CH LED lights when the setting s can be changed using the MULTI CH control 8 MAIN SQL control Used for muting squelching the speaker the head phones and AF output on ACC2 13 pin DIN connector when no receive signal is present on the main transceiver page 19 9 MAIN AF control Turn to adjust the volume on the main transceiver page 19 0 SUB SQL control Used for muting squelching the speaker head phone and AF output on ACC2 13 pin DIN connector when no receive signal is present on the sub receiver page 46 1 SUB AF control Press to switch the sub receiver ON or OFF When it is ON th
363. uter to another on a network Packets can be transmitted on radio waves as well as on communications lines Besides a transceiver and a computer all you need is a terminal node controller TNC or Multimode Communications Processor MCP One of the tasks of TNCs and MCPs is to convert data packets to audio tones and vice versa This transceiver has a built in TNC which allows you to use basic not full packet applications A variety of packet applications developed by hams include packet bulletin board systems PBBSs PBBSs are created and maintained by volunteers called System Operators SysOp You may access one of your local PBBSs to send e mail download files or obtain various useful information Thousands of PBBSs which have formed a worldwide network relay e mail to their intended destinations around the world When you access a local PBBS for the first time you often need to register as a new user After you are successfully registered it will then be available as your home PBBS E mail addressed to you will be held under a directory called a mailbox on your home PBBS To send e mail you must designate the address of a recipient using his or her call sign and the call sign of his or her home PBBS ex KD6NUH KJ6HC In this example the e mail is addressed to KD6NUH whose home PBBS is KJ6HC If your home PBBS cannot find KJ6HC in its address file to forward your mail you must designate the address in more detail You
364. ver also causes the function to switch ON for the same band of the main transceiver PRE AMPLIFIER The pre amplifier amplifies the level of received signals It is useful when the receiving signal is weak If there is no strong interference from adjacent frequencies switch the pre amplifier ON to raise the receiving signal level Since the main transceiver and sub receiver share the same antenna for the 144 MHz and 430 440 MHz bands activating the pre amplifier function for the sub receiver also causes the function to switch ON for the same band of the main transceiver DUAL WATCH If different frequency bands are set on the main transceiver and sub receiver you can still monitor the other band activities while transmitting on the TX band It is useful that you can still monitor the local repeater frequency VHF or UHF band while you are working on a DX station on the HF band of the main transceiver If you have the same frequency band VHF or UHF band for the main transceiver and sub receiver you can monitor both frequencies independently at the same time However both receivers will temporarily mute when you transmit because the transceiver shares the same 144 MHz and 430 440 MHz band antenna between the main transceiver and sub receiver SCAN All types of scanning are also available for the sub receiver However the operating frequency range is limited to the sub receiver s frequency coverage Refer to SCAN
365. ver is retransmitted on the main transceiver Similarly a signal received on the main transceiver can be retransmitted on the sub receiver s frequency You can use any available frequency on the main transceiver or sub receiver to receive and transmit However you cannot retransmit the received signals that are outside the available transmission frequencies Additionally you must use a different antenna for transmitting and receiving For example if you receive a VHF signal on the sub receiver you can retransmit it using UHF on the main transceiver You cannot retransmit the signal using VHF of the main transceiver Note For the repeater function to operate the squelch levels of the main transceiver and sub receiver must be adjusted so that no background noise can be heard LOCKED BAND REPEATER The transceiver always uses the same band to receive and retransmits the received signals on the other band 1 Select a desired receive frequency on the sub receiver 2 Press MAIN and select a desired transmit frequency on the main transceiver 3 Adjust the squelch threshold level so that both receivers mute 4 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 61A 5 Select LOCKED using appears Note You can also reverse the receive and transmit bands so that you receive on the main transceiver and transmit on the sub receiver s frequency CROSS BAND REPEATER The cross b
366. wing setups you can start Sky Command II operation Without programming these parameters you cannot perform Sky Command II operation On the TS 2000 Transporter 1 Select the desired HF frequency that you want to be controlled on the main transceiver 2 Select an open VHF frequency in FM mode for the main transceiver and another open UHF frequency in FM mode for the sub receiver 3 Press MENU then turn the MULTI CH control to access Menu No 62E 4 Select T PORTER Transporter 5 Press MENU to enter the Transporter mode On the TM D700A Commander 1 Select the same VHF and UHF frequencies that you selected for the TS 2000 Transporter 2 Access Menu 4 4 to select COMMANDER PRESS 0 KEY TO START COMMANDER appears 3 Press 0 on the DTMF Mic of the TM D700A to start the Sky Command II operation CONTROL OPERATION After setting up both the TS 2000 Transporter and the TM D700A Commander for Sky Command II operation press Mic 0 on the Commander While in Sky Command mode the Mic keys of the Commander will function as described below Each time you press a key the Commander will automatically enter transmit mode and send the corresponding control command to the Transporter F H e h t h cti w s o T F F O r e vie c s n a rt ci M s s e r P 1 y c n e u q e rf e h t e g n a h c o T n o le n n a h c y r o m
367. y Press to toggle the operating controls between the main transceiver and the sub receiver The transmission band is not affected by this key 7 MENU key Press to select or cancel the Menu mode that is used for activating and configuring functions page 21 8 TF SET key While operating split frequency press to monitor or change your transmit frequency page 31 9 Up Down keys Press to step through all the Amateur radio bands consecutively page 18 Also used to make selections from the Menu page 21 and to check the Start and End frequencies of the Scan function page 62 0 MAIN key Press to transfer the operating controls to the MAIN transceiver Also moves the transmission band to the main transceiver frequency 1 SUB key Press to transfer the operating controls to the sub receiver Also moves the transmission band to the sub receiver frequency 2 SCAN SG SEL key Press to start or stop the Scan function page 66 Press FUNC SCAN SG SEL to select a scan group page 69 3 CALL C IN key Press to recall a call channel for the selected operating band HF 50 MHz 144 MHz 430 440 MHz 1 2 GHz TS 2000 TS B2000 Optional Press FUNC CALL C IN to write a new Call Channel to the memory page 75 11 4 GETTING ACQUAINTED HF VHE UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS 2000 PF F LOCK A 1 CH1 REC 2 CH2 REC 3 CH3 REC 4 TONE SEL 5 METER 6 CTC
368. y alp si D 0 0 n oit a ni m ulli y e K 1 0 xirt a m t o d X 0 0 0 2 S T le n a p 0 0 0 2 C R ts a rt n o c y alp sid 9 5 N O I T C N U F Y R O M E M n oit a r e p o tilp s O F V y r o m e M A 6 0 le n n a h c y r o m e m F F O d e xif r o N O elb a n u T s eic n e u q e rf B 6 0 n oitc n u F u n e M o N R E I F I L P M A d n a b F H r o f y ale d lo rt n o c r eifilp m a r a e niL A 8 2 d n a b z H M 0 5 r o f y ale d lo rt n o c r eifilp m a r a e niL B 8 2 z H M 4 4 1 r o f y ale d lo rt n o c r eifilp m a r a e niL d n a b C 8 2 r o f y ale d lo rt n o c r eifilp m a r a e niL d n a b z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 D 8 2 d n a b z H G 2 1 r o f y ale r lo rt n o c r eifilp m a r a e niL E 8 2 A N N E T N A T N A X R F H e h t m o rf t u p ni n a elb a n E r o tc e n n o c 8 1 R E N U T A N N E T N A g nivie c e r elih w T A e nil n I 7 2 g nin u t e h t s e t elp m o c T A n e h w dlo h X T 6 2 N O I T C N U F P E E B le v elt u p t u o p e e B 2 1 W C e d o m B S S ni X T W C o t u A 6
369. y c n e u q e rf X R p e ts y c n e u q e rf X T a p e ts y c n e u q e rf X T y c n e u q e rf e n o T a y c n e u q e rf e n o T y c n e u q e rf S S C T C a y c n e u q e rf S S C T C e d o c S C D a e d o c S C D S C D S S C T C e n o T F F O N O a S C D S S C T C e n o T F F O N O e m a N y r o m e M a e m a N y r o m e M le n n a h C y r o m e M F F O N O t u o k c o L a le n n a h C y r o m e M F F O t u o k c o L 9 8 2 0 0 le n n a h C a 9 9 2 0 9 2 le n n a h C y c n e u q e rf X R a y c n e u q e rf X R X T x elp m is y c n e u q e rf X T a X R r o f e d o M a X R X T r o f e d o M x elp m is X T r o f e d o M a y c n e u q e rf t e sff O a y c n e u q e rf t e sff O n oitc e rid tfih S a n oitc e rid tfih S F F O N O e s r e v e R a F F O N O e s r e v e R p e ts y c n e u q e rf X R a y c n e u q e rf X R X T x elp m is p e ts p e ts y c n e u q e rf X T a y c n e u q e rf e n o T a y c n e u q e rf e n o T y c n e u q e rf S S C T C a
370. yt K s s el r o V 1 1 0 z H M 0 0 3 1 0 4 2 1 s e p ytll A s s el r o V M A B d 0 1 N S 6 1 3 z H M 5 0 7 1 5 0 s s el r o V 0 2 z H M 5 4 2 5 0 7 1 s s el r o V 3 1 z H M 0 0 3 5 4 2 s s el r o V 3 1 z H M 0 4 5 0 0 5 s s el r o V 0 1 z H M 6 4 1 4 4 1 s e p yt E ll A s s el r o V 4 1 z H M 8 4 1 4 4 1 e p yt K s s el r o V 0 1 z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 s e p yt E ll A s s el r o V 0 1 z H M 0 5 4 0 3 4 e p yt K s s el r o V 0 1 z H M 0 0 3 1 0 4 2 1 s e p ytll A s s el r o V M F D A N I S B d 2 1 2 2 0 z H M 0 0 3 0 8 2 s s el r o V 2 2 0 z H M 0 4 5 0 0 5 s s el r o V 8 1 0 z H M 6 4 1 4 4 1 s e p yt E ll A s s el r o V 5 2 0 z H M 8 4 1 4 4 1 e p yt K s s el r o V 8 1 0 z H M 0 4 4 0 3 4 s e p yt E ll A s s el r o V 8 1 0 z H M 0 5 4 0 3 4 e p yt K s s el r o V 8 1 0 z H M 0 0 3 1 0 4 2 1 s
371. z Scan speed in FM mode N You cannot change the scan speed on the sub receiver MEMORY SCAN Memory Scan monitors all memory channels in which you have stored frequencies All channel Scan or only a desired group of memory channels Group Scan Scan automatically stops at a channel where a signal is present regardless of the operating mode The transceiver will either remain on that channel for a short time Time operated mode or until the signal drops out Carrier operated mode Use Menu No 10 to select either mode The default is Time operated SCAN RESUME METHOD The transceiver stops scanning at the frequency or memory channel where a signal is detected It then continues scanning according to which resume mode you have selected You can choose one of the following modes The default is Time operated mode Time Operated mode The transceiver remains on a busy frequency or memory channel for approximately 6 seconds then continues to scan even if the signal is still present Carrier Operated mode The transceiver remains on the busy frequency or memory channel until the signal drops out There is a 2 second delay between signal dropout and scan resumption 1 Press MENU to enter Menu mode 2 Turn the MULTI CH control to select Menu No 10 3 Press to select TO Time Operated or CO Carrier Operated 4 Press MENU to complete the setting and exit Menu mode You can lock

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Untersuchungen zu einer möglichen Vorverlegung  Oracle Database Gateway for DB2 Installation and User's Guide  LED照明器/拡散板 LED照明器/LED照明器用電源コントローラ  iDA-X305 - Car Audio Perú  equipos compactos y partidos horizontales tas  Operating Instructions - 4 Office Technical Support  Acreditación (13 Kbytes pdf)  Techcon Systems TS6500 CIM Automatic Techkit Mixer  Instalacion  Questions / Réponses DP janvier 2012  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file